TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS

REVIEW REQUEST
6 April 2007
DATE ____________
SENT TO:
PowerCommand MCM3320
TITLE ___________________________________ Kevin Aufderhar
Service Manual
TYPE ___________________________________ Gary Olson
Paul Dahlen
900−0663
LITERATURE NO. _________________________ Rich Scroggins

IMPORTANT
THIS MATERIAL MUST BE RETURNED BY
25 Apr 2007
_____________________ TO MEET SCHEDULES.

PLEASE REVIEW AND APPROVE THIS MATERIAL AND RETURN TO WRITER NO LAT-
ER THAN ABOVE DATE. WE MUST HAVE THIS MATERIAL TO FINALIZE, PRINT,
AND MEET PRODUCT SHIPPING SCHEDULE.
WRITER’S REMARKS TO REVIEWER REVIEWER’S REMARKS TO WRITER

This manual needs to be thoroughly re-

viewed to make sure that it has complete
and accurate information. Although it is
nearly 300 pages, I suspect that more could
be added.
I know that the menu section is missing
some information that I hope you can pro-
vide. This includes some parameter ranges,
default values, and explanations of what is
accomplished with these menus.

Approved By: _____________________

Jim Lobitz, MN OU3K
Writer _________________________
EXT 7343 Date: ___________
 PRELIMINARY

Service Manual

PowerCommand
Master Control Module (MCM3320)

Printed in U.S.A. 900−0663 4-2007

Table of Contents
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
How to Obtain Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

2. Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
MCM3320 Control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Operator Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Bargraph Display (HMI112) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Panel Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Converter Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
System Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Master Control Subsystem Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Application Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Breaker Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Power Transfer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Priority Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Master Load Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Load Demand Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Discrete Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Synchronizer Enable Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Utility Source Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Test Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Extended Parallel Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Fault Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Transfer and Retransfer Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Genset Circuit Breaker Position, Monitoring and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Circuit Breaker Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Utility Circuit Breaker Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Genset Circuit Breaker Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
ModBus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

i
Table of Contents (Continued)
Discrete Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Relay Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Utility Main Neutral Contactor 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Genset Main Neutral Contactor 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Genset Main Circuit Breaker Close Relay 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Genset Main Circuit Breaker Open Relay 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
N.C. Genset Start Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
COM Genset Start Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
N.O. Genset Start Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Utility Main Circuit Breaker Close Relay 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Utility Main Circuit Breaker Open Relay 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Low Side Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Load Govern Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Load Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Paralleling Genset Breaker Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Configurable Output 1 (Common Warning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Configurable Output 2 (Fail to Synchronize) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Configurable Output 3 (Genset Available) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Configurable Output 4 (Utility Available) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Configurable Output 5 (Fail to Disconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Configurable Output 6 (Synchronized) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Configurable Output 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Configurable Output 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

3. MCM3320 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

AC Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
AC Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
AC Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Master Synchronizing and Voltage Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Ratings and Typical Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Synchronizing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Phase Synchronizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Slip Frequency Synchronizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Voltage Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Synchronizer Enabling Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Sync Enable Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Auto / Manual Synchronizer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Genset Sensor Operation During Synchronizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Synchronizer Polarity Inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Maximum Allowable Synchronizer Range vs. Load Share Gains . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Synchronizer Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

ii
Table of Contents (Continued)
Fail to Synchronize Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Synchronizer Phase Rotation Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Synchronizer Output Limit Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Permissive Sync Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Permissive Close Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Dead Bus Close Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Circuit Breaker Control Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Breaker Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Breaker Position Sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Breaker Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Power Transfer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Auto/Manual Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
PTC Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Genset Run/Stop Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
PTC States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
No Source Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Utility Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Genset Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Paralleled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Undervoltage Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Overvoltage Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Frequency Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Phase Rotation Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Loss of Phase Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Main Breaker Tripped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Fail to Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Position Contact Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Genset Run/Stop Control Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
PTC Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Transfer Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Retransfer Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Transition Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Open Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Hard Closed Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Soft Closed Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

iii
Table of Contents (Continued)
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Test Without Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Test With Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Fail to Sync Open Transition Retransfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
System Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Multiple Transfer Pair Sequencing (External) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Load Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Extended Paralleling (Base Load / Peak Shave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Load Ramping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Number of Gensets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Load Govern Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
ModBus RTU Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
ModBus Activity LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
System Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Real Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
InPower Service Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Load Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Load Add and Load Shed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

4. System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Closed Transition Failure Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Closed Transition Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Optional Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Load Demand Operation Using a Fixed Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Load Demand Operation Using Run Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
PTC Normal Operating Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Isolated Bus Normal Operating Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Common Bus Normal Operating Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Transfer Pair Normal Operating Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

5. Setup and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Meter Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Synchronizer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Setting up the Load Share Gains for Synchronizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
System Setup with PCC3100 and PCC3200 Genset Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Conditions Necessary for Synchronizing to Occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Synchronizing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

iv
Table of Contents (Continued)
Voltage Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Slip Frequency Synchronizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Setup the Synchronizer Gains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Synchronizer Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Permissive Close (Sync Check) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Synchronizer Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Fail to Synchronize Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Synchronizer Phase Rotation Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Synchronizer Output Limit Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Voltage and Current Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Circuit Breaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Circuit Breaker Fail to Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Positions Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Recharge Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Fail to Fault Close Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Fail to Open Fault Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Genset and Utility Voltage and Frequency Sensor Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Undervoltage Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Overvoltage Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Frequency Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Phase Rotation Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Loss of Phase Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Genset and Utility Bus Sensors Settings for Synchronizer Applications . . . . 5-14
Auto / Manual Synchronizer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Genset Sensor Operation During Synchronizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Load Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Master Load Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Extended Paralleling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Load Ramping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Number of Gensets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Program Overlapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Exception Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Real Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Load Add / Load Shed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

v
Table of Contents (Continued)

6. Operator Panel Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Digital Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Utility Parallel Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Lockout Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Warning Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Remote Start Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Auto Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Manual Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Operator Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Operator Panel System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Communication Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fault Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Information Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Screen Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
System Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Master Synchronizer Only System Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Isolated Bus With or Without GM System Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Common Bus or Transfer Pair System Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Default Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
No Source or Synchronizer Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Timers Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Parallel Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
MCM3320 Menu System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Control Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Adjust Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Monitor Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Faults Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
About Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Control Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Viewing Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Viewing and Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Enter Password Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Adjusting Values/Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Control Test Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Test Start/Stop Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Test Settings Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Control Extended Paralleling Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Extended Paralleling Start/Stop Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Extended Paralleling Settings Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

vi
Table of Contents (Continued)
Load Demand Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Control Load Demand Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Load Demand: Generator Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Load Demand: Genset Fixed Sequence Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Load Demand: Genset Run Hours Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Load Demand: Next Genset Start-Up/Shut-Down Status Menu . . . . . . . . 6-24
Load Demand: Capacity Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Control Load Add Shed Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Load Add Shed Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Add Levels Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Shed Levels Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Capacity Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Adjust Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Viewing Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Viewing and Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Setup Password Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Adjusting Values/Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
AC Meter Adjustment Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
AC Meter Adjust Genset Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
AC Meter Adjust Utility Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
AC Meter Genset Setup Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
AC Meter Utility Setup Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Genset Circuit Breaker Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Utility Circuit Breaker Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Adjust Communications Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Configuration Output Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Adjust Load Control Output Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Load Control Setup Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Miscellaneous Load Control Setup Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Genset Load Control Setup Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Utility Load Control Setup Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Load Control Tuning Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Load Control kW Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Load Control kVAR Tuning Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
PTC Sensors Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
PTC Transfer Time Delay Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
PTC Generator Sensor Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Miscellaneous PTC Generator Sensor Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
PTC Genset Undervoltage Sensor Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
PTC Genset Overvoltage Sensor Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
PTC Genset Frequency Sensor Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64

vii
Table of Contents (Continued)
PTC Utility Sensor Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Miscellaneous PTC Utility Sensor Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
PTC Utility Undervoltage Sensor Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
PTC Utility Overvoltage Sensor Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
PTC Utility Frequency Sensor Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
Sync Check Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
Sync Adjust Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Sync Adjust Miscellaneous Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Sync Adjust Frequency Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Sync Adjust Voltage Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
System Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
System Application Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
System kW Ratings Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
Scheduler Set Clock Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
Scheduler Daylight Savings Time Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
Scheduler Programs Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Scheduler Program Exceptions Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
LCD Display Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Screen Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
CRC Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Lamp Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Load Demand Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
Load Add Shed Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100
Genset Bus Overload Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
Monitor Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
Monitor AC Meter Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108
System AC Meter Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108
Genset AC Meter Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
Utility AC Meter Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
System AC Meter Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122
Monitor Analog In Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124
Monitor Analog Out Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124
Monitor Breakers Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126
Monitor Communication Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126
Monitor PTC Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-128
Genset Sensors Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-128
PTC Status Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-130
PTC Timers Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-132
Utility Sensors Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-134
Monitor Load Control Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-136
Monitor Priority Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-136

viii
Table of Contents (Continued)
Monitor Relay Outputs Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-136
Monitor Switch Inputs Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-138
Monitor Sync Check Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-140
Monitor Synchronizer Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-142
Monitor System Status Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-144
Monitor Load Demand Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-146
Monitor Load Add Shed Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-148
Add Level Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-148
Shed Level Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-148
Load Status ATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-148
Load Status Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-148
Monitor Generator Bus Overload Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-150
Monitor Scheduler Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-150
Faults Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-152
Current Fault Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-152
Active Event Table Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-152
Event Occurrence Table Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-152
Active Fault Table Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-152
Fault History Table Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-152
Fault Occurrence Table Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-152

7. Testing and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Fault and Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
System Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
System and diagnostic Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Test and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Bench Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Malfunctioning Lamps, Meters, Gauges, and/or Starter Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Paralleling Breaker Fail-to-Close Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Troubleshooting Using Fault / Event Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Abnormal Scenarios / Fault Reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Utility Main Fail to Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Utility Main Fail to Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Utility Main Breaker Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Utility Main Breaker Tripped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Utility Main Breaker Disconnected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Genset Main Fail to Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Genset Main Fail to Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

ix
Table of Contents (Continued)
Genset Main Breaker Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Genset Main Breaker Tripped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Genset Main Breaker Disconnected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Fail to Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Maximum Parallel Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Fail to Synchronize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Genset Bus Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Utility Source Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

8. Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

x
List of Figures
Figure Title Page
2-1 MCM3320 Control Board and Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-2 MCM3320 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-3 MCM3320 Hardware I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-4 MCM3320 Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-5 Bargraph Display (HMI112) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-6 AUX101 and AUX102 I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-7 Functional Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
3-1 MCM3320 Features Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-2 Transfer Pair Topology (System Types 2, 3, 4, 8, 10, and 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-3 Common Bus Topology (System Types 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-4 Isolated Bus With GM Topology (System Type 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-5 Isolated Bus Without GM Topology (System Types 5 and 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-6 Master Synchronizer Only Topology (Optional Metering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
5-1 MCM3320 PC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-2 Generator and Utility Metering Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-3 4 Wire Direct Connection Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-4 4 Wire with Transformer Connection Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-5 3 Wire Direct Connection Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-6 3 Wire with Transformer Connection Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-7 Slip Frequency Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-8 Using the Master Sync Only Feature to Communicate With PowerCommand Controls 5-10
5-9 Voltage and Current Calibration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5-10 Circuit breaker Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5-11 Generator Bus Sensor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5-12 Load Demand Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-13 kW Base Load/Peak Shave Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5-14 kVAR Base Load/Peak Shave Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5-15 System Setup Screen (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-16 System Setup Screen (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-17 Transfer pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5-18 Common Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5-19 Transfer Pair with GM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5-20 Scheduler Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5-21 Program Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5-22 Program Exception Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5-23 Examples of Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5-24 Real Time Clock Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5-25 Load Add / Load shed Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

xi
List of Figures (Continued)
Figure Title Page
6-1 MCM3320 Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-2 Establishing Communications Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-3 Re-Establishing Communications Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-4 Fault Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-5 Information Screen for Master Synchronizer Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-6 Information Screen for Isolated Bus With or Without GM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-7 Default Home Information Screen for Common Bus or Transfer Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-8 No Source or Synchronizer Home Information Screen for Common Bus or Transfer Pair 6-6
6-9 Timers Home Information Screen for Common Bus or Transfer Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-10 Parallel Home Information Screen for Common Bus or Transfer Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-11 Main Menu and Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6-12 Control Menus − Viewing Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-13 Control Menus − Viewing and Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-14 Control Test Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6-15 Control Extended Paralleling Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-16 kW Control Extended Paralleling Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6-17 kVAR Control Extended Paralleling Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6-18 Control Load Demand Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6-19 Control Load Add Shed Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6-20 Adjust Menus − View Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
6-21 Adjust Menus − View and Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6-22 Adjust Menus − AC Meter Adjust Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6-23 Adjust Menus − AC Meter Genset Setup Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6-24 Adjust Menus − AC Meter Utility Setup Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
6-25 Adjust Menus − Breakers Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6-26 Adjust Menus − Communications Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
6-27 Adjust Menus − Configuration Output Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
6-28 Adjust Menus − Load Control Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6-29 Adjust Menus − Load Control Miscellaneous setup Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
6-30 Adjust Menus − Load Control Genset Setup Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
6-31 Adjust Menus − Load Control Utility setup Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
6-32 Adjust Menus − Load Control kW Tuning Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
6-33 Adjust Menus − Load Control kVAR Tuning Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
6-34 Adjust Menus − PTC Sensors Submenus and Transfer Time Delay Submenus . . . . . . 6-57
6-35 Adjust Menus − PTC Genset Miscellaneous Sensors Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
6-36 Adjust Menus − PTC Genset Undervoltage Sensors Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
6-37 Adjust Menus − PTC Genset Overvoltage Sensors Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
6-38 Adjust Menus − PTC Genset Frequency Sensors Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
6-39 Adjust Menus − PTC Utility Miscellaneous Sensors Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67

xii
List of Figures (Continued)
Figure Title Page
6-40 Adjust Menus − ptc Utility Undervoltage sENSORS Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
6-41 Adjust Menus − PTC Utility Overvoltage Sensors Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
6-42 Adjust Menus − PTC Utility Frequency Sensors Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
6-43 Adjust Menus − Sync Check Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
6-44 Adjust Menus − Sync Adjust Miscellaneous Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
6-45 Adjust Menus − Sync Adjust Frequency Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
6-46 Adjust Menus − Sync Adjust Voltage Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
6-47 Adjust Menus − System Application Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
6-48 Adjust Menus − System kW Ratings Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
6-49 Adjust Menus − Scheduler Set Clock and Daylight Savings Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
6-50 Adjust Menus − Scheduler Programs Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
6-51 Adjust Menus − Scheduler Program Exceptions Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
6-52 Adjust Menus − LCD Display Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
6-53 Adjust Menus − Load Demand Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
6-54 Adjust Menus − Load Add Shed Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101
6-55 Adjust Menus − Generator Bus Overload Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
6-56 Monitor Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
6-57 Monitor Menus − AC Meter Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109
6-58 Monitor Menus − AC Meter Genset Current, Energy, and Frequency Submenus . . . . 6-111
6-59 Monitor Menus − AC Meter Genset Phase and Voltage Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113
6-60 Monitor Menus − AC Meter Genset Power Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115
6-61 Monitor Menus − AC Meter Utility Current, Energy, and Frequency Submenus . . . . . . 6-117
6-62 Monitor Menus − AC Meter Utility Phase and Voltage Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119
6-63 Monitor Menus − AC Meter Utility Power Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-121
6-64 Monitor Menus − AC Meter System Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-123
6-65 Monitor Menus − Analog In and Analog Out Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-125
6-66 Monitor Menus − Breakers and Communications Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-127
6-67 Monitor Menus − PTC Genset Sensors Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-129
6-68 Monitor Menus − PTC Status Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-131
6-69 Monitor Menus − PTC Timers Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-133
6-70 Monitor Menus − PTC Utility Sensors Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-135
6-71 Monitor Menus − Load Control, Priority, and Relay Outputs Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-137
6-72 Monitor Menus − Switch Inputs Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-139
6-73 Monitor Menus − Sync Check Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-141
6-74 Monitor Menus − Synchronizer Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-143
6-75 Monitor Menus − System Status Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-145
6-76 Monitor Menus − Load Demand Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-147
6-77 Monitor Menus − Load Add Shed Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-149
6-78 Monitor Menus − Generator Bus Overload and Scheduler Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-151
6-79 Faults Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-153
7-1 MCM3320 Control Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram (Sheet 1 of 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

xiii
List of Tables
Table Title Page
2-1 Hardware I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-2 Operator Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-3 System States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-4 Discrete Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-5 Discrete Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
3-1 Typical Synchronizer Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-2 Recommended Slip Frequency Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-3 Synchronizing Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-4 PCC3100 Maximum Allowable Synchronize Range vs Load Share Gains . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-5 Sync Check Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-6 PTC Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3-7 PTC Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3-8 Real Power Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-9 Reactive Power Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
4-1 Isolated Bus Normal Sequence of Operation − Test With Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-2 Isolated Bus Normal Sequence of Operation − Test Without Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-3 Common Bus Normal Sequence of Operation − Utility Failure/Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-4 Common Bus Normal Sequence of Operation − Test With Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-5 Common Bus Normal Sequence of Operation − Test Without Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-6 Common Bus Normal Sequence of Operation − Extended Paralleling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-7 Transfer Pair Normal Sequence of Operation − Utility Failure/Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-8 Transfer Pair Normal Sequence of Operation − Test With Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-9 Transfer Pair Normal Sequence of Operation − Test Without Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-10 Transfer Pair Normal Sequence of Operation − Extended Paralleling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
5-1 Typical Synchronizer Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-2 Synchronizing Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-3 PCC3100 Maximum Allowable Synchronize Range vs Load Share Gains . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-4 PCC3200 Maximum Allowable Synchronize Range vs Load Share Gains . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-5 typical synchronizer Gain Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-6 Permissive window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-7 Base Load / Peak Shave Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5-8 Application configuration variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
6-1 Operator Control Navigation buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-2 PTC Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-130
6-3 PTC States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-144
6-4 Event Numbers and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-152
6-5 Fault Numbers and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-154
7-1 MCM3320 System Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-2 U51 LED Activity Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-3 Control Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
8-1 MCM3320 Board Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

xiv
Foreword
The purpose of this manual is to provide the users with general control operation and fault code information.
Refer to the equipment manufacturer’s product support manuals for important safety precautions.

Manufacturers applying this control are respectfully advised that it is their responsibility to employ competent
persons to carry out any installation work in the interests of good practice and safety. It is essential that the
utmost care is taken with the application of this control device.

Warranty
Warranty: This manual is published solely for information purposes and should not be considered all inclu-
sive. Sale of product shown or described in this literature is subject to terms and conditions outlined in ap-
propriate Cummins Power Generation selling policies or other contractual agreement between the parties.
This literature is not intended to and does not enlarge or add to any such contract. The sole source governing
the rights and remedies of any purchaser of this equipment is the contract between the purchaser and Cum-
mins Power Generation.

NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTIC-

ULAR PURPOSE OR MERCHANTABILITY, OR WARRANTIES ARISING FROM COURSE OF DEALING OR
USAGE OF TRADE, ARE MADE REGARDING THE INFORMATION, RECOMMENDATIONS, AND DE-
SCRIPTIONS CONTAINED HEREIN.

In no event will Cummins Power Generation be responsible to the purchaser or user in contract, in tort (includ-
ing negligence), strict liability or otherwise for any special, indirect, incidental, or consequential damage or loss
whatsoever, including but not limited to damage or loss of use of equipment, plant or power system, cost of
capital, loss of power, additional expenses in the use of existing power facilities, or claims against the purchas-
er or user by its customers resulting from the use of the information, recommendations, and descriptions con-
tained herein.

xv
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

xvi
 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS − This manual contains
important instructions that should be followed during
installation and maintenance of the generator and batter-
ies.
Before operating the generator set (genset), read the
Operator’s Manual and become familiar with it and the
equipment. Safe and efficient operation can be
achieved only if the equipment is properly operated
and maintained. Many accidents are caused by failure
to follow fundamental rules and precautions.
The following symbols, found throughout this manual,
alert you to potentially dangerous conditions to the oper-
ator, service personnel, or the equipment.
DANGER This symbol warns of immediate
hazards which will result in severe personal in-
jury or death.
WARNING This symbol refers to a hazard or
unsafe practice which can result in severe per-
sonal injury or death.
CAUTION This symbol refers to a hazard or
unsafe practice which can result in personal in-
jury or product or property damage.
FUEL AND FUMES ARE FLAMMABLE
Fire, explosion, and personal injury or death can result
from improper practices.
• DO NOT fill fuel tanks while engine is running, un-
less tanks are outside the engine compartment.
Fuel contact with hot engine or exhaust is a potential
fire hazard.
• DO NOT permit any flame, cigarette, pilot light,
spark, arcing equipment, or other ignition source
near the generator set or fuel tank.
• Fuel lines must be adequately secured and free of
leaks. Fuel connection at the engine should be
made with an approved flexible line. Do not use zinc
coated or copper fuel lines with diesel fuel.
• Be sure all fuel supplies have a positive shutoff
valve.
• Be sure battery area has been well-ventilated prior
to servicing near it. Lead-acid batteries emit a highly
explosive hydrogen gas that can be ignited by arc-
ing, sparking, smoking, etc.
xvii
EXHAUST GASES ARE DEADLY
• Provide an adequate exhaust system to properly
expel discharged gases away from enclosed or
sheltered areas and areas where individuals are
likely to congregate. Visually and audibly inspect
the exhaust daily for leaks per the maintenance
schedule. Make sure that exhaust manifolds are se-
cured and not warped. Do not use exhaust gases to
heat a compartment.
• Be sure the unit is well ventilated.
• Engine exhaust and some of its constituents are
known to the state of California to cause cancer,
birth defects, and other reproductive harm.
MOVING PARTS CAN CAUSE SEVERE
PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH
• Keep your hands, clothing, and jewelry away from
moving parts.
• Before starting work on the generator set, discon-
nect battery charger from its AC source, then dis-
connect starting batteries, negative (−) cable first.
This will prevent accidental starting.
• Make sure that fasteners on the generator set are
secure. Tighten supports and clamps, keep guards
in position over fans, drive belts, etc.
• Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry in the vicinity of
moving parts, or while working on electrical equip-
ment. Loose clothing and jewelry can become
caught in moving parts.
• If adjustment must be made while the unit is run-
ning, use extreme caution around hot manifolds,
moving parts, etc.
DO NOT OPERATE IN FLAMMABLE AND
EXPLOSIVE ENVIRONMENTS
Flammable vapor can cause an engine to overspeed and
become difficult to stop, resulting in possible fire, explo-
sion, severe personal injury and death. Do not operate a
genset where a flammable vapor environment can be
created by fuel spill, leak, etc., unless the genset is
equipped with an automatic safety device to block the air
intake and stop the engine. The owners and operators of
the genset are solely responsible for operating the gen-
set safely. Contact your authorized Cummins Power
Generation distributor for more information.
LS-14L
ELECTRICAL SHOCK CAN CAUSE
SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH
• Remove electric power before removing protective
shields or touching electrical equipment. Use rub-
ber insulative mats placed on dry wood platforms
over floors that are metal or concrete when around
electrical equipment. Do not wear damp clothing
(particularly wet shoes) or allow skin surface to be
damp when handling electrical equipment. Do not
wear jewelry. Jewelry can short out electrical con-
tacts and cause shock or burning.
• Use extreme caution when working on electrical
components. High voltages can cause injury or
death. DO NOT tamper with interlocks.
• Follow all applicable state and local electrical
codes. Have all electrical installations performed by
a qualified licensed electrician. Tag and lock open
switches to avoid accidental closure.
• DO NOT CONNECT GENERATOR SET DIRECT-
LY TO ANY BUILDING ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
Hazardous voltages can flow from the generator set
into the utility line. This creates a potential for elec-
trocution or property damage. Connect only
through an approved isolation switch or an ap-
proved paralleling device.
GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
• Coolants under pressure have a higher boiling point
than water. DO NOT open a radiator or heat ex-
changer pressure cap while the engine is running.
Allow the generator set to cool and bleed the system
pressure first.
• Used engine oils have been identified by some state
or federal agencies as causing cancer or reproduc-
tive toxicity. When checking or changing engine oil,
take care not to ingest, breathe the fumes, or con-
tact used oil.
KEEP THIS MANUAL NEAR THE GENSET FOR EASY REFERENCE
xviii
• Keep multi-class ABC fire extinguishers handy.
Class A fires involve ordinary combustible materials
such as wood and cloth; Class B fires, combustible
and flammable liquid fuels and gaseous fuels; Class
C fires, live electrical equipment. (ref. NFPA No. 10).
• Make sure that rags are not left on or near the en-
gine.
• Make sure generator set is mounted in a manner to
prevent combustible materials from accumulating
under the unit.
• Remove all unnecessary grease and oil from the
unit. Accumulated grease and oil can cause over-
heating and engine damage which present a poten-
tial fire hazard.
• Keep the generator set and the surrounding area
clean and free from obstructions. Remove any de-
bris from the set and keep the floor clean and dry.
• Do not work on this equipment when mentally or
physically fatigued, or after consuming any alcohol
or drug that makes the operation of equipment un-
safe.
• Substances in exhaust gases have been identified
by some state or federal agencies as causing can-
cer or reproductive toxicity. Take care not to breath
or ingest or come into contact with exhaust gases.
• Do not store any flammable liquids, such as fuel,
cleaners, oil, etc., near the generator set. A fire or
explosion could result.
• Wear hearing protection when going near an oper-
ating generator set.
• To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot
metal parts such as radiator, turbo charger and ex-
haust system.
LS-14L
PRELIMINARY
1. Introduction
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
This manual provides operation, troubleshooting,
and repair information regarding the CumminsR
Power Generation (CPG) Master Command Mod-
ule 3320 (MCM3320). This manual also includes
fault code information and corrective steps.
This manual does not have instructions for servic-
ing printed circuit board assemblies. After deter-
mining that a printed circuit board assembly is
faulty, replace it. Do not repair it. Attempts to repair
a printed circuit board can lead to costly equipment
damage.
This manual contains basic (generic) wiring dia-
grams and schematics that are included to help in
troubleshooting. Service personnel must use the
actual wiring diagram and schematic shipped with
each unit. The wiring diagrams and schematics
that are maintained with the unit should be updated
when modifications are made to the unit.
Read the Important Safety Precautions (see
pages xvii and xviii) and carefully observe all in-
structions and precautions in this manual.
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The MCM3320 is designed to reduce the complex-
ity of paralleling systems. It is a system component
designed to interface with multiple PowerCom-
mand digital paralleling controls operating on a
common bus.
The MCM3320 can be used to manage simple sys-
tems that include such features as breaker control,
Copyright© 2007 Cummins Power Generation. All rights reserved.
Cummins is a registered trademark of Cummins Inc.
synchronizing, load control, genset start/stop,
diagnostics, load demand, load add, and load
shed. MCM3320 features can also be used in more
complex systems. The MCM3320 can synchronize
up to a 12-genset bus to another source.
CERTIFICATIONS
The MCM3320 meets or exceeds the require-
ments of the following codes and standards.
• UL508 Recongnized
• CE Mark
• EN 61000-2
• EN 61000-4
• ISO 7637, pulses #2, 3a, 3b, 5, 7
PowerCommand control systems are designed
and manufactured in ISO9001 certified facilities.
HOW TO OBTAIN SERVICE
Contact your generator set manufacturer when
seeking additional service information or replace-
ment parts. Provide model and serial number infor-
mation.
WARNINGIncorrect service or replacement of
parts can result in severe personal injury or
death, and/or equipment damage. Service per-
sonnel must be qualified to perform electrical
and mechanical service. Read and follow Im-
portant Safety Precautions, on pages xvii and
xviii.
Information on how to obtain service is also avail-
able at www.cumminspower.com.
1-1
PRELIMINARY

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

1-2
PRELIMINARY
2. Description
FIGURE 2-1. MCM3320 CONTROL BOARD AND OPERATOR PANEL
OVERVIEW
The PowerCommandt Master Control Module
(MCM3320) is a microprocessor−based system
control component designed for use with Power-
Command digital paralleling controls.
The control can be used with generator sets that
have various frequency (50 or 60 Hz operation),
voltage, and power connection configurations from
120 to 35,000 VAC. The MCM3320 simultaneously
synchronizes multiple generator sets to a utility or
other system bus. The MCM3320 drives the genset
bus to match the phase, frequency, and voltage of
the reference bus.
The MCM3320 is suitable for direct connection to
alternators and system buses operating at up to
480VAC line-to-line. By default, the synchronizer
is set up for nominal line-to-line voltages from
110−139VAC. The synchronizer can also be used
in applications operating at up to 35kV by proper
2-1
use of a voltage transformer (VT) to provide control
signals to the device.
The control is designed for panel mounting, but can
be mounted into a large number of physical loca-
tions due to its inherent environmental protection.
The MCM3320 is usually powered from the gener-
ator set starting batteries. The module can be con-
nected to two independent DC sources for redun-
dancy. The control functions over a voltage range
from 9 to 32 VDC and requires less than 1 amp.
The MCM3320 is designed for connection to a 12
or 24 VDC control system.
The MCM3320 includes on-board diagnostics and
can be configured using the RS-485 interface for
communicating with the InPower service tool.
An MCM3320 installation may include the following
equipment.
• The MCM3320 control board
 PRELIMINARY

• One or two operator panels (HMI211) (in-
cludes six status LED lamps and a screen that
can be used to view menus and adjust param-
eters)
• Two bargraph panels (HMI112) (one for the
genset bus, one for the utility bus)
• Harness (as many as needed) to connect op-
erator panel(s) and/or bargraph panel(s) to the
MCM3320
• PCCNet I/O Module (AUX101/AUX102) (used
with the Load Add / Load Shed feature)
• An RS-485 to RS-232 converter kit (541−1199)
− used for connecting the controller with In-
Power, the Setup Tool, or the Engineering Tool
MCM3320 CONTROL BOARD
The MCM3320 control board (327−1520−01) in-
cludes the following connectors (see Figure 2-2).
• TB1 − Switch I/O and PCCNet
• TB2 − Switch I/O and DC Power In
• TB3 − Switch I/O and System Bus (CAN)
• TB6 − Genset (3-Phase plus Neutral) PT In-
puts (480 VAC Max)
• TB7 − Utility (3-Phase plus Neutral) PT Inputs
(480 VAC Max)
• TB8 − Breaker Control and Start Genset
• TB9 − Analog I/O
• TB10 − Breaker Status (A and B Inputs)
• TB15 − Service Tool or ModBus RTU (RS-485)
• J14 − ModBus RTU (RS-232)
The MCM3320 control board also includes three
genset and three utility current transformers (CTs).
Each CT includes a polarity mark. For a 5 amp CT,
the wire must make one pass through the CT. For a
1 amp CT, the wire must make two passes through
the hole.
For detailed information on these connections, see
Table 8-1.
A block diagram showing the MCM3320 hardware
I/O is shown in Figure 2-3. The hardware I/O is de-
scribed in Table 2-1.

GENSET CURRENT UTILITY CURRENT

TRANSFORMERS TRANSFORMERS
(1 AMP OR 5 AMP) (1 AMP OR 5 AMP)
TB7

TB6

TB9
TB2

J14

TB15

TB3 TB1 TB8 TB10

FIGURE 2-2. MCM3320 CONNECTORS

2-2
PRELIMINARY

B+ Input1 Master Freq Bias

B+ Input 2 Master Volt Bias
B+ POWER BIDIRECTIONAL
Gnd Master Priority
Gnd
Start Gensets Relay
RELAY OUTPUTS
CAN (Master)
RS-485 PCC Net
COMMUNICATIONS
RS-485/232 Mon/MB
Load Govern Enable
Extended Parallel Start Load Demand Gen1
Sync Enable MCM3320 Load Demand Gen2
Utility Source Failure Load Demand Gen3
Load Demand Gen4
Transfer Inhibit DISCRETE INPUTS Cfg Out1 (Common Warn)
Retransfer Inhibit (Active Low w/Pullup)
Cfg Out2 (Fail to Sync)
Gen CB Tripped DISCRETE OUTPUTS
(Low Side Drivers) Cfg Out3 (Gen Available)
Util CB Tripped
Cfg Out4 (Utility Available)
Gen CB Inhibit Cfg Out5 (Fail to Discon)
Util CB Inhibit
Cfg Out6 (Synchronized)
Auto/Manual
Cfg Out7
Test Start Cfg Out8

Fault Ack/Reset Paralleling Gensets

Breaker Inhibit
Gen1 Available
Gen2 Available
Gen3 Available
Relay Supply
Gen4 Available B+ OUTPUTS
Override

kW Load Setpoint kW Master Load Control

ANALOG ANALOG OUTPUTS
kVAR Load Setpoint kVAR Master Load Control
INPUTS (0−5V)
BREAKER INTERFACE
(Discrete Inputs / Relay BUS/
GEN Outputs) UTIL
V/I V/I
Gen Open
Gen Close
Gen Position A
Gen Position B

Util Open
Util Close
Util Position A
Util Position B

GENSET UTILITY

LOAD

FIGURE 2-3. MCM3320 HARDWARE I/O

2-3
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 2-1. HARDWARE I/O

Hardware Signal Active State* Function
B+ Input1 Battery positive power input for the board. Diode OR’d on the board
with B+ Input2. 9−32V range. Starter dip ride-through capable.
B+ Input2 Battery positive power input for the board. Diode OR’d on the board
with B+ Input1. 9−32V range. Starter dip ride-through capable.
Gnd Battery negative connection for the board.
CAN (Master) Communications bus available for future use.
RS485 PCCNet Communications network for connecting displays, bargraphs, and I/O
modules to the controller.
RS485/232 Mon/MB Communications connection for tools (via Mon) or PLCs, etc. via
ModBus RTU.
Extended Parallel Start Input used to command an extended paralleling session.
Start
Sync enable Enable Sync Input used to manually enable synchronizing if the Auto/Manual input
is in the Manual state.
Utility Source Failure Source Failed Input used to tell the control that the utility source is not available.
This may be used if an external device is used to determine utility
source status. It can also be used to simulate a utility failure.
Transfer Inhibit Inhibit Active Input used to inhibit a transfer to gensets. An active Override input
will cause an active transfer inhibit to be ignored.
Retransfer Inhibit Inhibit Active Input used to inhibit a retransfer to utility. An active Override input will
cause an active retransfer inhibit to be ignored. Also, the failure of the
genset bus while connected to the genset bus will cause an active
retransfer inhibit to be ignored.
Gen CB Tripped Tripped Input used to tell the control that the genset main breaker is tripped
(bell alarm). The control then declares the genset source to be not
available.
Utilit CB Tripped Tripped Input used to tell the control that the utility main breaker is tripped
(bell alarm). The control then declares the utility source to be not
available.
Gen CB Inhibit Inhibit Active Input used to force the genset main breaker to open, or to prevent it
from closing if already open.
Util CB Inhibit Inhibit Active Input used to force the utility main breaker to open, or to prevent it
from closing if already open.
Auto/Manual Manual Input used to put the control in the manual mode. Manual operation
applies to the breaker control and the synchronizer.
Test Start Start Input used to command a test start (with or without load transfer as
configured).
Fault Reset Reset Input used to reset faults AND also to put the on-board 7-segment
LED into the fault readout mode. The fault readout mode is entered
by holding the reset input active for longer than 5 seconds. The fault
readout mode is exited by toggling the reset input active/inactive.
Faults are then reset by an additional toggle of the input.
Gen1 CB Position Closed Input used to tell control that the genset #1 paralleling breaker is
closed. It is used in applications with no gen main and in load
demand applications.
* For discrete inputs, the active state is when the input is connected to a return (gnd). The inactive state is when
the input is open circuit. For discrete low side outputs, the active state is when the low side output is on (gnd)
and the inactive state is when the low side output is off (float).

2-4
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 2-1. HARDWARE I/O (CONT.)

Hardware Signal Active State* Function
Gen2 CB Position Closed Input used to tell control that the genset #2 paralleling breaker is
closed. It is used in applications with no gen main and in load
demand applications.
Gen3 CB Position Closed Input used to tell control that the genset #3 paralleling breaker is
closed. It is used in applications with no gen main and in load
demand applications.
Gen4 CB Position Closed Input used to tell control that the genset #4 paralleling breaker is
closed. It is used in applications with no gen main and in load
demand applications.
Override Override Active Input used to override the transfer inhibit, retransfer inhibit, start
timer, transfer timer, and retransfer timer. It is used to cause
immediate action, bypassing time delays and inhibits.
kW Load Setpoint 0−5V Analog input which can be used to set the base load or peak shave
kW setpoint. Alternatively this can be done via a trim setting or via
the ModBus. The analog input profile of %kW vs. VDC is the same
profile as the PCC genset control.
kVAR Load Setpoint 0−5V Analog input which can be used to set the base load or peak shave
kVAR or Power Factor setpoint. Alternatively this can be done via a
trim setting or via the ModBus. The analog input profile of %kVAR vs.
VDC is the same profile as the PCC3200 genset control. the analog
input profile of Power Factor vs. VDC is covered in the Extended
Paralleling section of this manual.
Master Frequency −2.5 to +5 V This is a bidirectional analog signal which connects to the PCC kW
Bias load share lines for master voltage matching. The MCM3320 moves
the voltage on the kW load share lines to affect the genset bus
frequency for synchronizing.
Master Voltage Bias −2.5 to +5 V This is a bidirectional analog signal which connects to the PCC kW
load share lines for master synchronizing. The MCM3320 moves the
voltage on the kVAR load share lines to affect the genset bus voltage
for voltage matching.
Master Priority This is a bidirectional discrete signal line which can be used in two
different modes.
The first mode (master sync only) is a manual master inhibit input. If
the input is activated (connected to return), the MCM3320 is inhibited
from synchronizing or breaker operation. This allows a PLC to
orchestrate multiple MCM3320s in a retransfer sequence.
The second mode is an automatic priority control mode. In this mode,
this signal is interconnected to all other MCM3320s. Then for a
retransfer, the controls arbitrate as to which one will get to retransfer
first. Sequence order can be set by adjusting the retransfer time
delay differently. the arbitration guarantees that only one MCM3320
will be able to perform the synchronizing and load control functions at
a time.
Start Gensets Relay Form C relay This is a Form C relay which is used to activate the remote start
inputs on all of the gensets simultaneously.
* For discrete inputs, the active state is when the input is connected to a return (gnd). The inactive state is when
the input is open circuit. For discrete low side outputs, the active state is when the low side output is on (gnd)
and the inactive state is when the low side output is off (float).

2-5
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 2-1. HARDWARE I/O (CONT.)

Hardware Signal Active State* Function
Load Govern Enable Enable This is a low side driver output to be connected to all of the utility CB
aux/position inputs on the individual PCC genset controls. This allows
the MCM3320 to tell the gensets control when to go into the load
govern (utility parallel) mode.
Load Demand Gen1 Stop This is a low side driver output to be connected to Genset #1 Load
Demand input.
Load Demand Gen2 Stop This is a low side driver output to be connected to Genset #2 Load
Demand input.
Load Demand Gen3 Stop This is a low side driver output to be connected to Genset #3 Load
Demand input.
Load Demand Gen4 Stop This is a low side driver output to be connected to Genset #4 Load
Demand input.
Cfg Out1 Low This is a low side driver output which is intended to drive a relay coil.
It is configurable in that it can be mapped to any event or fault code.
Cfg Out2 Low This is a low side driver output which is intended to drive a relay coil.
It is configurable in that it can be mapped to any event or fault code.
Cfg Out3 Low This is a low side driver output which is intended to drive a relay coil.
It is configurable in that it can be mapped to any event or fault code.
Cfg Out4 Low This is a low side driver output which is intended to drive a relay coil.
It is configurable in that it can be mapped to any event or fault code.
Cfg Out5 Low This is a low side driver output which is intended to drive a relay coil.
It is configurable in that it can be mapped to any event or fault code.
Cfg Out6 Low This is a low side driver output which is intended to drive a relay coil.
It is configurable in that it can be mapped to any event or fault code.
Cfg Out7 Low This is a low side driver output which is intended to drive a relay coil.
It is configurable in that it can be mapped to any event or fault code.
Cfg Out8 Low This is a low side driver output which is intended to drive a relay coil.
It is configurable in that it can be mapped to any event or fault code.
Paralleling Gensets Inhibit This is a low side driver output to be connected to the Gen CB Inhibit
Breaker Inhibit input for ALL of the individual PCC genset controls. This allows the
MCM3320 to indirectly control the genset paralleling breakers.
Relay Supply B+ This is a B+ output to be used to supply the high side of relay coils
for the Cfg Out 1−8 low side outputs.
kW Master Load 0−5V This is an analog output to be connected to the Load Set / External
Control kW input on all of the individual PCC genset controls. This allows the
MCM3320 to control the genset bus kW output when utility paralleled.
kVAR Master Load 0−5V This is an analog output to be connected to the External kVAR input
Control on all of the individual PCC genset controls. (Input not available on
the PCC3100.) This allows the MCM3320 to control the genset bus
kVAR output when utility paralleled.
Gen Bus PTs The Gen Bus voltage sensing inputs are 3 phase, 3 or 4 wire, and
0−500V direct.
Utility Bus PTs The Utility Bus voltage sensing inputs are 3 phase, 3 or 4 wire, and
0−500V direct.
* For discrete inputs, the active state is when the input is connected to a return (gnd). The inactive state is when
the input is open circuit. For discrete low side outputs, the active state is when the low side output is on (gnd)
and the inactive state is when the low side output is off (float).

2-6
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 2-1. HARDWARE I/O (CONT.)

Hardware Signal Active State* Function
Gen Bus CTs The Gen Bus current transformer inputs are 3 phase, 1 amp or 5
amp secondary, very low burden.
NOTE: There are NO terminals on the MCM3320 for the CT secon-
daries. Wire must be looped through the small CTs on the
board. Locating a short terminal block close to the MCM3320 to
facilitate the connection is recommended.
Utility Bus CTs The Utility Bus current transformer inputs are 3 phase, 1 amp or 5
amp secondary, very low burden.
NOTE: There are NO terminals on the MCM3320 for the CT secon-
daries. Wire must be looped through the small CTs on the
board. Locating a short terminal block close to the MCM3320 to
facilitate the connection is recommended.
Gen Main Breaker ‘a’ Breaker Closed Input from the genset main breaker ‘a’ position contact.
Contact
Gen Main Breaker ‘b’ Breaker Open Input from the genset main breaker ‘b’ position contact.
Contact
Gen Main Breaker Normally open relay contact output for driving the genset main
Open Relay breaker open coil.
Gen Main Breaker Normally open relay contact output for driving the genset main
Close Relay breaker close coil.
Utility Main Breaker ‘a’ Breaker Closed Input from the utility main breaker ‘a’ position contact.
Contact
Utility Main Breaker ‘b’ Breaker Open Input from the utility main breaker ‘b’ position contact.
Contact
Utility Main Breaker Normally open relay contact output for driving the utility main breaker
Open Relay open coil.
Utility Main Breaker Normally open relay contact output for driving the utility main breaker
Close Relay close coil.
* For discrete inputs, the active state is when the input is connected to a return (gnd). The inactive state is when
the input is open circuit. For discrete low side outputs, the active state is when the low side output is on (gnd)
and the inactive state is when the low side output is off (float).

2-7
 PRELIMINARY

OPERATOR PANEL Operator Panel Connections

MCM3320 control installations include an operator
panel (HMI211, 300−6090). The display is
composed of an adjustable contrast backlit LCD
display, with a series of 6 generator status LED
lamps. The display is accompanied by a set of six
tactile feel membrane switches that are used by the
operator to navigate through control menus, and to
adjust settings.
The operator panel includes an information screen
with access to menus that can be viewed and,
when necessary, adjusted. Faults are automatical-
ly displayed on the display screen and six LEDs
provide status information.
Up to two operator panels can be connected to one
MCM3320. Harness 338−4747 is used to connect
an operator panel to the MCM3320. This harness
can be cut to length or extended to 12 feet (3.6 me-
ters).
The operator panel is connected via the PCCNet.
Two connectors (J1 and J2) are located on the
back of the operator panel (see Figure 2-4).
Connections are listed in Table 2-2.
NOTE: J1 and J2 are identical. Either one can be
used for the harness connection between
the main control board and the operator
panel.

More information and the operator panel and the The PCCNet interface includes 4 wires for B+,
menu system is included in Section 6. GND, RS-485A and RS-485B connections.

1 5
2 6

3 7
4 8
PIN 1
J1 or J2

J2

J1
J1-4

FIGURE 2-4. MCM3320 OPERATOR PANEL

TABLE 2-2. OPERATOR PANEL CONNECTIONS

Connector Pin Signal Name Connect To / Comments
J1-1 RS-485 Data A Network Data A
J1-2 RS-485 Data B Network Data B
J1-3 B+ Network Supply
J1-4 PCCNet System Wake Up System Wakeup
J1-5 Return Network Supply Return
J1-6 Run Output
J1-7 Auto Output
J1-8

2-8
PRELIMINARY

BARGRAPH DISPLAY (HMI112) I/O MODULE

The MCM3320 supports the PCCNet bargraph
(HMI112, 300−6050−01). Two separate bargraphs
are used to display AC data — one for the utility bus
and one for the genset bus. Only one bargraph can
be used for each power source.
The bargraphs include nine bars to display L1, L2,
and L3 current percentage; percentage of total kW;
power factor; frequency; and L12, L23, and L31
voltage percentage.
The bargraph includes 4 wires for B+, GND,
RS-485A and RS-485B connections.
FIGURE 2-5. BARGRAPH DISPLAY (HMI112)
The MCM3320 supports an AUX101/AUX102
PCCNet I/O Module (kit 541−1342) for feeder
breaker control and/or an ATS control (see Figure
2-6). These modules are used with the load add /
load shed feature.
The AUX101 connects to load devices #1, 2, 3, and
4. It includes the following.
• J1 − PCCNet and Wakeup
• J2 − Relays
• J3 − Relays
• J4 − Relays
• J10 − Ground for Inputs
• J11 − Inputs
• J14 − B+ / GND
• PCCNet Communications LED (Green = OK,
Red = Not OK)
• Relay LEDs (ON = Energized)
• Device Number LED − The device number
must be “0” for MCM3320 applications.

PANEL HARNESS • Pushbutton − Used to change the device num-

ber. Press and hold the pushbutton until the
A 12-foot harness (338−4747) that can be cut to decimal point is illuminated. the press the but-
length is available for connecting each operator ton repeatedly to cycle through the numbers
panels and/or bargraph panels to the MCM3320. until it reads “0.”

J11 J10
DEVICE NUMBER
INDICATOR
S1 (DEV#) J4 (CUSTOMER INPUTS)

J14
J1

J3
J6
DS1 J5
J2

DS2
J1

J2 J3 J4

FIGURE 2-6. AUX101 AND AUX102 I/O MODULES

2-9
 PRELIMINARY
The AUX102 connects to load devices #5 and 6. It
includes the following.
• J1 − Relays − N.O.
• J2 − Relays − Com
• J3 − Relays − N.C.
• J4 − Inputs
• Relay LEDs (ON = Energized)
• Board Revision Level Barcode − The first letter
(read from left to right) on the barcode must be
a “C” or higher letter.
• Ground wire − Connected to the grounded
chassis
• Ribbon Cable − Connected to the AUX101
For more information on the AUX101/AUX102, re-
fer to Instruction Sheet C693. Wiring diagrams for
the I/O modules are on pages 8-21 and 8-22 of this
manual.
CONVERTER KIT
A converter kit is available for connecting the
MCM3320 to a PC where basic customer adjust-
ments can be made using InPower. The kit
(541−1199) includes an interface harness and an
RS-485 to RS-232 network converter. Setup and
calibration information is included in Section 5.
SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION
The MCM3320 connects to switchgear (breakers,
PRs, CTs), genset controls, PLC, HMIs, and other
customer equipment. Interconnection wiring dia-
grams are included in Section 8.
Battery Power
The MCM3320 can be powered by a 12 or 24 volt
input. It has an operating range from 9−32 volts and
has a 1 amp maximum current draw with no load on
the B+ outputs. The control is always awake when
B+ is supplied. Power is supplied by two diode Or’d
B+ inputs (battery1 and battery2). Diode or’ing is
done on the board.
If just one B+ source is used and that source is the
genset starting batteries, the board will ride
through the starter dip if the distance/wire gauge
between the MCM3320 and the gensets is ade-
quate. For a more robust system, it is recom-
mended that both B+ inputs be used, with one of
them supplied from a station battery.
2-10
The MCM3320 is fused externally with a 4 amp
fuse.
MASTER CONTROL SUBSYSTEM
FUNCTIONS
Figure 2-7 is a high-level functional block diagram
of the master control subsystem of the MCM3320.
These functions are described below.
Application Configuration
The application configuration inputs are used to
define the configuration of the system topology, ex-
tended parallel type, load demand, and priority
control. Different options are available with differ-
ent inputs.
System Information
System information inputs are used for storing the
ratings of the gensets, total capacity, available ca-
pacity, and system operating state determination.
The possible system states are listed in Table 2-3.
Breaker Control
The breaker control subsystem provides open/
close control of the genset and utility breakers,
feedback on breaker positions, load govern output,
and breaker diagnostic feedback.
Power Transfer Control
The power transfer control subsystem controls
genset start/stop, transfer/retransfer inhibit capa-
bilities, the sensing of the state of the source, tim-
ers, AC metering, and power transfer control state
machine. There are four subsystem sets that con-
tribute the majority of the information to the power
transfer control subsystem.
Priority Control
The priority control subsystem sets the master syn-
chronizer to external priority control (manual) or in-
ternal priority control (automatic).
Master Load Control
The master synchronizer control allows for enab-
ling of the synchronizer, permissive close function,
diagnostic sensors, and bidirectional information
flow on kW load (frequency bias) and kVAR load
share (voltage bias) to synchronize the genset to
the load.
Load Demand Control
The load demand control subsystem controls
matching online generating capacity to the load.
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 2-3. SYSTEM STATES

7-Segment
System State Description LED Output
Character
Not Available The system state is not known. This generally only occurs during − (Center
power up. Segment)
Time Delay Engine Start There is a timing to start the gensets. 1
(TDES)*
Time Delay Engine Stop There is a timing to stop the gensets. 2
(TDEC)*
Time Delay Program There is a timing for programmed transition. 3
Transition (TDPT)*
Time Delay Transfer There is a timing of a transfer delay or the transfer delay has ex- 4
(TDNE)* pired.
Time Delay Retransfer There is a timing of a retransfer delay or the retransfer delay has 5
(TDEN)* expired.
Synchronizing The system is actively synchronizing. 6
Sync Check OK The breaker is ok to close. 7
Inhibit An active inhibit exists (transfer, retransfer, gen main circuit breaker, 8
utility main circuit breaker, or master)
Unassigned Not presently used. 9
Ramp Unload A ramp unload of the genset bus is underway. A
Ramp Load A ramp load of the genset bus in underway. b
Manual The Auto / Manual switch is in the manual position. C
Utility Failure The utility has failed. d
Test A test is underway. E
Standby All is normal. J
Extended Parallel An extended parallel session is underway. H
* For more information on time delays, see “Timers” on page 3-10.

2-11
PRELIMINARY

SETUP TRIMS AND INPUTS

SYSTEM TOPOLOGY
SYSTEM TOPOLOGY
TRANSITION TYPE
TRANSITION TYPE
EXTENDED PARALLEL ENABLE USED BY
APPLICATION EXTENDED PARALLEL ENABLE
CONFIGURATION CONTROL
LOAD DEMAND TYPE
LOAD DEMAND TYPE FUNCTIONS
PRIORITY CONTROL METHOD BELOW
PRIORITY CONTROL METHOD
HARDWARE VERSION

SETUP TRIMS DERIVED VALUES

DEVICE NAME TOTAL SYSTEM CAPACITY USED BY

TOTAL NUMBER OF GENSETS CONTROL
GENX kW RATING (X=1...12) FUNCTIONS
SYSTEM TOTAL ONLINE CAPACITY
SYSTEM PHASE ROTATION INFORMATION BELOW
SYSTEM FREQUENCY
SYSTEM OPERATING STATE

POSITION AND CONTROL

UM GM

BREAKER INHIBITS BREAKER

CONTROL
POSITION

REQUEST
CLOSE/OPEN

AUTO/MANUAL LOAD GOVERN ENABLE (TO GENSETS)

TRANSFER AND RETRANSFER INHIBITS
OVERRIDE

EXTENDED PARALLEL START

START/STOP (TO GENSETS)
TEST START
POWER
MASTER TRANSFER OK TO CLOSE
PRIORITY CONTROL
(TO OTHER MASTER
SYNC ON/OFF
MASTERS) INHIBIT
PRIORITY LOAD
CONTROL DEMAND
STATE INFO
OPERATING

CONTROL
STATUS
RAMP

kW LOAD SETPOINT INPUT kW LOAD SHARE

(FREQUENCY)
kVAR/PF LOAD SETPOINT INPUT MASTER LOAD MASTER
CONTROL SYNCHRONIZER
AND kVAR LOAD SHARE
kW LOAD CONTROL (TO GENSETS) (BASE LOAD / PERMISSIVE (VOLTAGE)
PEAK SHAVE) CLOSE
kVAR LOAD CONTROL (TO GENSETS

SYNC ENABLE (MANUAL)

FIGURE 2-7. FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM

2-12
PRELIMINARY

DISCRETE INPUTS inhibit, transfer time delay and retransfer time

delay.
Table 2-4 lists the 22 discrete inputs labeled as
switches. Utility Source Failure
Synchronizer Enable Switch The Utility source Failure input is used to indicate to
the control that the utility has failed. It is useful in
The synchronizer enable switch is used to enable
applications where it is desirable to have an exter-
synchronizing when in manual mode or when the
nal device determine utility source availability in
module is used only as a synchronizer. Otherwise
addition to internal sensors.
sync enabling is automatically done by the control.

Override Test Start

The Override switch is used to force a transfer or The Test Start input starts and stops a test of the
retransfer to occur as quickly as possible. Activat- system. It can be configured to test with or without
ing this switch overrides transfer inhibit, retransfer load.

TABLE 2-4. DISCRETE INPUTS

Active State Inactive State
Discrete Input Description
(To Gnd) (Open Circuit)
Fault Reset Reset Not Reset Reset faults; engage fault readout
Auto/Manual Manual Auto Manual or auto breaker / sync operation
Test Start Start Stop Test load transfer start / stop
Extended Parallel Start Start Stop Extended paralleling start / stop
Synchronizer Enable Active Inactive Synch enable (applies in manual only)
Utility Source Failure Active Inactive Use if external devices determines a failure
Transfer Inhibit Inhibit No Inhibit Inhibit transfers to gensets (some
exceptions)
Retransfer Inhibit Inhibit No Inhibit Inhibit transfers to utility (some exceptions)
Override Override No Override Override timers and transfer/retransfer
inhibits
Gen Main CB Inhibit Inhibit No Inhibit Open genset main / inhibit closure
Util Main CB Inhibit Inhibit No Inhibit Open utility main / inhibit closure
Gen Main CB Tripped Tripped Not Tripped Genset main breaker tripped; source not
available
Util Main CB Tripped Tripped Not Tripped Utility main breaker tripped; source not
available
Gen1 CB Position Breaker Closed Breaker Open Genset #1 breaker position (‘a’ contact)
Gen2 CB Position Breaker Closed Breaker Open Genset #2 breaker position (‘a’ contact)
Gen3 CB Position Breaker Closed Breaker Open Genset #3 breaker position (‘a’ contact)
Gen4 CB Position Breaker Closed Breaker Open Genset #4 breaker position (‘a’ contact)
Util Main CB PositionA Breaker Closed Breaker Open Utility main breaker position (‘a’ contact)
Util Main CB PositionB Breaker Open Breaker Closed Utility main breaker position (‘b’ contact)
Gen Main CB PositionA Breaker Closed Breaker Open Genset main breaker position (‘a’ contact)
Gen Main CB PositionB Breaker Open Breaker Closed Genset main breaker position (‘b’ contact)
Master Inhibit Inhibit No Inhibit Master Inhibit for multiple pair operation

2-13
 PRELIMINARY
Extended Parallel Start
The Extended Parallel Start input starts and stops
the extended parallel mode. It is used for base load
or peak shave operation.
Fault Reset
The Fault Reset input acknowledges and resets
faults. It is also used to activate the fault flashout on
the seven segment display on the MCM3320 con-
trol board (press the button for at least seven five
seconds to activate this mode).
Transfer and Retransfer Inhibit
Transfer Inhibit normally inhibits transferring the
load to a genset. Under some conditions, it is ig-
nored. Transfer Inhibit is not the same as Gen CB
Inhibit.
Retransfer Inhibit normally inhibits retransferring
the load back to the Utility. Under some conditions,
it is ignored. Retransfer Inhibit is not the same as
Util CB Inhibit.
Genset Circuit Breaker Position,
Monitoring and Control
Genset CB Position A is the ‘a’ contact from the
genset main breaker. This MCM3320 uses this to
determine breaker position.
Genset CB Position B is the ‘b’ contact from the
genset main breaker. the control uses this only to
determine a breaker circuit failure by comparing it
to the ‘a’ contact. This feature can be enabled/dis-
abled.
The Genset CB Tripped is used to indicate to the
MCM3320 that the genset main breaker is tripped.
When tripped, the control considers the source to
be unavailable.
The Genset CB Inhibit opens the genset main
breaker, if closed. It inhibits closure if the genset
main breaker is open.
Circuit Breaker Control Mode
Auto/Manual (TB10-6) puts the breaker control in
Manual mode.
2-14
Utility Circuit Breaker Position
Utility CB Position A (TB10-7) is the ‘a’ contact from
the utility main breaker. The MCM3320 uses this to
determine breaker position.
Utility CB Position B (TB10-9) is the ‘b’ contact from
the utility main breaker. The MCM3320 uses this
only to determine a breaker circuit failure by
comparing it to the ‘a’ contact. This feature can be
enabled/disabled.
The Utility CB Tripped (TB10-10) is used to indicate
to the MCM3320 that the utility main breaker is
tripped. When tripped, the control considers the
source to be unavailable.
The Utility CB Inhibit (TB10-11) opens the utility
main breaker, if closed. It inhibits closure if the util-
ity main breaker is open.
Genset Circuit Breaker Position
Genset 1 CB Position (TB10-12) is the ‘a’ contact
from genset #1 breaker. It is required for load de-
mand and some other configurations.
Genset 2 CB Position (TB10-14) is the ‘a’ contact
from genset #2 breaker. It is required for load de-
mand and some other configurations.
Genset 3 CB Position (TB10-15) is the ‘a’ contact
from genset #3 breaker. It is required for load de-
mand and some other configurations.
Genset 4 CB Position (TB10-16) is the ‘a’ contact
from genset #4 breaker. It is required for load de-
mand and some other configurations.
ModBus
RS232 DCD (J14) is the ModBus RS-232 DCD in-
put. This feature is enabled when a device is con-
nected to this port connection.
NOTE: This port is shared with TB15.
DISCRETE OUTPUTS
Discrete outputs include low-side outputs, Form-A
relays, Form-C relays, and power outputs. Some
low-side outputs are configurable. The available
discrete outputs are listed in Table 2-5.
Relay Outputs
There are 15 relay outputs. Descriptions of their ex-
pected signals are included in Table 2-1.
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 2-5. DISCRETE OUTPUTS

Inactive State
Active State
Discrete Output (High Impedance / Description
(Low / Energized)
De-energized)
Start Gensets Relay Run Stop Form-C relay to start / stop gensets (via a
remote start)
Utility Main CB Close Active Inactive Normally open relay contact for the utility
Relay main close coil
Utility Main CB Open Active Inactive Normally open relay contact for the utility
Relay main open coil
Gen Main CB Close Active Inactive Normally open relay contact for the genset
Relay main close coil
Gen Main CB Open Active Inactive Normally open relay contact for the genset
Relay main open coil
Load Govern Enable Enabled Disabled Low-side driver to the PCC genset’s utility
Driver circuit breaker position input to put the
PCC in load govern mode when the utility
is paralleled
Paralleling Gensets Inhibit All Gensets No Inhibit Low-side drive to the PCC genset’s
Breaker Inhibit Driver paralleling breaker inhibit input
Load Demand Gen1 Load Demand Run Low-side driver to the PCC genset’s #1
Driver Stop load demand input
Load Demand Gen2 Load Demand Run Low-side driver to the PCC genset’s #2
Driver Stop load demand input
Load Demand Gen3 Load Demand Run Low-side driver to the PCC genset’s #3
Driver Stop load demand input
Load Demand Gen4 Load Demand Run Low-side driver to the PCC genset’s #4
Driver Stop load demand input
Configurable Output1 Driver On Driver Off Activated by a programmed event/warning
Driver code.
Configurable Output2 Driver On Driver Off Activated by a programmed event/warning
Driver code.
Configurable Output3 Driver On Driver Off Activated by a programmed event/warning
Driver code.
Configurable Output4 Driver On Driver Off Activated by a programmed event/warning
Driver code.
Configurable Output5 Driver On Driver Off Activated by a programmed event/warning
Driver code.
Configurable Output6 Driver On Driver Off Activated by a programmed event/warning
Driver code.
Configurable Output7 Driver On Driver Off Activated by a programmed event/warning
Driver code.
Configurable Output8 Driver On Driver Off Activated by a programmed event/warning
Driver code.
Relay Supply B+ Output B+ Output B+ output for supplying relay coil high
side. The low side is connected to a
low-side driver output.

2-15
 PRELIMINARY
Utility Main Neutral Contactor 1 and 2
These two relay outputs are used for controlling a
utility neutral contactor.
Genset Main Neutral Contactor 1 and 2
These two relay outputs are used for controlling a
genset neutral contactor.
Genset Main Circuit Breaker Close Relay 1 and 2
These two contacts are used for closing the genset
main breaker. They are rated at 8 Amp 30 VDC re-
sistive, 3.5 Amp 30 VDC inductive L/R = 7msec.
They are not rated for AC voltage.
Genset Main Circuit Breaker Open Relay 1 and 2
These two contacts are used for opening the gen-
set main breaker. They are rated at 8 Amp 30 VDC
resistive, 3.5 Amp 30 VDC inductive L/R = 7msec.
They are not rated for AC voltage.
N.C. Genset Start Relay
The normally closed contact is used for starting
gensets.
COM Genset Start Relay
The COM relay is used for starting gensets.
N.O. Genset Start Relay
The normally open contact is used for starting gen-
sets. It is connected in parallel to all genset remote
start inputs.
Utility Main Circuit Breaker Close Relay 1 and 2
These two contacts are used for closing the utility
main breaker. they are rated at 8 Amps 30 VDC re-
sistive, 3.5 Amp 30 VDC inductive L/R = 7 msec.
They are not rated for AC voltage.
Utility Main Circuit Breaker Open Relay 1 and 2
These two contacts are used for opening the utility
main breaker. they are rated at 8 Amps 30 VDC re-
sistive, 3.5 Amp 30 VDC inductive L/R = 7 msec.
They are not rated for AC voltage.
Low Side Drivers
The function of each low side driver and each confi-
gurable low side driver is described below.
2-16
Load Govern Enable
This driver is connected to the utility circuit breaker
position inputs on the individual genset controls. It
tells the genset controls when they are paralleled to
the utility.
Load Demand
This driver is connected to the load demand input
on genset #1.
Paralleling Genset Breaker Inhibit
This driver is connected to all of the individual gen-
set circuit breaker inhibit inputs. It allows the con-
trol to treat individual genset breakers in concert as
a genset main breaker.
Configurable Output 1 (Common Warning)
Configurable low side output #1 is intended to drive
a relay coil. It has a Common Warning default set-
ting.
Configurable Output 2 (Fail to Synchronize)
Configurable low side output #2 is intended to drive
a relay coil. It has a Fail to Sync default setting.
Configurable Output 3 (Genset Available)
Configurable low side output #3 is intended to drive
a relay coil. It has a Gen Available default setting.
Configurable Output 4 (Utility Available)
Configurable low side output #4 is intended to drive
a relay coil. It has a Utility Available default setting.
Configurable Output 5 (Fail to Disconnect)
Configurable low side output #5 is intended to drive
a relay coil. It has a Fail to Disconnect default set-
ting.
Configurable Output 6 (Synchronized)
Configurable low side output #6 is intended to drive
a relay coil. It has a Synchronized default setting.
Configurable Output 7
Configurable low side output #7 is intended to drive
a relay coil.
Configurable Output 8
Configurable low side output #8 is intended to drive
a relay coil.
PRELIMINARY

3. MCM3320 Features

MCM3320
AC Metering HMI211
HMI112
Source Failure Operator
Gensets
Gensets Start/Stop Panel #1
Main Breaker Control Bargraph
Sync/Volt Match
Customer I/O Open/Closed Transition
Load Ramping HMI211
Operator HMI112
Extended Paralleling
kW and kVAR Control Panel #2 Utility
Load Demand Bargraph
Load Add / Shed
Scheduler
ModBus
Diagnostics

G1
GM UM
G2

G3
I/O Module
Breakers AUX101
G4 or AUX102
ATS

Load1 Load2 Load3 Load4 Load5 Load6

FIGURE 2-8. MCM3320 FEATURES OVERVIEW

This section describes the features supported by
the MCM3320. An overview of the MCM3320 fea-
tures is illustrated in Figure 2-8.
AC METERING
The MCM3320 sends three phase metering data of
the genset bus and the utility bus simultaneously
over the ModBus port. The following data is avail-
able for each power source.
• Phase and total/avg V, A, kW, kVAR, kVA, PF,
and Hz
• Phase and total metering of +kWh, −kWh,
+kVARh, and −kVARh
NOTE: Positive values refer to the power ex-
ported by the source and the negative
values refer to power imported by the
source.
The AC metering feature provides pre-calibrated
PT and CT inputs. Field adjustments are available,
if needed, using the setup tool (see page 5-2) or us-
ing the digital display (see page 6-33). Monitoring
AC metering functions is also available using the
digital display (see page 6-108).
AC Voltage
The MCM3320 senses genset AC voltage lines L1,
L2, L2, and N via the TB6 connector. The
MCM3320 senses utility AC voltage via the TB7
connector.

3-1
 PRELIMINARY
The on-board power transformers (PTs) accept
0−480VLL directly. External PTs are required for
higher voltages (up to 35000V).
AC Current
The MCM3320 senses three phase genset and
utility current. Each phase current wire is threaded
through an on-board current transformer (CT1 for
utility phase A, CT2 for utility phase B, CT3 for utility
phase C, CT4 for genset phase A, CT5 for genset
phase B, and CT6 for genset phase C).
The MCM3320 accepts either a one amp or a five
amp secondary (up to 10000A primary) and it in-
cludes a high withstand capability for faults. Use
one pass through the hole for a 1 amp secondary or
two passes for a five amp secondary. Refer to the
wiring diagrams for polarity of CT connections.
MASTER SYNCHRONIZING AND
VOLTAGE MATCHING
The MCM3320 performs both phase synchroniza-
tion and voltage matching. The MCM3320
matches frequency, phase, and voltage of a sys-
tem of paralleled gensets to a utility bus. This done
by driving the kW and kVAR load share lines to ad-
just the genset frequency and voltage.
The MCM3320 is designed to synchronize gensets
with PCC controls. The MCM3320 can be used
with gensets that do not have a PCC control but
there will be no voltage matching in those applica-
tions.
The master synchronizing and voltage matching
feature provides the following functions.
• Synchronization of up to 20 gensets to another
source
• An output frequency offset range of +/−1.5 Hz
minimum, up to +/− 3.0 Hz
• An output voltage offset range of +/− 10%
• An offset range that is generally independent
of genset bus load
• Control of frequency and voltage via the PCC
kW and kVAR load share lines
• Allowance of selectable phase synchroniza-
tion (default) or slip frequency synchronization
• Adjustable slip frequency (used with the slip
frequency synchronization method)
3-2
• Adjustable control loop gains
• A sync enable input to be used for Manual
Mode or Sync Only applications
• A synchronizer output limit diagnostic
• An option to lock out the synchronizer if a fail-
to-sync occurs. It is re-enabled upon a fault re-
set.
• An option to invert synchronizer polarity if the
genset and utility swap positions in a synchro-
nizer-only application (via the ModBus)
• Adjustable frequency and voltage control out-
put ramp rates for minimizing disturbance
when synchronization is activated.
Adjustments to synchronization parameters can
be done using the setup tool (see page 5-5). Moni-
toring synchronizer functions is also available us-
ing the digital display (see page 6-142).
Ratings and Typical Performance
The MCM3320 can synchronize up to a 12-genset
bus to another source. The output frequency offset
range is from 1.5 Hz minimum, up to 3.0 Hz. It
has an output voltage offset range of 10 percent.
Table 3-1 shows the typical performance of the
phase synchronizer with diesel engines.
TABLE 3-1. TYPICAL SYNCHRONIZER
PERFORMANCE
Typical Performance
with Diesel Engines
Synchronize Time with 1−5 Seconds
Phase Match
Synchronize Time with 3−10 Seconds
Frequency Match
Phase Hold Within 5 percent
Maximum Number of Sets 12
Synchronizing Methods
The MCM3320 provides for two methods of syn-
chronizing.
• Phase Synchronizing
• Slip Frequency Synchronizing
Phase Synchronizing
Phase synchronizing is the default method and is
suitable for most applications.
PRELIMINARY
When the phase synchronizing method is selected,
the synchronizer matches phase, frequency, and
voltage on the generator bus to the utility bus. The
phase match algorithm drives the kW load share
lines to match frequency and phase. The
MCM3320 quickly matches frequency and then
slowly brings the two sources into phase synchro-
nization.
Slip Frequency Synchronizing
Slip frequency synchronizing should be used with
difficult to sync applications, such as natural gas.
When the slip frequency synchronizing method is
selected, the genset bus frequency is driven to be a
fixed frequency high or lower (for example, 0.1 Hz)
than the utility bus frequency.
The slip frequency method works by governing the
generator bus frequency slightly off of the utility fre-
quency. This frequency is called the slip frequency.
The frequency difference produces a constantly
changing phase difference between the two
sources. If the frequencies are close enough peri-
odically, the phase difference will be small enough
that it will meet the permissive conditions for clos-
ing the circuit breaker.
Because it is easier to govern frequency than it is to
match phase, you may wish to use this method on
systems that are difficult to match phase or when
you would like to control the direction of power flow
when the breaker closes frequency synchronizing.
Since the permissive conditions occur periodically
based on the slip frequency, the slip frequency
method takes longer to synchronize than the phase
match method. The phase gain has no effect when
using the frequency synchronize method and when
phase synchronizing is selected, the slip frequency
has no effect. Table 3-2 shows the recommended
slip frequency settings. The recommended slip fre-
quency setting is:
Phase Window / (360 * Time in Window)
By using the settings in the table, the phase differ-
ence at the end of the permissive time window
(when the breaker is allowed to close) will be 0 de-
grees. (For example, at 0.1 Hz slip, it takes 0.5 sec-
onds for the phase to change 20 degrees; the
phase difference is in a 20 degree window for 0.5
seconds.)
3-3
TABLE 3-2. RECOMMENDED SLIP FREQUENCY
SETTINGS
Permissive Recommended Time is Seconds
Window Slip Frequency Between When
in Hz permissive
Window
Conditions are
Met
20 degrees 0.1 10
0.5 seconds
10 degrees 0.05 20
0.5 seconds
Voltage Matching
The MCM3320 matches the average of the three
generator phases to the average of the three utility
phases. The MCM3320 matches voltage in a simi-
lar way in which it matches frequency. The
MCM3320 drives the kVAR load share lines to
match voltage. Voltage matching is active in both
the phase and frequency synchronize methods.
Tuning the voltage matching is done in a similar
way to frequency matching. There is a proportional
gain (Kp) and an integral gain (Ki).
Voltage matching gains are generally less critical
than frequency or phase matching gains and typi-
cally do not need to be adjusted.
NOTE: If the genset voltage is increased by volt-
age matching, the load on the genset in-
creases. If the voltage is raised to 6 per-
cent, then the genset load will increase by
12 percent.
Synchronizer Enabling Conditions
The MCM3320 does not start synchronizing unless
the following conditions are met.
• The system topology must be set to Master
Synchronize or, in another topology where the
software requests synchronizing.
• The generator power source must be avail-
able.
• The utility power source must be available.
• The MCM must either be in Auto mode or else
it is in Manual mode with the sync enable
switch on.
• The Fail to Synchronize fault must not be ac-
tive or the Fail to Sync lockout is disabled.
 PRELIMINARY
• The generator and bus must have the same
phase rotation.
• The MCM3320 must not be inhibited.
The synchronizer function requires both sources to
be considered as “available” in order to be able to
turn on synchronizing. A source is available when
all enabled sensors are picked up.
Sync Enable Input
The sync enable input is used to enable synchro-
nizing when the control is in Manual mode or when
the MCM3320 is used as a synchronizer only. (With
the Power Transfer Control (PTC) function, sync
enabling is automatically done by the control.)
Auto / Manual Synchronizer Operation
When the synchronizer is set for automatic opera-
tion (open circuit), it will start synchronizing when
both power sources are available.
When the synchronizer is set for manual operation
(grounded circuit), it will start synchronizing when
both power sources are available and the Sync En-
able input is grounded. It does not synchronize
when Sync enable is an open circuit.
Genset Sensor Operation During
Synchronizing
When the synchronizer is running, the pickup and
dropout thresholds for undervoltage, overvoltage,
and frequency sensors for the genset bus are tem-
porarily expanded in order to allow the synchroniz-
er to change the bus voltage and frequency without
dropping out a sensor.
Synchronizer Polarity Inversion
If the MCM3320 is being used in a sync only ap-
plication, the operator may invert which source is
the genset and which is the utility via the ModBus.
TABLE 3-3. SYNCHRONIZING RANGE
Synchronizer Maximum
Default Range Allowable Range
Frequency 1Hz 5 Hz
Voltage 6% 9%
Maximum Allowable Synchronizer Range
vs. Load Share Gains
The MCM3320 drives the load share lines to syn-
chronize system frequency/phase, and voltage. In
order for frequency and voltage matching to work
properly, the kW and kVAR load share gains must
be set properly so that all of the controls respond
the same way to the voltage applied to the load
share lines. If the system genset controls are all set
the same, the load share gains must be set to the
same values. If your installation includes a mix of
PCC3100 and PCC3200 controls, the controls
must be set up so that their gains have the same
effect. The load share gains affect the range of op-
eration of the frequency, voltage matching, and the
synchronizer gain.
The default synchronizing range limits for frequen-
cy/phase and voltage matching are shown in Table
3-3. These limits are set so the MCM3320 will work
with the default load share gain settings of the
PCC3100 and PCC3200.
NOTE: The PCC3100 and PCC3200 have over-
voltage shutdowns at 110%. The voltage
matching range on the MCM3320 should
not be set to exceed this value.
If a wider range is desired, the load share gains can
be increased. The kW load share gain controls the
frequency matching range and the kVAR load
share gain controls the voltage matching range.
The PCC3100 default gain allows a 2.5 Hz fre-
quency match range. Maximum match ranges for
PCC3100 and PCC3200 controls are listed in
Table 3-4. The maximum voltage and frequency
synchronizing range is not available through the
operator panel; it must be changed using InPower.
NOTE: Higher gains may cause the load sharing to
become unstable. If the gains are changed,
stable load share operation should be veri-
fied.
Comments
Maximum range is only achievable by changing kW
load share
Default overvoltage shutdown of the genset controls is
110%
3-4
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 3-4. PCC3100 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SYNCHRONIZE RANGE VS. LOAD SHARE GAINS
Maximum Frequency Maximum Voltage
kW Load Share Gain kVAR Load Share Gain
Match Range Match Range
PCC3100
3 2.0 Hz 150 4%
6 (Default) 2.5 Hz 300 (Default) 8%
8 3.5 Hz
PCC3200
0.5 0.5 Hz 0.5 4%
1.0 (Default) 1.0 Hz 1.0 (Default) 8%
2.0 2.5 Hz

Synchronizer Diagnostics monitors for permissive sync conditions to be met

The MCM3320 supports the following synchroniz-
er diagnostics.
Fail to Synchronize Warning
A Fail to Synchronize warning is activated if syn-
chronizing does not occur within the time specified.
If the fail to synchronize lockout is disabled, syn-
chronizing will continue while the fault is active. If
the fail to synchronize lockout is enabled, synchro-
nizing ceases as soon as the fault occurs. If a fail to
sync fault occurs and the synchronize lockout is
enabled, the fault must be reset before normal op-
eration can occur.
Synchronizer Phase Rotation Warning
A Synchronizer Phase Rotation warning is acti-
vated if the phase rotation of the utility bus does not
match the phase rotation of the generator bus.
Synchronizing continues while this fault is active.
The system phase rotation can be set in either the
generator or utility bus menu (see page ).
Synchronizer Output Limit Warning
The Synchronizer Output Limit warning is active if
the MCM3320 drive on the load share lines reach-
es its maximum. This fault occurs when the
MCM3320 cannot reach the desired level needed
to match voltage and frequency. If this fault occurs,
synchronizing stops.
PERMISSIVE SYNC CHECK
The MCM3320 sync check function is independent
of the synchronizer. The MCM3320 continuously
when sources are considered acceptable. The fol-
lowing permissive sync check features are avail-
able with the MCM3320.
• An adjustable frequency window, phase win-
dow, voltage window, and window time for per-
missive check
• A configurable dead bus logic
• Sync check output
• A fail-to-synchronize diagnostic
• A phase rotation mismatch diagnostic (sync
check OK is prevented if phase rotations are
different)
The MCM3320 sync check function runs indepen-
dently of the synchronizer. The PTC function uses
the sync check output to determine when to close
the circuit breaker. The sync check output can be
mapped to one of the MCM3320 configurable out-
puts. (It is mapped to configurable output 6 by de-
fault.) Sync check default settings are listed in
Table 3-5.
TABLE 3-5. SYNC CHECK DEFAULT SETTINGS
Default
Voltage 5%
Phase 10 Degrees
Time 0.5 Seconds
Frequency 1.0 Hz
Adjustments to sync check parameters can be
done using the setup tool (see page 5-9) or using
the digital display (see page 6-74). Monitoring sync
check functions is also available using the digital
display (see page 6-140).

3-5
 PRELIMINARY
Permissive Close Conditions
The following conditions must be met before a per-
missive close is allowed.
1. The utility source must be available.
2. The generator source must be available.
3. The utility and generator phase rotation must
be identical.
4. The highest difference of all the generator
phase voltages minus the utility phases must
be less than the voltage window.
5. The phase differences must be less that 20 de-
grees and decreasing or less than 10 degrees
with the phase difference less than the phase
window.
6. The frequency difference between the
sources must be less than the frequency win-
dow.
7. All permissive conditions are met for the time
window.
8. The MCM3320 is not inhibited.
NOTE: The permissive close is removed when the
phase difference is greater than 20 de-
grees or the voltage difference is greater
than five percent.
LEDs on the MCM3320 control board display the
sync check status (see Section 7).
Dead Bus Close Scenarios
In synchronizer only applications, sync check can
be enabled individually for the following dead bus
scenarios.
• Dead utility and dead genset
• Live utility and dead genset
• Dead utility and live genset
The dead bus threshold for both the utility bus and
the genset bus are adjustable. the default for both
busses is 10 percent of nominal.
CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL
INTERFACE
The breaker control interface feature provides the
following functions.
3-6
• Full breaker interface for both genset and util-
ity main breakers
• Close and open control − momentary ener-
gization until desired position is achieved
• Breaker position inputs − selectable as dual
contact (a/b) OR single contact (a) − dual pre-
ferred for robustness and reliability
• An adjustable breaker recharge time delay to
prevent fail to close due to inadequate charge
time
• Utility paralleling enable output to genset con-
trols (connects to utility CB position input)
• Breaker inhibit control input (opens breaker if
closed; inhibits closure if open)
• Breaker tripped input included in source avail-
ability determination
• Breaker diagnostics with appropriate system
control reaction − tripped, contact failure, fail
to close, or fail to open
• Adjustable fail-to-close and fail-to-open time
delays
• Paralleling fail-to-disconnect diagnostic with
redundant and configurable system control
reaction
• Anti-pump avoidance logic − external breaker
position contacts not required in series with
trip coil
• Breaker open and close relay contacts capa-
ble of directly driving trip and close coils in
some low voltage applications
• Breaker inhibit output to control individual gen-
set paralleling breakers in applications with no
genset main, and for backup disconnect
protection capability
Adjustments to circuit breaker parameters can be
done using the setup tool (see page 5-12).
Breaker Control
The MCM3320 controls separate relays for closing
and opening genset main and utility main breakers.
The relays are energized until the desired position
is achieved. A breaker recharge time delay is ad-
justable. Breakers can be controlled manually
when the Auto/Manual switch is set to Manual.
PRELIMINARY
The MCM3320 has a built-in software interlock for
open transition applications.
In applications without a genset main breaker, the
MCM3320 controls the virtual genset main via the
paralleling genset circuit breaker inhibit inputs on
the genset controls. TB3-16 on the MCM3320 con-
trol board is connected to the genset breaker inhibit
on each of the genset controls.
Breaker Position Sensing
The MCM3320 used two contacts (‘a’ and ‘b’) to de-
termine breaker position. The default preferred
setting is when the ‘a’ contact is used for position
and the ‘b’ contact is used as check. the MCM3320
can be configured for ‘a’ contact only operation, but
this is not preferred. Once the breaker is deter-
mined to be closed, the source is considered con-
nected.
The two contacts should always be in opposite
states (one should be open and the other closed). If
this is not the case, the control looks upon this as a
contact fault. In this situation, if current on all three
phases is greater than the threshold value, the
breaker is considered closed; otherwise, the
breaker position is unknown. When the breaker
position is unknown, the source is considered to be
not available.
In applications without a genset main breaker, a
virtual genset main is created by a collection of
genset paralleling breakers. In this case, if one or
more genset paralleling breakers is closed, the
virtual genset main is considered closed. If your
installation consists for four or fewer gensets, the
individual genset circuit breaker position inputs
should be used. If your installation includes more
than four gensets, the circuit breaker contacts
should be connected in parallel to the genset main
position inputs.
Breaker Diagnostics
The MCM3320 supports the following breaker
diagnostic functions. Additional information on
these diagnostic functions is included on page
7-21.
• Fail to Close (has an adjustable delay)
• Fail to Open (has an adjustable delay)
• Breaker Contacts
• Breaker Tripped
3-7
• Fail to Disconnect
POWER TRANSFER CONTROL
The Power Transfer Control (PTC) feature pro-
vides the following functions.
• Support of open transition with program transi-
tion delay, hard closed transition (<100msec),
soft load closed transition
• Source sensors (undervoltage, overvoltage,
frequency, phase rotation, loss of phase, gen-
set bus capacity, and breaker failure)
• Adjustable time delays (program transition,
transfer, retransfer, max parallel, gensets start
delay, gensets stop delay)
• Source availability determination for both the
utility and the gensets
• Source connected determination for both the
utility and the gensets
• Genset start/stop logic with single relay output
• Transfer and retransfer inhibit inputs (note that
these have different action than the breaker in-
hibit inputs)
• Override input to override timers and transfer/
retransfer inhibits for immediate transfer, re-
transfer or genset start
• Auto/Manual transfer mode input
• Test start input
• Adjustable test with or without load
• Option to do open transition retransfer if a fail-
to-sync occurs
The PTC function manages the circuit breakers
and normal starting and stopping of the gensets.
The PTC function also decides when the master
synchronizer is needed.
Adjustments to PTC parameters can be done using
the digital display (see page 6-56). Monitoring PTC
functions is also available using the digital display
(see page 6-128).
Auto/Manual Modes
Auto/Manual mode can be selected either with a
hardwired input or through the ModBus port. The
default is Auto Mode.
Selecting Manual puts the breaker and synchroniz-
er control in manual mode. Manual mode bypasses
all of the PTC functions and allows the circuit
breakers to be controlled manually.
 PRELIMINARY

PTC Operation TABLE 3-6. PTC OPERATING MODES

The Power Transfer Control (PTC) feature deter-
mines the overall system operating mode. It evalu-
ates utility source status, test start/stop, and ex-
tended parallel start/stop to decide whether or not
to start or stop the gensets and maintains informa-
tion on how the transfer switch needs to operate.
The PTC tests prioritized conditions. It starts by
testing the highest prioritized condition. If the con-
dition exists, it does not test for any additional con-
ditions. If the highest prioritized condition does not
exist, it then tests to the next highest priority condi-
tion, etc. If none of the conditions exist, the PTC op-
erating mode is set to the default.
The operating modes available with the PTC are
listed in Table 3-6.
Table 3-7 summarizes the logic used to set the PTC
operating mode.
Genset Run/Stop Control
Time delays are incorporated into the genset start-
ing and stopping sequence. If your installation in-
cludes multiple gensets, a single Form-C relay is
used to activate the remote start inputs of all gen-
sets simultaneously.
Mode Description
Normal The is the normal operating condi-
tion. The PTC is attempting to re-
transfer to the utility or, if it already
has transferred to the utility, it stays
there.
Normal This indicates that a problem with
Override the genset source has occurred. The
transfer switch will either stay con-
nected to the utility or else it will
quickly transfer the load to the utility,
aborting any retransfer time delay
and ignoring any retransfer inhibit.
Test This indicates that a test input has
been activated. If set to transfer
“with load”, the PTC is attempting to
transfer the load to the genset. If the
test begins while the load is running
off of the genset, the load remains
with the genset until the test is over.
If the genset is not powering the
load, the genset runs without load
until the test is completed.
Utility Fail The utility has failed and the PTC is
attempting to transfer the load to the
genset. Once the load has been
transferred, the load will remain
there until utility power returns.
Extended An extended parallel start has been
Parallel initiated. The PTC will start the gen-
sets, parallel to the utility, and either
base load or peak shave.

TABLE 3-7. PTC OPERATION

Priority Conditions
Highest The utility is not available
The utility breaker opens
AND the genset becomes
available
Extended Paralleling is
requested and at least one
source is connected
A test is requested
Lowest Normal operation
PTC Operating Comments
Mode
Utility Fail After the utility fails, the genset starts and the
load is transferred to the genset.
Normal Override The genset failed during a test or extended par-
allel. The load is immediately transferred to the
utility, bypassing any time delays and inhibits.
Extended Parallel The transfer switch can be connected to either
the utility or the genset.
Test The genset starts and, if set to do so, transfers
the load to the genset. When the test is over,
the load is retransferred back to the genset and
the genset is shut down.
Normal If connected to the isolated bus, a test will stop.
If connected to the common bus or transfer
pair, the utility is available. The load is trans-
ferred to the utility and stays there.

3-8
PRELIMINARY
PTC States
There are four possible states defined by four pos-
sible combinations of GM and UM breaker positions.
Each state determines if the synchronizer should be
activated and if a breaker should be opened or
closed. When a breaker closure is required, the
breaker does not close until all sync check permissive
conditions are met.
The four possible PTC states are No Source con-
nected, Utility Connected, Genset Connected, and
Paralleled.
No Source Connected
During programmed transition, the MCM3320 is
briefly in a No Source Connected state.
If the PTC is in Normal or Normal Override mode, it
will try to close the utility breaker. If the PTC is in
Utility Fail, Test, or Extended Parallel mode, it will
try to close the genset breaker.
Utility Connected
The normal state for the PTC is the Utility Con-
nected state.
If the PTC is in Extended Parallel or Test with Load
mode, the MCM3320 tries to sync and close to the
genset bus. If the utility has failed or an open transi-
tion Test with Load is requested and the genset is
not available, the PTC will open the utility breaker.
Be aware that even if the utility fails, it will not open
the genset breaker unless the genset bus is avail-
able.
Genset Connected
The MCM3320 is typically in the Genset Con-
nected state during a test or when the utility has
failed.
When the test is over or utility power returns, the
MCM3320 activates the synchronizer and closes
the utility breaker so that the load can be trans-
ferred back to the utility. If open transition is se-
lected, the MCM3320 opens the genset breaker
when the test ends or utility power is again avail-
able.
3-9
Paralleled
The MCM3320 is in Paralleled state when the fol-
lowing conditions occur.
• The MCM3320 is in extended paralleling
mode.
• For a short time, the utility has failed and then
returned.
• A test is running and closed transition has
been selected.
If the PTC switches from Extended Paralleling or
Test mode to Normal or Normal Override mode, the
control will open the genset breaker. If the PTC is in
Test mode and the maximum parallel timer has ex-
pired, the control will open the utility breaker.
Sensors
An MCM3320 installation provides for monitoring
of generator and utility sensors to determine is the
bus voltages and frequencies are in an acceptable
operating range.
Both power sources have the following sensors.
• Undervoltage
• Overvoltage*
• Under/Over Frequency*
• Phase Rotation*
• Loss of Phase*
• Main Breaker Tripped
• Fail to Close
• Position Contact Failure
* These sensors can be enabled using the operator
panel menus.
The utility source also has a Utility Source Failure
switch input.
The genset source also has a Genset Online Ca-
pacity Sensor. This sensor detects when the online
kW capacity exceeds threshold. Once the genset
main breaker closes, the sensor stops checking
the kW capacity.
The undervoltage, main breaker tripped, fail to
close, and position contact failure sensors are al-
ways enabled. The other sensors may be enabled,
if desired.
 PRELIMINARY
If any sensor is dropped out, the source is consid-
ered to be not available.
Undervoltage Sensor
source availability is determined by the undervol-
tage sensor. This sensor drops out when the volt-
age falls below the drop-out threshold and picks up
when the voltage rises above the pickup threshold
setting. There is a drop out time delay but pick up is
immediate.
Overvoltage Sensor
When enabled, this sensor drops out when the volt-
age exceeds the drop out threshold and picks up
when the voltage falls below the pick up threshold.
There is a drop out time delay but pick up is imme-
diate.
Frequency Sensor
When enabled, this sensor drops out when the fre-
quency goes beyond drop out thresholds and picks
up when frequency falls within the pick up thresh-
olds. There is a drop out time delay but pick up is
immediate.
Phase Rotation Sensor
When enabled, this sensor drops out if the phase
rotation of the source does not match the phase
rotation setting.
Loss of Phase Sensor
When enabled, this sensor detects if the line-to-line
voltages are more than 30 degrees from 120 de-
grees. There is a drop out time delay but pick up is
immediate.
Main Breaker Tripped
The MCM3320 detects a main breaker trip via the
hardwired input from the breaker.
Fail to Close
If a breaker is sent a signal to close but fails to close
within an adjustable time delay, the fail to close
sensor drops out and the source is considered un-
available.
Position Contact Failure
If the MCM3320 cannot determine the breaker
position because of a contact position failure, clos-
3-10
ing to either source is inhibited. For more informa-
tion, see “Breaker Position Sensing” on page 3-7
and “Utility Main Breaker Contacts” on page 7-21.
Timers
The PTC uses the following timers that can be ad-
justed by using the menus available through the
operator panel or but using InPower connected to
the ModBus port.
Genset Run/Stop Control Timers
The MCM3320 incorporates the following two time
delays into the genset starting and stopping se-
quence.
• The time delay engine start (TDES) time delay
controls how long the engine should run be-
fore the load is transferred to the genset.
• The time delay engine cooldown (TDEC) time
delay controls how long the engine should
continue to run after the load has been trans-
ferred back the the utility.
It is recommended that TDES and TDEC in the
genset control be set to zero and that these time
delays be set using the MCM3320’s operator pan-
el.
PTC Timers
The PTC uses the following four timers but only
one of these timers can be active at any given time.
• The time delay programmed transition (TDPT)
is the amount of time between opening one
source and closing the other source. This time
delay can only be active when there is no
source connected.
• The TDNE timer is applicable only when the
utility is connected. It is the time between a
transfer being requested and the transfer be-
ing initiated.
• The TDEN timer is applicable only when the
genset is connected. It is the time between a
transfer being requested and the transfer be-
ing initiated.
• The time delay maximum parallel (TDMP) is
applicable when two sources are paralleled. It
is the time what the two sources may be paral-
leled when the MCM3320 is not in extended
parallel mode. When the timer expires, the
genset breaker opens, regardless of whether
the genset is unloaded or not. The ramp rate
PRELIMINARY
in the genset controller should be set so that
when transferring the load to the utility, the
genset will be completely unloaded before the
max parallel timer expires.
Transfer Inhibit
Transfer inhibit prevents the transfer of the load
from the utility to the genset. When the utility is con-
nected, transfer inhibit prevents a sync enable re-
quest and a genset breaker close request. Trans-
ferred inhibit can be set using a discrete input or via
the ModBus port.
Retransfer Inhibit
Retransfer inhibit prevents the transfer of the load
from the genset to the utility. When the genset is
connected, transfer inhibit prevents a sync enable
request and a utility breaker close request. Re-
transferred inhibit can be set using a discrete input
or via the ModBus port.
Override
The override function overrides all timers and
transfer/retransfer inhibits for immediate transfer,
retransfer, or genset start. Override can be set us-
ing a discrete input or via the ModBus port.
Transition Types
The MCM3320 supports the following three transi-
tion types.
Open Transition
The MCM3320 performs open transition transfers
and retransfers with a programmed transition
delay.
Hard Closed Transition
The MCM3320 performs a hard closed transition
with <100msec of overlap.
Soft Closed Transition
The MCM3320 performs a soft transition with load
ramping for both transfer and retransfers between
live sources. The ramp rate is controlled the the in-
dividual genset controls. When a source is being
unloaded, the MCM3320 monitors he output of that
3-11
source and, when it gets below the set threshold, it
opens that source’s breaker.
Test
The MCM3320 can be set to test either with or with-
out load. A test is initiated either by a discrete input
or by the scheduler. The test lasts as long as the ini-
tiating test commend remains active. If a test is initi-
ated by the hardware input, the tool determines if
the test is to run with or without load. If a test is initi-
ated by the scheduler, the scheduler determines
whether to run the test with or without load.
NOTE: A test start command is ignored if the PTC
is in Utility Fail, Normal Override, or Ex-
tended Parallel mode.
Test Without Load
When the control is set to test without load, the gen-
set normally starts without load and continues to
run for the set test period. At the end of a test, the
MCM3320 commands the genset(s) to shut down.
A test is stopped if is interrupted by the PTC switch-
ing to Utility Fail, Normal Override, or Extended
Parallel mode. This would happen in one of the
sources fails or an extended parallel command is
issued.
Test With Load
When the control is set to test with load, the gen-
set(s) normally start, sync to the utility, and the load
is transferred to the genset using the selected tran-
sition type after the set time delays have expired. At
the end of a test, the load is retransferred back to
the utility and the MCM3320 commands the gen-
set(s) to shut down.
A test is stopped if is interrupted by the PTC switch-
ing to Utility Fail, Normal Override, or Extended
Parallel mode. This would happen in one of the
sources fails or an extended parallel command is
issued.
Fail to Sync Open Transition Retransfer
If the Fail to Sync Open Transition Retransfer fea-
ture is enabled, an open transition transfer occurs if
a fail to synchronize fault is activated.
 PRELIMINARY

SYSTEM TOPOLOGIES used when only the features of AC metering and

For utility paralleling applications, the MCM3320
supports transfer pair (UM and GM − see Figure
2-9) and common bus (UM only − see Figure 2-10).
For isolated bus applications, the MCM3320 sup-
ports isolated bus with (see Figure 2-11) or without
(see Figure 2-12) a genset main breaker.
The MCM3320 can also be used as a master syn-
chronizer only (see Figure 2-13). This topology is
synchronizing are needed. Metering is optional.
The MCM3320 completely manages the system,
including breaker control, synchronizing, load con-
trol, diagnostics, etc.
Setting the system topology can be done using the
setup tool (see page 5-19) or using the digital dis-
play (see page 6-84).

G1 G2 G1 G2
MCM3320

UM GM
LOAD

FIGURE 2-9. TRANSFER PAIR TOPOLOGY (SYSTEM TYPES 2, 3, 4, 8, 10, AND 11)

G1 G2 G1 G2
MCM3320

UM
LOAD

FIGURE 2-10. COMMON BUS TOPOLOGY (SYSTEM TYPES 9)

3-12
PRELIMINARY

G1 G2 G1 G2
MCM3320

GM

LOAD

FIGURE 2-11. ISOLATED BUS WITH GM TOPOLOGY (SYSTEM TYPE 7)

G1 G2 G1 G2
MCM3320

LOAD

FIGURE 2-12. ISOLATED BUS WITHOUT GM TOPOLOGY (SYSTEM TYPES 5 AND 6)

G1 G2 G1 G2
MCM3320

SOURCE SYNC
CHECK

FIGURE 2-13. MASTER SYNCHRONIZER ONLY TOPOLOGY (OPTIONAL METERING)

3-13
 PRELIMINARY
MULTIPLE TRANSFER PAIR
SEQUENCING (EXTERNAL)
The multiple transfer pair sequencing feature pro-
vides the following functions.
• The master inhibit input inhibits the synchro-
nizer and power transfer control functions.
• This feature can be used in complex systems
with multiple transfer pairs and multiple
MCM3320s.
• An external logic device is required to assert
the master inhibit as required (e.g. during a re-
transfer sequence of multiple pairs).
• Future enhancement will allow automatic
priority control through interconnected
MCM3320s (similar to First Start Bus PT log-
ic).
LOAD CONTROL
The master load control feature performs the fol-
lowing functions.
• Controls real and reactive power in extended
[paralleling operation (base lade / peak shave)
• Causes ramp loading and unloading during
soft closed transition load transfers
• Operates independently of the number of gen-
sets that are online
• Provides diagnostics in extended paralleling if
the desired setpoint(s) cannot be achieved
The master load control function ultimately drives
two hardware analog outputs, one for kW control
and one for kVAR control. The kW control output is
connected to all of the kW load set inputs on the
gensets to be controlled. The kVAR control output
is connected to all of the kVAR load set inputs on
the gensets to be controlled.
NOTE: The PCC3100 genset control does not
have a kVAR load set input.
The following functions are available with the mas-
ter load control feature.
• Many options available for controlling kW and
kVAR in extended paralleling mode.
• kW and kVAR can be independently controlled
in any combination of base load (control the
power at the genset bus) or peak shave (con-
trol the power at the utility bus).
3-14
• Load control operates independently of the
number of gensets that are online.
• Extended paralleling can be used with a maxi-
mum of 20 gensets.
• kW base load control is selectable as open
loop or closed loop.
• kW peak shave control is closed loop only.
• kVAR control selectable is done by genset
controllers, open loop base load, closed loop
base load, or closed loop peak shave
• kVAR control can be either based on kVAR di-
rectly, or on the power factor.
• Setpoints can be set from InPower, the opera-
tor panel, ModBus, or via the analog hardware
0−5V inputs.
• The extended parallel start input starts/stops
the mode.
• A single kW analog output drives all genset kW
load setpoint inputs simultaneously.
• A single kVAR analog output drives all genset
kVAR load setpoint inputs simultaneously (not
applicable to PCC3100).
• Soft load ramping is available.
• Includes an optional load tracking feature to
prevent utility kW export if building load should
drop below base load kW setpoint
• Separate diagnostics are available for both
kW and kVAR if unable to achieve setpoint.
Adjustments to load control parameters can be
done using the setup tool (see page 5-15) and (see
page 6-16). Monitoring load control functions is
also available using the digital display (see page
6-136).
Extended Paralleling (Base Load / Peak
Shave)
Extended paralleling refers to continued operation
in parallel with a utility source for the purposes of
base load and/or peak shave operation.
During extended paralleling operation, the kW and
kVAR of the gensets are controlled in a number of
ways (see Tables 3-8 and 3-9). The kW control type
and the kVAR control type can be set independent-
ly of each other. For example, the kW could be con-
trolled at the genset bus (base load) while the kVAR
could be controlled at the utility bus (peak shave).
This scenario is useful in applications where, while
base loading the gensets, it is desirable to manage
PRELIMINARY

the utility kVAR to avoid penalties from the utility for Extended paralleling can be enabled/disabled us-
a low power factor. The gensets that are online are ing the digital display (see page 6-84).
limited to what they are capable of putting out;
therefore, it may not always be possible to achieve
Load Ramping
a desired setpoint.

In all installations, the online gensets are limited to
what they are capable of putting out. Therefore it
may not always be possible to achieve a desired
setpoint.
The MCM3320 can be configured for open loop or
closed loop base load operation (see page 6-18).
NOTE: Peak shave always requires closed loop
base load operation.
In some cases, open loop operation may be desir-
able due to stability issues with a closed loop base
load operation. Open loop operation may also be
required for each genset that is online in order to
put out a fixed percentage of its capability.
During soft closed transition load transfers, load
ramping is done by the individual genset control-
lers. Therefore, the desired ramp rates must be set
in the genset controllers. The ramping direction is
controlled by the MCM3320 by either setting the
control output value to give +5V (ramp load) or 0V
(ramp unload) on the analog output.
When an extended parallel state is activated, the
ramping of the load is controlled by the MCM3320.
This is necessary because the load control algo-
rithm in the MCM3320 operates without knowledge
of the number of gensets online. When an ex-
tended parallel session expires, the ramp loading
is done by the individual genset controllers.

TABLE 3-8. REAL POWER CONTROL OPTIONS

Parameter Setting
3100
Extended Paralleling kW Load Control Type =
Genset Bus % Level
(Open Loop) − This is
the default setting.
Genset Bus kW (Closed
Loop)
Genset Bus kW Utility
Constraint (Closed
Loop)
Utility Bus kW (Closed
Loop)
Genset Controller
Capability
Description
3200
3300
3201
n n n The MCM3320 puts out a user adjustable fixed
percent level on the kW control output. The genset
bus kW is a result of whatever gensets are online.
Therefore, it is an open loop on the kW at the
genset.
n n n The MCM3320 drives the kW control output to
achieve the desired kW setpoint at the GM. If the
setpoint cannot be achieved within a preset time, a
warning fault occurs.
n n n The MCM3320 drives the kW control output to
achieve the desired kW setpoint at the GM and
reduces the this setpoint to keep the kW at the UM
above the programmed level. (This can be used to
prevent tripping a UM reverse power relay because
of the load falling below the GM kW setpoint.
Coordination of the settings in the MCM3320 and
the relay and an understanding of the magnitude of
load fluctuations is critical to the successful use of
this feature.
n n n The MCM3320 drives the kW control output to
achieve the desired kW setpoint at the UM. If the
setpoint cannot be achieved within a preset time, a
warning fault occurs.

3-15
 PRELIMINARY

TABLE 3-9. REACTIVE POWER CONTROL OPTIONS

Genset Controller
Capability
Parameter Setting Description
3200
3100 3300
3201

Extended Paralleling kVAR Load Control Type =

Genset Controllers −
This is the default
setting.
Genset Bus Power %
Level (Open Loop)
Genset Bus Power
Factor (Open Loop)
Genset Bus kVAR
(Closed Loop)
Genset Bus Power
Factor (Closed Loop)
Utility Bus kVAR (Closed
Loop)
Utility Bus Power Factor
(Closed Loop)
n n n The MCM3320 does nothing. The kVAR control
output = 0. The genset controllers take care of the
kVAR control, based on their own settings (for
example, a fixed power factor of 0.95).
NOTE: This is the only option that will work with a
PCC3100 control.
n n The MCM3320 puts out a user adjustable fixed
percent level on the kVAR control output. The
genset bus kVAR is a result of whatever gensets
happen to be online.
n n The MCM3320 puts out a level on the kVAR control
based on what is being currently sent on the kW
control output. The relationship between the two is
based upon the Power Factor setting.
n n The MCM3320 drives the kVAR control output to
achieve the desired kVAR setpoint at the GM. If the
setpoint cannot be achieved within a preset time, a
warning fault occurs.
n n The MCM3320 drives the kVAR control output to
achieve the desired PF setpoint at the GM. If the
setpoint cannot be achieved within a preset time, a
warning fault occurs.
n n The MCM3320 drives the kVAR control output to
achieve the desired kVAR setpoint at the UM. If the
setpoint cannot be achieved within a preset time, a
warning fault occurs.
n n The MCM3320 drives the kVAR control output to
achieve the desired PF setpoint at the UM. If the
setpoint cannot be achieved within a preset time, a
warning fault occurs.

If an individual genset comes online when ex- Number of Gensets

tended paralleling is already underway, it will ramp
toward whatever the current setpoint is. If the
MCM3320 is using closed loop operation, it will ad-
just its output command to compensate for the new
genset coming into the group. The same is true if
an individual genset is to ramp unload. For smooth
operation, the ramp load and ramp unload times in
the genset controllers should not be set to time val-
ues less than 60 seconds, if at all possible.
Because the master load control function does not
require knowledge of how many gensets are on-
line, your installation can include up to 12 gensets
without needing all of the additional I/O.
In closed loop mode, the load control function
drives the control output to attempt to achieve the
setpoint target with the available gensets. It is im-
portant that the individual genset kW ratings be en-

3-16
PRELIMINARY
tered into the MCM3320 because, in some configu-
rations, the load control function does not need to
know what is the total genset bus capacity.
If you do not want extended paralleling to start until
a specific number of gensets are online, this can be
accomplished using the genset online capacity
sensor for up to four gensets. If you want more than
four gensets to be online, the transfer time delay
(TDNE) should be set long enough to make sure
that all gensets have come online before extended
paralleling begins. Setting this type of restriction
does not affect the load control function.
Diagnostics
If the desired kW or kVAR setpoint cannot be
achieved within a set amount of time, the
MCM3320 issues a warning message.
Load Govern Enable
The MCM3320 activates a load govern enable out-
put when both sources are connected. This signal
should be wired into all of the genset’s utility break-
er position inputs. The load govern enable output is
used to put the genset controllers into the load gov-
ern mode.
MODBUS RTU INTERFACE
The ModBus RTU interface allows for easy system
monitoring by many third party devices. It provides
a standard register map of system data that can be
used for monitoring by a remote PLC.
The ModBus serial communications uses a Re-
mote Terminal Unit (RTU) two-wire master/slave
multi-drop configuration where the PLC is the mas-
ter device and the MCM3320 is the ModBus slave.
The ModBus RTU interface feature includes:
• A published register map
• Read/write access
• Operational data, control, and setup variables
• Can be configured for an RS-232 or an
RS-485 connection
• An adjustable address (default = node 1), al-
lowing multiple MCM3320 slaves on RS-485
• Communications setup and diagnostics
3-17
ModBus communication parameters (address,
baud rate, and parity) can be adjusted using the
digital display (see page 6-40).
Modbus Activity LED
The Modbus Activity LED is lit when either the con-
trol is receiving a ModBus packet or sending a
ModBus packet. It is also lit when the Protocol Tim-
er is in timer mode. This precedes a protocol switch
on the SCI1 port. Otherwise, the LED is off.
SYSTEM SCHEDULER
The system scheduler features provides up to 12
different run schedules with highly configurable
settings.
The run schedules are configurable for start day,
start time, duration, repeat interval, and run mode.
The run modes include no load, with load, or ex-
tended parallel.
The system scheduler feature provides up to 6 dif-
ferent schedule exceptions. It uses an on-board
Real Time Clock.
Adjustments to system scheduler parameters can
be done using the setup tool (see page 5-23) and
(see page 6-92). Monitoring load control functions
is also available using the digital display (see page
6-150).
Real Time Clock
The control board includes a real time clock for use
with the System Scheduler feature. The user must
set the clock on first power-up or if the control board
has been without power for an extended period of
time.
The clock keeps track of the year, month, day, date,
hour, minute, and second. The clock automatically
accounts for leap years and can be configured for
automatic Daylight Savings Time clock correction.
The clock settings will remain valid for at least 24
hours without B+ supplied to the board.
A diagnostic fault occurs if the clock needs to be set
(the system scheduler won’t run).
The clock settings can be adjusted using the setup
tool (see page 5-25) or the digital display (see page
6-90).
 PRELIMINARY
INPOWER SERVICE TOOL
The MCM3320 includes a MON RS-485 interface
which is used, along with an RS-485 to RS-232
converter kit, to communicate with a PC that has In-
Power software loaded.
This feature has standard InPower folders: Adjust-
ments, Faults, Monitor, Test. It can be used to cap-
ture files and download new firmware.
The MCM3320 is supported in InPower, starting
with software version 5.0. The MCM3320 can be
partially supported in version 4.5 with some file up-
dates required.
LOAD DEMAND
Load demand is used to match online generating
capacity to the load in order to optimize fuel use
and genset life.
Load demand can be used with up to four gensets.
Load demand can be set up to operate based upon
fixed sequence OR run hours.
This feature includes adjustable shutdown and re-
start levels as well as time delays.
Four load demand driver outputs are available to
connect to the PCC genset control’s load demand
inputs.
3-18
Use of this feature requires that the paralleling
breaker position ‘a’ contacts be connected to the
MCM3320.
Adjustments to load demand parameters can be
done using the setup tool (see page 5-14) and us-
ing the digital display (see page 6-24). Monitoring
load demand functions is also available using the
digital display (see page 6-146).
LOAD ADD AND LOAD SHED
This feature allows for adding load in steps as the
gensets come online. This feature also allows for
shedding loads to unload an overloaded genset
bus.
Use of this feature requires that an external I/O
module be installed. Your installation may include
an AUX101/AUX102 PCCNet I/O Module for feed-
er breaker control and/or an ATS control.
This feature can control up to six feeder breakers or
ATSs directly in any combination. This feature sup-
ports up to four gensets.
There are six configurable levels of load add and
load shed.
Monitoring of the breaker/ATS position is provided.
Adjustments to load add shed parameters can be
done using the setup tool (see page 5-26) and (see
page 6-26). Monitoring load add shed functions is
also available using the digital display (see page
6-148).
PRELIMINARY
4. System Operation
This section describes how the MCM3320 oper-
ates. It includes information on how it communi-
cates with and controls gensets and transfer
switches.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
An example of a normal system controlled by an
MCM3320 is one that consists of one utility source,
two diesel gensets, one transfer pair, and eight
load breakers. The feeder breakers are located on
the load bus and are normally fed by the utility
source through the utility main breaker. They are
separated from the load by a genset main breaker.
During normal operation, the gensets are in
standby mode (gensets in Auto mode and not
running) and the genset paralleling breakers are
open. The utility source is available and the utility
main breaker is closed, providing power to the
feeder breakers, which are closed. The Auto/
Manual switch on the transfer switch for the
transfer pair is set to the Auto position.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
When the switchgear is placed in Auto Mode, all
connected gensets are available to be automatical-
ly started if the utility power source fails.
Closed Transition Failure Operation
Loss of Utility Power
1. The system receives a utility failure contact
closure from the MCM3320.
2. All gensets automatically and independently
start. They accelerate to rated frequency and
build up to rated voltage.
3. The first-start system monitors the gensets
and, upon finding a genset at 90% of rated
voltage and frequency, automatically closes
the ready unit to the bus and disables all other
units from closing to the bus.
4. After the first unit closes to the bus, control of
the remaining units switches to the synchro-
nizer in each generator PowerCommand Par-
alleling Control (PCC).
4-1
5. The PCC causes the gensets to synchronize
with the system bus and then close to it at the
proper time.
6. When the minimum number of gensets are on-
line, the utility main breaker (52-UM1) opens.
7. The adjustable programmed transition time
delay (TDPT) starts.
8. When the time delay expires, the genset main
breaker (52-GM1) closes and the entire plant
is fed by generator power.
NOTE: If the utility source returns before the
TDPT expires, the utility main
(52-UM1) closes and the genset par-
alleling breakers open. The genera-
tors continue to run without load for a
cooldown period. When the time delay
engine cooldown (TDEC) has expired,
the gensets shut down and the system
returns to normal standby mode.
Return of Utility Power
1. When the utility power source returns, the util-
ity failure contact opens and the adjustable re-
transfer time delay (TDEN) starts.
NOTE: If the utility source again fails during
the TDEN, the timer resets and does
not restart until utility power again re-
turns.
2. When the TDEN expires, the master synchro-
nizer between the genset paralleling bus and
the utility is enabled to synchronize the gen-
sets to the utility.
3. When sync check conditions are met, the util-
ity main breaker (52-UM1) closes and the gen-
sets ramp down load.
4. when the power across the genset main
breaker (52-GM1) approaches zero, the gen-
set main breaker opens.
5. the genset paralleling breakers open and the
gensets operate at no load for a cooldown pe-
riod.
6. When the time delay engine cooldown (TDEC)
has expired, the gensets shut down and the
system returns to normal standby mode.
 PRELIMINARY
Closed Transition Test Mode
A Load Test can be initiated through the operator
panel.
1. When the system receives a Load Test bus 1
signal, all gensets automatically and indepen-
dently start. They accelerate to rated frequen-
cy and build up to rated voltage.
2. Since voltage exists on the load bus, control of
the units switches to the synchronizer in each
generator PowerCommand Paralleling Con-
trol (PCC).
3. The PCC causes the gensets to synchronize
with the system bus and then close to it at the
proper time.
4. When all available gensets are online, the
master synchronizer between the genset par-
alleling bus the the utility source is enabled.
5. When sync conditions on the genset main
breaker (52-GM1) are met, the breaker closes
and the gensets ramp up load.
6. When the power across the utility main break-
er (52-UM1) approaches zero, the utility main
breaker opens.
7. The gensets now supply power to the loads
connected to the load bus.
8. When the Load Test signal is removed, the
master synchronizer between the genset par-
alleling bus the the utility source is enabled to
synchronize the gensets to the utility.
9. When the sync check conditions are met, the
utility main breaker (52-UM1) closes, the gen-
sets ramp down load, and the genset main
breaker (52-GM1) opens when the load
across it approaches zero.
10. The genset paralleling breakers open and the
gensets operate at no load for a cooldown pe-
riod.
11. When the time delay engine cooldown (TDEC)
has expired, the gensets shut down.
MANUAL OPERATION
For manual operation, the Auto/Manual switch on
the switchgear with open transition must be placed
in Manual position. The gensets then can be indi-
vidually started and brought online using the gen-
set’s PowerCommand Control (PCC).
4-2
When in Manual Mode, the main breakers
(52-UM1 and 52-GM1) are controlled by a breaker
control switch located on the switchgear. The
transfer pair are electrically interlocked to prevent
closed transition operation.
OPTIONAL MODES OF OPERATION
Load Demand Operation Using a Fixed
Sequence
Load demand allows the gensets to operate closer
to their rated capacities, resulting in decreased fuel
consumption and less wear on the system. Load
demand is set up and enabled through the operator
panel menus (see page 6-24).
The load demand mode of operation includes two
time delays.
• The initial time delay is the amount of time that
the system runs with full genset capacity be-
fore monitoring the system load.
• The shutdown time delay is the amount of time
the system monitors the system load in com-
parison to the load demand settings before
shutting down the genset. The load demand
shutdown sequence determines the order in
which the gensets are shut down or restarted,
based upon system load.
NOTE: The lead unit never shuts down.
The load demand settings determine the levels at
which gensets are shut down and started. The kW
restart percent is the percent of load on the running
gensets that must be exceeded to start an addition-
al genset. The kW shutdown percentage is the per-
cent of kW capacity of the remaining gensets that
the load just be under for the next genset in the load
demand sequence to shut down.
Load Demand Operation Using Run
Hours
Load demand operation using run hours is the
same as when using a fixed sequence, but the se-
quence differs in that the user defines a run-time
threshold on the Load Demand menu included in
the Adjust series of menus (see page 6-99).
When the difference in running hours between the
gensets exceeds the threshold, the system starts
up the genset with the lower number of running
hours and shuts down the one with the highest
number of hours.
PRELIMINARY

PTC NORMAL OPERATING SEQUENCES Isolated Bus Normal Operating Sequence

The normal power transfer control operating se-
quence differs, depending on the system topology
(isolated bus, common bus, or transfer pair) and
the chosen transfer method (open transition, hard
closed transition, or soft closed transition).
Operational priorities in order from highest to low-
est are:
1. Utility Failure
2. Extended Parallel
3. Test
The Isolated Bus system topology is only used
when testing with or without load. This topology
can be used with an Open Transition type but not
with Hard Closed or Soft Closed transition types.
The normal operating sequence when using the
Isolated Bus system topology when testing with
load is shown in Table 4-1 and when testing without
load is shown in Table 4-2.

TABLE 4-1. ISOLATED BUS NORMAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION − TEST WITH LOAD
Transition Type Action Performed By
# Hard Closed Soft Closed User/ Genset
Open Transition MCM3320
Transition Transition Other Control(s)
1 A test start input is Not Applicable Not Applicable X
activated.
2 Time delay engine start X
3 Activate gensets start X
relay.
4 Gensets start, warm up, X
sync, close, etc.
5 The genset bus becomes X
available.
6 Time delay transfer X
7 Close GM X
8 The loads are powered X X
by the genset bus.
9 The test start input is X
deactivated
10 Time delay retransfer X
11 Open GM X
12 Time delay engine stop X
13 Deactivated gensets start X
relay.
14 The gensets open the X
breakers, cool down, and
stop.

4-3
 PRELIMINARY

TABLE 4-2. ISOLATED BUS NORMAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION − TEST WITHOUT LOAD
Transition Type Action Performed By
# Hard Closed Soft Closed User/ Genset
Open Transition MCM3320
Transition Transition Other Control(s)
1 A test start input is Not Applicable Not Applicable X
activated.
2 Time delay engine start X
3 Activate gensets start X
relay.
4 Gensets start, warm up, X
sync, close, etc.
5 The genset bus becomes X
available.
6 Gensets running X X
unloaded
7 The test start input is X
deactivated
8 Time delay engine stop X
9 Deactivate gensets start X
relay
10 Gensets open breakers, X
cool down, and stop.

Common Bus Normal Operating
Sequence
The Common Bus system topology is used when
there is a utility failure/return, to test with or without
load, and for extended paralleling. For utility failure/
return and testing with or without load, this topology
can be used with Open Transition and Soft Closed
Transition types but not with a Hard Closed Transi-
tion. For extended paralleling, this topology can
only be used with a soft Closed Transition.
The normal operating sequence when using the
Common Bus system topology when there is a util-
ity failure and return is shown in Table 4-3. The nor-
mal operating sequence when using the Common
Bus system topology when testing with load is
shown in Table 4-4 and when testing without load is
shown in Table 4-5. The normal operating se-
quence when using the Common Bus system to-
pology for extended paralleling is shown in Table
4-6.

4-4
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 4-3. COMMON BUS NORMAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION − UTILITY FAILURE/RETURN

Transition Type Action Performed By
# Hard Closed User/ Genset
Open Transition Soft Closed Transition MCM3320
Transition Other Control(s)
1 Utility failure is detected. Not Applicable Utility failure is detected. (X) X
2 Inhibit genset breakers Inhibit genset breakers X
ON ON
3 Time delay engine start Time delay engine start X
4 Activate Gensets start Activate Gensets start X
relay relay
5 Gensets start and run Gensets start and run X
unloaded unloaded
6 Time delay transfer Time delay transfer X
7 Open UM Open UM X
8 Time delay program Time delay program X
transition (TDPT) transition (TDPT)
9 Inhibit genset breakers Inhibit genset breakers X
OFF (“Close GM”) OFF (“Close GM”)
10 Genset breakers close Genset breakers close X
11 Loads powered by the Loads powered by the X X
genset bus genset bus
12 Utility return is detected. Utility return is detected. (X) X
13 Time delay retransfer Time delay retransfer X
14 Master synchronize X
15 Close UM X
16 Genset ramp unload X
17 Genset bus kW is less X
than threshold
18 Inhibit genset Breakers Inhibit genset Breakers X
ON (“Open GM”) ON (“Open GM”)
19 Genset breakers open Genset breakers open X
20 TDPT X
21 Confirm genset breakers X
open
22 Confirm dead bus X
23 Close UM X
24 Time delay engine stop Time delay engine stop X
25 Deactivate gensets start Deactivate gensets start X
relay. relay.

4-5
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 4-4. COMMON BUS NORMAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION − TEST WITH LOAD
Transition Type Action Performed By
# Hard Closed User/ Genset
Open Transition Soft Closed Transition MCM3320
Transition Other Control(s)
1 Test start input activated Not Applicable Test start input activated X
2 Inhibit genset breakers Inhibit genset breakers X
ON ON
3 Time delay engine start Time delay engine start X
4 Activate gensets start Activate gensets start X
relay relay
5 Gensets start and run Gensets start and run X
unloaded, synchronizing unloaded, synchronizing
6 Time delay transfer Time delay transfer X
7 Inhibit genset breakers X
OFF (“Close GM”)
8 Genset breakers close X
9 Gensets ramp load X
10 Utility kW less than X
threshold
11 Open UM Open UM X
12 Time delay program X
transition (TDPT)
13 Inhibit genset breakers X
OFF (“Close GM”)
14 Genset breakers close X
15 Loads powered by genset Loads powered by genset X X
bus bus
16 Test start input Test start input X
deactivated deactivated
17 Master load control = 0V X
18 Time delay retransfer Time delay retransfer X
19 Master synchronize X
20 Close UM X
21 Genset ramp unload X
22 Genset bus kW less than X
threshold
23 Inhibit genset breakers Inhibit genset breakers X
ON (“Open GM”) ON (“Open GM”)
24 Genset breakers open Genset breakers open X
25 TDPT X
26 Confirm genset breakers X
open
27 Confirm dead bus X
28 Close UM X
29 Time delay engine stop Time delay engine stop X
30 Deactivate gensets start Deactivate gensets start X
relay relay

4-6
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 4-5. COMMON BUS NORMAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION − TEST WITHOUT LOAD
Transition Type Action Performed By
# Hard Closed User/ Genset
Open Transition Soft Closed Transition MCM3320
Transition Other Control(s)
1 Test start input activated Not Applicable Test start input activated X
2 Inhibit genset breakers Inhibit genset breakers X
ON ON
3 Time delay engine start Time delay engine start X
4 Activate gensets start Activate gensets start X
relay relay
5 Gensets start and run Gensets start and run X
unloaded, may be unloaded, may be
synchronizing synchronizing
6 Gensets run unloaded Gensets run unloaded X
7 Test start input Test start input X
deactivated deactivated
8 Time delay engine start Time delay engine start X
9 Deactivate gensets start Deactivate gensets start X
relay relay

4-7
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 4-6. COMMON BUS NORMAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION − EXTENDED PARALLELING

Transition Type Action Performed By
# Hard Closed User/ Genset
Open Transition Soft Closed Transition MCM3320
Transition Other Control(s)
1 Not Applicable Not Applicable Extended parallel start X
input activated
2 Inhibit genset breakers ON X
3 Time delay engine start X
4 Activate gensets start relay X
5 Gensets start and run X
unloaded, synchronizing
6 Time delay transfer X
7 Inhibit genset breakers X
OFF (“Close GM”)
8 Genset breakers close X
9 Gensets ramp load X
10 Loads powered by genset X X
bus and utility bus
11 Extended parallel input X
deactivated
12 Deactivate gensets start X
relay
13 Gensets ramp load X
14 Genset bus kW less than X
threshold
15 Inhibit genset breakers ON X
(“Open GM”)
16 Genset breakers open X
17 Gensets cool down and X
stop

4-8
PRELIMINARY

Transfer Pair Normal Operating Sequence
The Transfer Pair system topology is used when
there is a utility failure/return, to test with or without
load, and for extended paralleling. For utility failure/
return and testing with or without load, this topology
can be used with Open Transition, Hard Closed
Transition, and Soft Closed Transition types. For
extended paralleling, this topology can only be
used with a Soft Closed Transition.
The normal operating sequence when using the
Transfer Pair system topology when there is a util-
ity failure and return is shown in Table 4-7. The nor-
mal operating sequence when using the Transfer
Pair system topology when testing with load is
shown in Table 4-8 and when testing without load is
shown in Table 4-9. The normal operating se-
quence when using the Transfer Pair system topol-
ogy for extended paralleling is shown in Table 4-10.

TABLE 4-7. TRANSFER PAIR NORMAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION − UTILITY FAILURE/RETURN

Transition Type Action Performed By
# Hard Closed Soft Closed User/ Genset
Open Transition MCM3320
Transition Transition Other Control(s)
1 Utility failure detected Utility failure detected Utility failure detected (X) X
2 Time delay engine Time delay engine Time delay engine X
start start start
3 Activate gensets start Activate gensets start Activate gensets start X
relay relay relay
4 Genset bus available Genset bus available Genset bus available X
5 Time delay transfer Time delay transfer Time delay transfer X
6 Open UM Open UM Open UM X
7 Time delay program Time delay program Time delay program X
transition (TDPT) transition (TDPT) transition (TDPT)
8 Close GM Close GM Close GM X
9 Loads powered by Loads powered by Loads powered by X X
genset bus genset bus genset bus
10 Utility return detected Utility return detected Utility return detected (X) X
11 Master load control = X
0V
12 Time delay retransfer Time delay retransfer Time delay retransfer X
13 Master synchronize Master synchronize X
14 Open GM X
15 TDPT X
16 Close UM Close UM Close UM X
17 Genset ramp unload X
18 Genset bus kW < X
threshold
19 < 100 msec overlap X
20 Open GM Open GM X
21 Time delay engine Time delay engine Time delay engine X
stop stop stop
22 Deactivate gensets Deactivate gensets Deactivate gensets X
start relay start relay start relay
23 Gensets open breaker, Gensets open breaker, Gensets open breaker, X
cool down, and stop cool down, and stop cool down, and stop

4-9
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 4-8. TRANSFER PAIR NORMAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION − TEST WITH LOAD
Transition Type Action Performed By
# Hard Closed Soft Closed User/ Genset
Open Transition MCM3320
Transition Transition Other Control(s)
1 Test start input Test start input Test start input X
activated activated activated
2 Master load control = X
5V
3 Time delay engine Time delay engine Time delay engine X
start start start
4 Activate gensets start Activate gensets start Activate gensets start X
relay relay relay
5 Genset bus available Genset bus available Genset bus available X
6 Time delay transfer Time delay transfer Time delay transfer X
7 Master synchronize Master synchronize X
8 Close GM Close GM X
9 Genset ramp load X
10 Utility bus kW < X
threshold
11 <100 msec overlap X
12 Open UM Open UM Open UM X
13 Time delay program X
transition (TDPT)
14 Close GM X
15 Loads powered by Loads powered by Loads powered by X X
genset bus genset bus genset bus
16 Test start input Test start input Test start input X
deactivated deactivated deactivated
17 Master load control = X
0V
18 Time delay retransfer Time delay retransfer Time delay retransfer X
19 Master synchronize Master synchronize X
20 Open GM X
21 TDPT X
22 Close UM Close UM Close UM X
23 Genset ramp unload X
24 Genset bus kW < X
threshold
25 < 100 msec overlap X
26 Open GM Open GM X
27 Time delay engine stop Time delay engine stop Time delay engine stop X
28 Deactivate gensets Deactivate gensets Deactivate gensets X
start relay start relay start relay
29 Gensets open breaker, Gensets open breaker, Gensets open breaker, X
cool down, and stop cool down, and stop cool down, and stop

4-10
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 4-9. TRANSFER PAIR NORMAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION − TEST WITHOUT LOAD
Transition Type Action Performed By
# Hard Closed Soft Closed User/ Genset
Open Transition MCM3320
Transition Transition Other Control(s)
1 Test start input Test start input Test start input X
activated activated activated
2 Time delay engine Time delay engine Time delay engine X
start start start
3 Activate gensets start Activate gensets start Activate gensets start X
relay relay relay
4 Genset bus available Genset bus available Genset bus available X
5 Gensets running Gensets running Gensets running X X
unloaded unloaded unloaded
6 Test start input Test start input Test start input X
deactivated deactivated deactivated
7 Time delay engine Time delay engine Time delay engine X
stop stop stop
8 Deactivate gensets Deactivate gensets Deactivate gensets X
start relay start relay start relay
9 Gensets open breaker, Gensets open breaker, Gensets open breaker, X
cool down, and stop cool down, and stop cool down, and stop

4-11
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 4-10. TRANSFER PAIR NORMAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION − EXTENDED PARALLELING

Transition Type Action Performed By
# Hard Closed User/ Genset
Open Transition Soft Closed Transition MCM3320
Transition Other Control(s)
1 Not Applicable Not Applicable Extended parallel start input X
activated
2 Master load control = X
setpoint
3 Time delay engine start X
4 Activate gensets start relay X
5 Genset bus available X
6 Time delay transfer X
7 Master synchronize X
8 Close GM X
9 Gensets ramp load X
10 Loads powered by genset X X
bus and utility bus
11 Extended paralleling start X
input deactivated
12 Master load control = 0V X
13 Gensets ramp unload X
14 Genset bus kW < threshold X
15 Open GM X
16 Time delay engine stop X
17 Deactivate gensets start X
relay
18 Gensets open breaker, cool X
down, and stop

4-12
PRELIMINARY

5. Setup and Calibration

INTRODUCTION
A personal computer (PC) based setup tool is pro-
vided on a CD with the module to allow basic cus-
tomer set up. This section describes setup and
configuration of the MCM3320 using the CD-based
configuration tool provided with the module. In-
Power can be used to setup, adjust, monitor, and
calibrate the MCM3320. The InPower service con-
nection from a laptop to the MCM3320 is shown in
Figure 4-1.
The MCM3320 requires an RS-232 to RS-485 data
converter and a unique cable. Figure 4-1 shows the
MCM3320 InPower connection.
Kit number 541−1199 is available for use with the
MCM3320. The kit includes the RS-232 to RS-485
converter and the cable used for this application.
The following steps should be followed for setting
up the MCM3320 using the MCM3320 setup
screen.
1. Connect to the control.
2. Select an application type and other system
parameters.
3. Set up the metering inputs to match your sys-
tem.
4. Calibrate the metering inputs, if desired.
5. Set up the circuit breakers.
6. Set up the synchronizer.

MASTER CONTROL
MODULE 3320

OPERATOR
PANEL

SERVICE
CABLE

J14
CONNECTOR
SECURITY
DONGLE

RS-232 TO RS-485
CONVERTER

FIGURE 4-1. MCM3320 PC CONNECTIONS

5-1
 PRELIMINARY

METER SETUP sary to calibrate the voltage current go the voltage

and current calibration setup tab.

To set up the MCM3320 metering first select the The following connection options are available:
wye or delta configuration for the generator and
• 4 wire direct (see Figure 4-3)
bus at the top of the screen (see the connection op-
tions below). Then enter the system nominal volt- • 4 wire with transformer (see Figure 4-4)
age for the system in Genset nominal system LL • 3 wire direct (see Figure 4-5)
voltage text box. The utility nominal voltage box will
display the same value. This is the voltage that will • 3 wire with transformer (see Figure 4-6)
equal the 100% value referred to in the genset and NOTE: When using one amp CTs, wind two turns
utility bus sensor setup screens. If an external step through the board CTs.
down potential transformer is used then click on the
enable check box in the external transformer frame MCM3320 Range of Operation
and enter the data for the transformer. In all the text Range
boxes the data can either be selected from the drop
down menu or entered in directly. Finally select 1 or Voltage (LL, rms) 0−480V Direct
5 amp for the CT secondary and CT ratio for the 600−34500V w/PT
genset and utility. When the data is entered cor- Current (rms) 5−10000 Amps with 1 or 5
rectly click the save adjustments button to perma- Amp CT
nently save the data. To verify the meter readings Power (total) −32000 to +32000 kW
click on meter data and top menu bar to display the
voltage, current and power readings. If it is neces- Power Factor (true) 0 to +/−1.0

FIGURE 4-2. GENERATOR AND UTILITY METERING SETUP

5-2
PRELIMINARY

FIGURE 4-3. 4 WIRE DIRECT CONNECTION OPTION

FIGURE 4-4. 4 WIRE WITH TRANSFORMER CONNECTION OPTION

5-3
PRELIMINARY

FIGURE 4-5. 3 WIRE DIRECT CONNECTION OPTION

FIGURE 4-6. 3 WIRE WITH TRANSFORMER CONNECTION OPTION

5-4
PRELIMINARY

SYNCHRONIZER SETUP 5. Set up the synchronizer faults.

6. Set up the synchronizer gains.

The MCM3320 matches frequency, phase and
voltage of a system of paralleled generator sets to
a utility bus. It does this by driving the kW and kVAR
load share lines to adjust the generator set fre-
quency and voltage. There are two synchronize
method options, frequency or phase which can be
selected depending on the application. The match-
ing range of the synchronizer is dependent the
genset kW and kVAR load share gains see setting
up the load share gains for synchronizing. Table
5-1 shows the typical performance of the phase
synchronizer with diesel engines. The MCM3320
LEDs display the status of the generator and utility
source availability and the status of the synchroniz-
er. The MCM3320 can operate in a master syn-
chronize only mode see
TABLE 5-1. TYPICAL SYNCHRONIZER
PERFORMANCE
Typical Performance
with Diesel Engines
Synchronize time with 1−5 Seconds
phase match
Synchronize time with 3−10 Seconds
frequency match
Phase hold Within +/− 5 degrees
Maximum number of sets 12
The following steps should be followed for proper
synchronizer setup
7. If necessary, turn the synchronizer.
Setting up the Load Share Gains for
Synchronizing
The MCM3320 drives the load share lines to syn-
chronize system frequency/phase and voltage. In
order for frequency and voltage matching to work
properly the kW and kVAR load share gains must
be set properly so all the controls respond the
same way to the voltage applied to the load share
lines. If the system genset controls are all the same
the load share gains must be set to the same val-
ues. If PCC3100 and PCC3200 are mixed in the
same system they must be set up so their gains
have the same effect. The load share gains affect
the range of operation of the frequency and voltage
matching and the synchronizer gain.
The MCM3320 default synchronizing range limits
for frequency/phase and voltage matching are
shown in Table 5-2. These limits are set so the
MCM3320 will work with the default load share gain
settings of the PCC3100 and 3200 controls.
NOTE: The PCC3100 and PCC3200 controls
have over voltage shutdowns at 110%. The
MCM3320 voltage matching range should
not be set to exceed this value.

1. Set up the load share gains.
2. Select the synchronize method.
3. Verify the conditions necessary for synchro-
nizing to occur.
4. Set up the Permissive Close (sync check) win-
dow.
If a wider range is desired the load share gains can
be increased. The kW load share gain controls the
frequency matching range and the kVAR load
share gain controls the voltage matching range.
The PCC3100 default gains will allow a +/− 2.5 Hz
frequency match range. The maximum voltage
and frequency synchronizing range are not avail-
able on the tabbed setup screen.

TABLE 5-2. SYNCHRONIZING RANGE

Synchronizer Maximum Comments
Default Range Allowable Range
Frequency +/−1 Hz +/−5 Hz Maximum range is only achievable by
changing the kW load share gain.
Voltage +/−6 % +/−9 % The default over voltage shutdown of the
genset controls is 110%.

5-5
 PRELIMINARY

TABLE 5-3. PCC3100 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SYNCHRONIZE RANGE VS LOAD SHARE GAINS

kW Load Share Maximum Frequency kVAR Load Maximum Voltage

Gain Match Range Share Gain Match Range
3 +/−1.0 Hz 150 +/−4 %
6 (default) +/−2.5 Hz 300 (default) +/−8 %
8 +/−3.5 Hz

TABLE 5-4. PCC3200 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SYNCHRONIZE RANGE VS LOAD SHARE GAINS

kW Load Share Maximum Frequency kVAR Load Maximum Voltage

Gain Match Range Share Gain Match Range
0.5 +/−0.5 Hz 0.5 +/−4 %
1.0 (default) +/−1.0 Hz 1.0 (default) +/−8 %
2.0 +/−2.5 Hz
System Setup with PCC3100 and 0326−0187 PCC Sentinel 2.03
PCC3200 Genset Controls
0326−6472 QSM 11 2.03
When operating a system with PCC3100 and 0326−6397 PGI Std. P7 2.07
PCC3200 controls the load share gains must be 0326−5853 GPS PCS 1.27
set so they have the same response to voltages on
0326−6049 PGI Sentinal 2.04
the load share lines. Recommended values are
shown in the table. The default kVAR gains are Ok 0326−6052 PGI Ventura 2 2.04
but the PCC3200 must be increased to 2.0 to 0326−6050 PGI Ventura 1 2.03
match the PCC3100.
0326−6393 Astr’l Army 2.11

Recommended kW and kVAR Gain Values Conditions Necessary for Synchronizing

Control kW Gain kVAR Gain to Occur
PCC3100 6 300 The MCM3320 will not start synchronizing unless
PCC3200 2.0 1.0 the following conditions are met:
1. The system topology is set to Master Synchro-
The following change must be made to the nize or in another topology where the software
PCC3100 control for it to match the PCC3200 has requested synchronizing occurs.
kVAR gain. The Reactive Power Scale variable
must be changed and saved using InPower from 2. Generator source is available – see generator
695 to 820. If this is done in PCC3100 software ear- and bus sensors.
lier than the versions listed in the table below the
minimum frequency synchronizing range bus must 3. Utility source is available – see generator and
be set to −1.0 Hz or less. Later versions of the soft- bus sensors.
ware do not have this limitation.
4. MCM3320 is in Auto OR it is in Manual with the
sync enable switch on.
Software P/N Description Version
0326−6047 PGI Std. 2.06 5. The fail to synchronize fault in not active or the
0326−0368 PCC Std. P7 3.01 fail to sync lockout is disabled.

0326−6046 PCC Ventura 1 2.04 6. The generator and bus have the same phase
0326−0198 PCC Ventura 2 2.03 rotation.
0326−0148 PCC Std. P7 2.06 7. The MCM3320 is not inhibited.

5-6
PRELIMINARY
Synchronizing Methods
The MCM3320 has two methods of synchronizing:
phase synchronizing and frequency synchroniz-
ing. The default method is phase synchronizing
and is suitable for most applications. This synchro-
nizes the generator bus phase to the utility.
Voltage Matching
The MCM3320 matches the average of the three
generator phases to the average to the three utility
phases. The MCM3320 matches voltage in a simi-
lar way in which it matches frequency. Voltage
matching is active in both the phase and frequency
synchronize methods. Tuning the voltage match-
ing is done in a similar way to frequency matching.
There is a proportional gain Kp and an integral gain
Ki. Voltage matching gains are generally less criti-
cal than frequency or phase matching gains and
typically do not need to be adjusted.
NOTE: If the genset voltage is increased by volt-
age matching the load on the set will in-
crease. If the voltage is raised to 6% then
the genset load will increase by 12%.
Slip Frequency Synchronizing
The slip frequency method works by governing the
generator bus frequency slightly off of the utility fre-
quency. This frequency difference is called the slip
frequency. The frequency difference produces a
constantly changing phase difference between the
two sources. If the frequencies are close enough
periodically the phase difference will be small
enough that it will meet the permissive conditions
for closing the circuit breaker. It is easier to govern
5-7
frequency than match phase so on systems that
are difficult to phase match or where you would like
to control the direction of power flow when the
breaker closes frequency synchronizing may be
desirable. Since the permissive conditions occur
periodically based on the slip frequency the slip fre-
quency method generally takes longer to synchro-
nize than the phase match method. The phase gain
has no effect when using frequency synchronize
method and when phase synchronizing is selected
the slip frequency has no effect. The following table
shows the recommended slip frequency settings.
The recommended slip frequency setting = phase
window / (360 * Time in window). By using the set-
tings in the table the phase difference at the end of
permissive time window (when the breaker is al-
lowed to close) will be 0 degrees. (For example at
0.1 Hz slip it takes 0.5 seconds for the phase to
change 20°, the phase difference would be in a +/−
20° window for 0.5 seconds.)
Recommended Slip Frequency Settings
Recom- Time in Seconds
mended between When
Permissive
Slip Permissive
Window
Frequency Window Condi-
in Hz tions are Met
20_ 0.5 Sec- 0.1 10
onds
10_ 0.5 Sec- 0.05 20
onds
The graph shown in Figure 4-7 the result of fre-
quency synchronizing with a slip frequency of 0.1
Hz. The phase difference ramps from −180° to
180°and the permissive conditions are met every
10 seconds
 PRELIMINARY

FIGURE 4-7. SLIP FREQUENCY EXAMPLE

Setup the Synchronizer Gains NOTE: The stability of the synchronizing improves
as more sets are paralleled. Gas sets are
The synchronizer gains can be set using the values much more stable with load.
in Table 7 Typical synchronizer gain settings based
on the control and engine. These gain values apply
if with the genset controls set to their default load Synchronizer Tuning
share gains. If the load share gains are changed
the frequency gain Kp will need to change. Gener- The synchronizer consists of a proportional inte-
ally the voltage matching gains can be set the gral controller for frequency matching with an input
same for all gensets and can be left at their de- for phase difference matching. When the frequen-
faults. The frequency matching gains will vary de- cy synchronize method is used the phase differ-
pending on the control and engine. For diesel en- ence input is ignored. The frequency matching
gines with PCC3100 and PCC3200 controls the control has two adjustable gains. A proportional
frequency match gains should be set to the stan- gain Kp and an integral gain Ki. Phase matching
dard values listed in the table. If it is necessary to has one proportional gain Kp. The voltage match-
optimize performance or the genset is not one ing control is similar to the frequency control with
listed in the table (Table 5-5), it will be necessary to two adjustable gains. Normally it is only necessary
go through the synchronizing tuning procedure. to adjust the proportional gains.
TABLE 5-5. TYPICAL SYNCHRONIZER GAIN SETTINGS
Control/Set Frequency Frequency Phase Kp Voltage Kp Voltage Ki
Kp Ki
Default Gains 30 20 160 400 50
PCC3200 − Standard 50 20 160 400 50
PCC3100 − Standard 50 20 160 400 50
PCC3100 − QSM11 25 20 160 400 50
PCC3100 − 1250 Gas 9 20 160 400 50

5-8
PRELIMINARY

Permissive Close (Sync Check) The board LEDs display the status of the sync
check.
The following trims are available for the permissive
window: NOTE: The permissive close is removed when
phase difference is greater than 20 de-
TABLE 5-6. PERMISSIVE WINDOW SETTINGS grees or voltage difference is greater than
5%.
Trim Default
Voltage Window 5% Synchronizer Faults
Phase Window 10 Degrees Fail to Synchronize Warning
Time Window 0.5 Seconds
If the permissive conditions are not met in the time
Frequency Window 1.0 Hz specified the fail to synchronize warning is acti-
vated. If the fail to synchronize lockout is disabled
The follow conditions must be met for a permissive synchronizing will continue while the fault is active.
close is allowed: If it is enabled synchronizing will cease when the
fault occurs. If a fail to sync fault occurs and the
1. Utility source is available lockout is enabled the fault must be reset before
normal operation can occur.
2. Generator source is available
If the fail to sync open transition retransfer is en-
3. Utility and generator phase rotation are the abled an open transition transfer will occur when
same the fail to synchronize fault is activated.

4. The highest difference of all the generator
phase voltages minus the utility phases is less
than the voltage window
5. Phase difference is less than 20 degrees and
decreasing or less then 10 degrees and phase
difference is less than the phase window
6. The frequency difference between the
sources is less than the frequency window
7. Permissive conditions are met for the time win-
dow
8. The MCM3320 is not inhibited.
Synchronizer Phase Rotation Warning
If the phase rotation of the Utility bus does not
match the phase rotation of the generator bus this
fault is activated. Synchronizing will continue while
this fault is active but the permissive conditions will
not be met. The system phase rotation can be set in
the either the generator or utility bus menu.
Synchronizer Output Limit Warning
If the MCM3320 drive on the load share lines has
reached its maximum this fault is activated. This
occurs if the MCM3320 is trying to match voltage or
frequency and cannot reach the desired level. Syn-
chronizing will stop if this fault occurs.

5-9
PRELIMINARY

FIGURE 4-8. USING THE MASTER SYNC ONLY FEATURE TO COMMUNICATE WITH POWERCOMMAND
CONTROLS

5-10
PRELIMINARY

VOLTAGE AND CURRENT CALIBRATION
The MCM3320 is calibrated at the factory and nor-
mally does not require calibration in the field. If it is
necessary to have the MCM3320 metering match
another metering instrument a provision is pro-
vided for calibration of the voltage and current. The
setup program allows for an automatic calibration
of the MCM3320 through the voltage/current cal-
ibration screen (see Figure 4-9). The shaded
blocks display the voltage and current readings of
the MCM3320. Below each of the shaded boxes is
a box labeled Your meter. This is where you enter
the reading from an external meter that you would
like the MCM3320 to match. When you click on the
perform auto calibration button the setup pro-
gram will match the MCM3320 reading to the value
entered in the Your meter box. The scroll bars to
the right of the meter boxes allow an option to
manually calibrate the voltages and current.
NOTE: The voltage and current cannot be cali-
brated while the MCM3320 is synchroniz-
ing.

FIGURE 4-9. VOLTAGE AND CURRENT CALIBRATION SCREEN

5-11
 PRELIMINARY
CIRCUIT BREAKER SETUP
The following setup options are available for the
circuit breaker.
Circuit Breaker Fail to Disconnect
Fail to Disconnect logic applies to cases where the
genset and utility sources are paralleled. If one of
the breakers fails to open when commanded to do
so, the fail to disconnect logic will then try to open
the other breaker. If it succeeds, the action is com-
plete and this state is latched until the user resets
the fail to open fault. However, if upon attempting
to open the second breaker, it too fails to open, then
the MCM3320 flags the fail to disconnect fault and
activates the breaker inhibit line to the individual
genset controls in a last attempt to disconnect. In
addition, the Fail to Disconnect fault can be
mapped to one of the 8 configurable outputs which
can in turn be used to externally trip a breaker. This
entire logic function can be optionally disabled.
Positions Contacts
This option is available for using dual or single posi-
tion contacts to detect the breaker position. Dual
FIGURE 4-10. CIRCUIT BREAKER SETUP SCREEN
5-12
contacts should be selected if you have both the a
and b circuit breaker auxiliary contacts connected
to the MCM3320. When Dual is selected the
MCM3320 checks the position of both contacts to
verify the breaker position. If single is selected then
only one contact is used to detect the breaker posi-
tion.
Recharge Delay
Sets the time to allow the circuit breaker to re-
charge.
Fail to Fault Close Delay
Sets the maximum time after a circuit breaker close
is requested that the circuit breaker close position
should be sensed. After that time a fail to close fault
will occur. This fault causes a lockout and must be
reset before normal operation can occur.
Fail to Open Fault Delay
Sets the maximum time after a circuit breaker open
is requested that the circuit breaker open position
should be sensed. After that time a fail to open fault
will occur. This fault causes a lockout and must be
reset before normal operation can occur.
PRELIMINARY
GENSET AND UTILITY VOLTAGE AND
FREQUENCY SENSOR SETUP
The generator and utility bus sensors determine if
the bus voltages and frequencies are in an accept-
able operating range. When they are in this range
the source is considerable available. The text
boxes with the white background are used to enter
the desired range. The shaded boxes display the
voltage or frequency those values correspond to.
Undervoltage Sensor
At a minimum, source availability is determined by
the undervoltage sensor. The sensor will drop out
when the voltage falls below the drop−out thresh-
old, and pick up when the voltage rises above the
pick−up threshold setting. The time delay is for the
drop out time. Pick up is immediate.
Overvoltage Sensor
If enabled, this sensor will drop out when voltage
exceeds the drop out threshold and pick up when
FIGURE 4-11. GENERATOR BUS SENSOR SCREEN
5-13
voltage falls below the pick up threshold. The time
delay is for the drop out time. Pick up is immediate.
Frequency Sensor
If enabled, this sensor will drop out when the fre-
quency goes beyond drop out thresholds, and pick
up when frequency falls within the pick up thresh-
olds. The time delay is for the drop out time. Pick
up is immediate.
Phase Rotation Sensor
If enabled, this sensor will drop out if the phase
rotation of the source does not match the phase
rotation setting.
Loss of Phase Sensor
If enabled, this sensor will detect if the line−line
voltages are more than 30 degrees away from 120
degrees. The time delay is for the drop out time.
Pick up is immediate.
 PRELIMINARY
Genset and Utility Bus Sensors Settings
for Synchronizer Applications
The synchronizer function requires both sources to
be considered as “available” in order to be able to
turn on synchronizing. A source is available when
all enabled sensors are picked up. The undervol-
tage sensor is always enabled. Other sensors may
be enabled as desired.
Auto / Manual Synchronizer Operation
When the Auto / Manual input is open circuit, the
synchronizer is in automatic. It will start synchro-
nizing whenever both sources are “available.”
When the Auto / Manual input is grounded, the syn-
chronizer is in Manual mode. It will start synchro-
nizing when both sources are “available” and the
Sync Enable input is grounded. It will not synchro-
nize when Sync Enable is open circuit.
Genset Sensor Operation During
Synchronizing
When the synchronizer is running, the pickup and
dropout thresholds for undervoltage, overvoltage,
and frequency sensors for the genset bus are tem-
porarily expanded in order to allow the synchroniz-
er to change the bus voltage and frequency without
dropping out a sensor. When the synchronizer is
running these temporary expanded voltage thresh-
olds are displayed in red on the genset sensor tab.
LOAD DEMAND
The load demand function is used to match gener-
ation capacity to load so as to optimize fuel efficien-
cy, extended service intervals, and prolong genset
life. It works with up to 4 gensets. To shutdown ex-
cess capacity, the function monitors the total
amount of load and compares it to what the capac-
ity would be if one genset were removed from the
online gensets. If the load is less than 60% of this
capacity (typical setting), then that genset will be
stopped on load demand. (During a load demand
stop of a genset, the individual genset controller
will ramp down that genset’s load, open its breaker,
cool down, and stop. The load ramp gives a
5-14
smooth transition, avoiding unnecessary voltage
and frequency transients.) To restart a genset
which has been stopped, total load is compared to
the online capacity. When load reaches 80% of the
online capacity (typical setting), the genset will be
restarted. (During a restart, the individual genset
controller will start the genset, synchronize, close,
and ramp on the load for a smooth transition.)
Deciding which genset to shut down next can be
done in one of two ways. The first is with a fixed
preset sequence. The second is based on genset
online hours. The online hours based method will
attempt to equalize run hours on each genset, re-
starting one and shutting down another when the
hours differential cross a threshold.
Some fundamental rules for load demand control:
• Load demand only works if the total number of
gensets is 2, 3, or 4. Ratings must only appear
in Gen1 thru Gen4 and all other rating settings
must be 0.
• For the load demand function to turn on, the
load demand function must be enabled, the
genset bus available, and the genset main
breaker closed (or one or more genset paral-
leling breakers closed in case of Common Bus
topology).
• Load Demand control ends and all gensets
are restarted if a Genset Bus Overload fault
occurs. This condition can only be reset
through user intervention. User must activate
the fault reset and the overload condition must
no longer exist. Then the load demand func-
tion will turn back on if all of the turn on condi-
tions are met.
• A genset is considered as part of the load de-
mand online capacity either if its breaker is
closed or if it has been restarted and is waiting
for the breaker to close. If the breaker does not
close in a fixed amount of time, the genset is
then considered as failed and will be removed
from the load demand capacity.
• If a genset does not exist (its kW rating = 0), its
load demand command will be in the Run
state.
PRELIMINARY
FIGURE 4-12. LOAD DEMAND SCREEN
MASTER LOAD CONTROL
The master load control function has the following
primary duties:
• Control real and reactive power in extended
paralleling operation (base load / peak shave)
• Cause ramp loading and unloading to occur
during soft closed transition load transfers
• Operate independently of the number of gen-
sets that are online
• Provide diagnostics in extended paralleling if
the desired setpoint(s) cannot be achieved
The master load control function ultimately drives
two hardware analog outputs, one for kW control
and one for kVAR control. The kW control output is
to be connected to all of the kW load set inputs on
the gensets to be controlled (= one output con-
nected to multiple inputs). The kVAR control output
is to be connected to all of the kVAR load set inputs
on the gensets to be controlled (= one output con-
nect to multiple inputs). Note that the PCC3100
5-15
model of genset controller does not have a kVAR
load set input.
Extended Paralleling
Extended paralleling as used here is meant to refer
to intentional continued operation in parallel with a
utility source for the purposes of base load and/or
peak shave operation. During extended paralleling
operation, the kW and kVAR of the gensets must be
controlled. They can be controlled in a number of
ways. Table 5-7 (Base Load / Peak Shave Configu-
ration Options) lists the possible ways in which they
can be controlled with this controller. Note that the
kW control type and the kVAR control type can be
set independent of one another. For example, the
kW could controlled at the genset bus (aka Base
Load), while the kVAR could be controlled at the
utility bus (aka Peak Shave). This scenario would
be used for applications where while base loading
the gensets, it is desirable to manage the utility
kVAR to avoid penalties from the utility for a low
power factor. In any of these scenarios, the gen-
sets which are online will be limited to what they are
capable of putting out, so it may not always be pos-
 PRELIMINARY
sible to achieve a desired setpoint. The configura-
tions listed in the table also allow for open loop or
closed loop base load operation. (Peak shave al-
ways requires closed loop.) In some cases open
loop operation may be desirable due to stability is-
sues with closed loop, or just a requirement for
each genset that is online to put out a fixed % of its
capability.
Load Ramping
During soft closed transition load transfers, ramp-
ing of the load is done by the individual genset con-
trollers themselves. Thus the desired ramp rates
must be set in the genset controllers. The ramping
direction is controlled by this controller by either
setting the control output value to give +5V (ramp
load), or 0V (ramp unload) on the analog output.
Upon entry into an extended parallel state, the
ramping on of the load is controlled by this control-
ler. (This is required because the load control algo-
rithm in this controller operates without knowledge
of the number of gensets online. It could allow the
gensets to ramp on their own, but when the control
point was reached it would not know where to start
the control output at, resulting in an undesirable
transient.) At the end of an extended parallel ses-
sion, the ramp unloading is done by the individual
genset controllers themselves.
If an individual genset should come online when
extended paralleling is already underway, it will
ramp toward whatever the current setpoint is. If
this controller is operating closed loop, it will ac-
5-16
cordingly begin to adjust its output command to
compensate as this new genset comes into the
group. Same is true if an individual genset is told to
ramp unload. In order to insure that this operates
smoothly, the ramp load and ramp unload times in
the genset controllers should not be set to time val-
ues less than 60 seconds if at all possible.
Number of Gensets
The master load control function does not require
knowledge of how many gensets are online. This
provides the advantage of being able to do up to 12
gensets without needing all of the additional I/O. In
closed loop mode, the load control function will just
drive the control output to attempt to achieve the
setpoint target with whatever gensets are out
there. It is important that the individual genset kW
ratings be entered into this controller because in
some configurations, this load control function
does need to know what the total genset bus ca-
pacity is. Though it is not required by this load con-
trol algorithm, if for some reason it is important that
extended paralleling not start until a certain num-
ber of gensets are online, this can be accomplished
with the Genset Online Capacity Sensor for up to 4
gensets. Beyond 4 gensets, the Transfer Time
Delay (TDNE) should be set long enough to insure
that all available gensets have come online.
Diagnostics
If the desired kW setpoint cannot be achieved with-
in a certain amount of time, a diagnostic warning
will be generated. Same for the kVAR setpoint.
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 5-7. BASE LOAD / PEAK SHAVE CONFIGURATION OPTIONS

Parameter Setting Genset Controller Description
Capability
3100 3200 3300
3201
REAL POWER CONTROL OPTIONS
Extended Paralleling kW Load Control Type =
Genset Bus % Level X X X MCM3320 puts out a user adjustable % level on the kW
(Open Loop) control output. Genset bus kW will be a result of whatever
[DEFAULT SETTING] gensets are online. (Thus it is open loop on the kW at the
GM.)
Genset Bus kW (Closed X X X MCM3320 drives the kW control output to achieve the de-
Loop) sired kW setpoint at the GM. If the setpoint cannot be
achieved within a preset time, a warning fault will occur.
Genset Bus kW Utility X X X MCM3320 drives the kW control output to achieve the de-
Constraint (Closed Loop) sired kW setpoint at the GM, but will reduce this setpoint to
keep the kW at the UM above a programmed level. (This
can be used to prevent tripping a UM reverse power relay
because of load falling below the GM kW setpoint. Coor-
dination of the settings in this controller and the relay and
an understanding of the magnitude of load fluctuations is
critical to successful use of this feature.)
Utility Bus kW (Closed X X X MCM3320 drives the kW control output to achieve the de-
Loop) sired kW setpoint at the UM. If the setpoint cannot be
achieved within a preset time, a warning fault will occur.
REACTIVE POWER CONTROL OPTIONS
Extended Paralleling kVAR Load Control Type =
Genset Controllers X X X MCM3320 does nothing. kVAR control output = 0. Genset
[DEFAULT SETTING] controllers take care of the kVAR control based on their
own settings...e.g. fixed power factor of 0.95.
Genset Bus % Level (Open X X MCM3320 puts out a user adjustable % level on the kVAR
Loop) control output. Genset bus kVAR will be a result of whatev-
er genset happen to be online.
Genset Bus Power Factor X X MCM3320 puts out a level on the kVAR control output
(Open Loop) based on what is being currently put out on the kW control
output. The relationship between the two is determined by
the PF setting.
Genset Bus kVAR (Closed X X MCM3320 drives the kVAR control output to achieve the
Loop) desired kVAR setpoint at the GM. If the setpoint cannot be
achieved within a preset time, a warning fault will occur.
Genset Bus Power Factor X X MCM3320 drives the kVAR control output to achieve the
(Closed Loop) desired PF setpoint at the GM. If the setpoint cannot be
achieved within a preset time, a warning fault will occur.
Utility Bus kVAR (Closed X X MCM3320 drives the kVAR control output to achieve the
Loop) desired kVAR setpoint at the UM. If the setpoint cannot be
achieved within a preset time, a warning fault will occur.
Utility Bus Power Factor X X MCM3320 drives the kVAR control output to achieve the
(Closed Loop) desired PF setpoint at the UM. If the setpoint cannot be
achieved within a preset time, a warning fault will occur.

5-17
PRELIMINARY

FIGURE 4-13. KW BASE LOAD/PEAK SHAVE SCREEN

FIGURE 4-14. KVAR BASE LOAD/PEAK SHAVE SCREEN

5-18
PRELIMINARY

SYSTEM SETUP often if ever. System Topology may only be set

Configuration of the system application consists of
setting four variables. The primary setting is the
System Topology. This defines the breaker con-
figuration and is not expected to be changed very
when the System State is in Manual or Factory
Test. The remaining variables are Transition
Type, Extended Parallel Enable, and Test With
Load Enable. See Table 5-8 for details on the vari-
ables.

TABLE 5-8. APPLICATION CONFIGURATION VARIABLES

Application Possible Values Description
Configuration Variable
System Topology Master Synchronize Control only does AC metering and synchronizing
Only
Isolated Bus without Control will support an isolated bus topology with no genset
GM main breaker.
Isolated Bus w/GM Control will support an isolated bus topology with a genset
main breaker.
Common Bus Control supports a utility parallel system with no genset main
breaker, only a utility main breaker.
Transfer Pair Control supports a utility parallel system with both genset and
utility main breakers.
Transition Type Open Transition Control performs open transition transfers and retransfers with
a programmed transition delay.
Hard Closed Transi- Control performs a hard transition parallel with <100msec of
tion overlap.
Soft Closed Transi- Control performs a soft transition with load ramping for both
tion transfers and retransfers between live sources.
Extended Parallel Enable Disabled Extended paralleling is disabled.
Enabled Extended paralleling is enabled.
Test With Load Enable Disabled When test is activated, test will be without load.
Enabled When test is activated, test will be with load.

5-19
PRELIMINARY

FIGURE 4-15. SYSTEM SETUP SCREEN (1 OF 2)

FIGURE 4-16. SYSTEM SETUP SCREEN (2 OF 2)

5-20
PRELIMINARY

FIRST START SENSOR

LOAD SHARE LINES

PCC PCC PCC

G G G

3 3 3
3 3 3
UTILITY

FAILED XXX XXX XXX

25
PMT 3 3 3 3
3 3
3

XXX XXX

LOADS

FIGURE 4-17. TRANSFER PAIR

FIRST START SENSOR

LOAD SHARE LINES

PCC PCC PCC

G G G

3 3 3
3 3 3
UTILITY

FAILED XXX XXX XXX

25
PMT 3 3 3 3
3 3
3

XXX

LOADS

FIGURE 4-18. COMMON BUS

5-21
PRELIMINARY

FIRST START SENSOR

LOAD SHARE LINES

PCC PCC PCC

G G G

3 3 3
3 3 3

XXX XXX XXX

25
PMT 3 3 3 3
3

XXX

LOADS

FIGURE 4-19. TRANSFER PAIR WITH GM

5-22
PRELIMINARY
SCHEDULER
The scheduler (see Figure 4-20) operates based
on up to 12 programs and 6 exceptions.
Each program specifies a day of the week/time to
start, how long to run, how often to repeat, and
what mode to run in.
Run modes are: test without load, test with load,
and extended parallel.
Each exception is defined by a start date/time,
duration, and repeat interval.
An exception will block a scheduled program from
starting during the exception period.
Scheduler will not run if real time clock has not
been set.
FIGURE 4-20. SCHEDULER SCREEN
5-23
Program Overlapping
Do not overlap programs; overlapped program will
be ignored (see Figure 4-21).
Exception Operation
The timing of an exception will determine whether
or not a program will run (see Figure 4-22).
Priorities
A Utility Failure will supersede any scheduler pro-
gram.
An active program will resume when the utility
source has become available again
Two examples are shown in Figure 4-23.
PRELIMINARY

Example 1: This illustrates an example that must be avoided.

Program 1
Program 1 runs for its entire duration.
Program 2 Program 2 does not run.

Example 2: This illustrates an acceptable example of two programs with a break between them.
Program 1 Program 2 Program 1 runs and ends. Some time
later, Program 2 runs and ends.
Example 2: This illustrates an acceptable example of two programs without a break between them.
Program 1 Program 2 Program 1 runs and ends. Program 2
starts immediately after Program 1 ends.

FIGURE 4-21. PROGRAM EXAMPLES

Example 1: This illustrates when the program will not run because of when the exception is set up.
Program 1
Program 1 does not run.
Exception 1

Example 2: This illustrates when a program will run even though the exception is scheduled during
the program.
Program 1
Program 1 runs and ends. Some time
Exception 1 later, Program 2 runs and ends.

FIGURE 4-22. PROGRAM EXCEPTION EXAMPLES

Example 1: The utility fails while the gensets are running

Program 1 (No Load) with no load due to Program 1. The system
transfers the load to the gensets. When the
Utility utility returns, the system retransfers the
loads to the utility. The gensets then contin-
ue to run until Program 1 ends.
Example 2: The utility fails while the gensets are run-
Program 1 (Extended Parallel) ning in parallel to the utility due to Program
1. The system OPENS the utility main
Utility breaker. When the utility returns, the sys-
tem syncs across the utility main, CLOSES
the utility main, and continues in parallel
until Program 1 ends.

FIGURE 4-23. EXAMPLES OF PRIORITIES

5-24
PRELIMINARY

REAL TIME CLOCK hours without B+ power

• Fault will indicate when clock needs to be set
• Scheduler will not run if real time clock is not • Real Time Clock handles leap year automati-
set cally
• Clock will retain correct time for at least 24 • Daylight Savings Time is fully configurable

FIGURE 4-24. REAL TIME CLOCK SCREEN

5-25
 PRELIMINARY

LOAD ADD / LOAD SHED
Load Add Shed Control manages the load control
devices to maintain proper genset loading while
managing genset overload conditions. The load
control devices can be automatic transfer switches
equipped with load add shed option or electrically
operated circuit breakers. This function provides
six Form C outputs for controlling the adding of
loads and six Form C contacts for controlling the
shedding of loads. These Form C contacts are
physically located on the SID and Expansion
Board.

FIGURE 4-25. LOAD ADD / LOAD SHED DIALOG

5-26
PRELIMINARY
6. Operator Panel Operation
DISPLAY
SCREEN
OPERATOR MENU
SELECTION BUTTONS
FIGURE 6-1. MCM3320 OPERATOR PANEL
This section describes the operator panel and the
menu system available through the digital display.
The menus display status information, events, and
setup menus. The setup menus include parame-
ters that can be adjusted if the appropriate pass-
word is entered.
OPERATOR PANEL
All indicators, control buttons, and the digital dis-
play are located on the face of the optional control
panel. Figure 6-1 shows the features of the front
panel. It includes the graphical digital display, six
LED indicators, and six buttons used to navigate
through the menus and adjust settings.
Digital Display
The digital display is used to select the appropriate
information screen for your system topology and to
view system status information (see page 6-4).
6-1
LED
INDICATORS
INFORMATION
SCREEN
BUTTON
PREVIOUS MENU
BUTTON
The digital display is also used to view the menus
available in the menu-driven operating system
and, when appropriate, adjust settings. The bottom
of the graphical display indicates the functions that
are available by pressing the four selection but-
tons. Refer to the menu trees later in this section.
System messages (communication and fault) are
shown on the digital display. For more information,
see page 6-4.
Utility Parallel Indicator
This green lamp indicates that both sources of
power (utility and generator) are connected in ex-
tended parallel or are in the middle of a soft transi-
tion.
Lockout Indicator
This red lamp indicates that a shutdown fault has
occurred and that the MCM3320 can take no fur-
 PRELIMINARY
ther action until the fault condition has been cor-
rected.
The Lockout LED is lit whenever one of the follow-
ing faults occur.
• The utility breaker fails to close.
• The utility breaker fails to open.
• There is a utility breaker position contact fault.
• The genset breaker fails to close.
• The genset breaker fails to open.
• There is a genset breaker position contact
fault.
• There is a failure to synchronize when the Fail
to Sync feature is enabled.
• There is a maximum parallel time fault.
• There is a genset bus overload fault when ei-
ther the Load Demand or the Load Add Shed
feature is enabled.
Warning Indicator
This amber lamp indicates that a warning fault has
occurred that has not yet been acknowledged.
Remote Start Indicator
This green lamp indicates that a remote start com-
mand has been sent from the MCM3320 to the
gensets.
6-2
Auto Indicator
This green lamp indicates that the system is in Auto
Mode.
Manual Indicator
This amber lamp indicates that the system is in
Manual Mode. Manual Mode is for emergency
breaker operation only. When in Manual Mode,
synchronization is not permitted.
Operator Control Buttons
Four momentary (soft-key) buttons are used to
step through the various menu options and to ad-
just generator set parameters. These selection
buttons are “active” when a word or symbol in the
digital display is displayed above the button. Some
submenus do not include any active buttons. The
function of the four selection buttons varies with
each menu.
Two additional buttons are used to return to the In-
formation screen or to return to the previous menu.
The operator control buttons are described in Table
6-1.
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 6-1. OPERATOR CONTROL NAVIGATION BUTTONS

Symbol Function
Navigate to the previous menu (see Note 1)
Navigate to the next menu (see Note 1)
MENU Return to the Home screen
Navigate to the previous main menu (see Note 2)
Navigate to the Information screen (see Note 2)
SAVE Saves changes made to the current menu
ADJUST Navigate to an menu where values/parameters can be changed. When the ADJUST
button is pressed, the first adjustable parameter or value in the submenu is highlighted.
CTRL Navigate to the associated Control menu
Navigate to an editable field within a menu
− Decrease a parameter or value shown on the screen
+ Increase a parameter or value shown on the screen
VIEW Navigate to the associated viewing menus
RESET Clears all faults
BACK Navigate to associated viewing menu
CAP Navigate to the Capacity Information screen
ADD Add load levels manually
SHED Shed load levels manually
REST Restore shed load levels manually
START Starts an operation on the screen
STOP Stops an operation on the screen
When this black box is displayed, the navigation button has no function.
Some menus include a list of numbered subjects. These menus include numbers in parenthesis (for
example, (1)) displayed above the selection buttons. The selection buttons are then used to display
submenus of the subjects included in the list.
Note 1: Only the symbol is displayed in the first submenu of the series and only the symbol is
displayed in the last submenu of the series. Both symbols are displayed in the rest of the
submenus.
Note 2: If you have made changes to the settings within a menu and this button is pressed before
the SAVE button is pressed, the changes will not be saved.

6-3
 PRELIMINARY
OPERATOR PANEL SYSTEM MESSAGES
A system pop-up message is displayed when the
event it is displaying becomes active. These pop-
up messages remain displayed until pre-empted
by another pop-up message or until the or the
display buttons is pressed or the event has ex-
pired. Once the or the button is pressed, the
previous screen is redisplayed.
Communication Messages
System messages are displayed for initial power-
up or when there is a subsequent loss of commu-
nications. Auto and Manual Run modes can also
be selected when communication messages are
displayed (for more information, see page ).
Upon initial power-up, the message “Establishing
communication with control” is displayed (see Fig-
ure 6-2). This menu also displays the screen’s soft-
ware number and version.
FIGURE 6-2. ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATIONS
MESSAGE
When the display detects that it is no longer com-
municating with the control, the Shutdown, Warn-
ing, and Remote Start LEDs are turned off.
If communications are lost, the message “Re-es-
tablishing communication with control” is displayed
until communications have been re-established
(see Figure 6-3). The LEDs then return to the state
determined by the control.
FIGURE 6-3. RE-ESTABLISHING
COMMUNICATIONS MESSAGE
6-4
If either communication message remains dis-
played (cannot view other menus), this is an in-
dication that communications between the op-
erator panel and the control logic is lost. Con-
tact an authorized service center for service.
Fault Messages
A Fault message is an indicator of a Warning or
Shutdown condition that is also announced with a
lamp indicator. Text fault messages include the
fault code number and a short description.
FIGURE 6-4. FAULT MESSAGE
INFORMATION SCREENS
The MCM3320 includes an information screen that
shows the current system status and any timer that
is currently running. This screen is displayed when-
ever the button is pressed.
Screen Operation
Under normal conditions, the information (home)
screen shows the system in standby mode. This
screen provides information in a one-line format
relevant to the current system operating state, in-
cluding source availability, source connected sta-
tus, voltage, frequency, and power data.
Two soft-key buttons are available when the infor-
mation screen is displayed. The Menu button al-
lows you to access the MCM3320 menu system
(see page 6-8). The Reset button allows you to re-
set any active faults.
System Topology
The information that is displayed is dependant
upon the system topology. The system topology is
the primary setting and must be set before making
any other adjustments. It defines the breaker con-
figuration and is not expected to be changed very
often, if ever.
The system topology can only be set when the
Auto / Manual switch is in the Manual position.
PRELIMINARY
The system topology can be changed if your instal-
lation includes a second keypad display. Once the
display knows what is the current system topology,
the Adjust System submenu can be used to
change it (see Figure 6-47). InPower can also be
used to change the system topology.
The system topology can be set to:
• Master Synchronizer Only (default setting)
• Isolated Bus with GM
• Isolated Bus Without GM
• Common Bus
• Transfer Pair
Master Synchronizer Only System
Topology
If the system topology is set for Master Synchroniz-
er Only, the Information screen shown in Figure 6-5
is displayed. This screen includes the following:
• The top line displays the system state.
• The symbol shows the Utility Availability
Status. A “1” below this symbol indicates that
utility power is available and a “0” indicates
utility power is not available.
• The symbol shows the Sync Status. A “1”
below this symbol indicates that synchroniza-
tion is on and a “0” indicates synchronization
is not on.
• The symbol shows the Genset Availability
Status. A “1” below this symbol indicates that
genset power is available and a “0” indicates
genset power is not available.
• Pressing the Menu button takes you to the
main menu.
• Pressing the Reset button clears the current
fault.
FIGURE 6-5. INFORMATION SCREEN FOR
MASTER SYNCHRONIZER ONLY
6-5
Isolated Bus With or Without GM System
Topology
If the system topology is set for either Isolated Bus
W/O GM or Isolated Bus W/GM, the Information
screen shown in Figure 6-6 is displayed. This
screen includes the following:
• The top line displays the system state.
• The generator circuit breaker position status:
If the symbol is down, the circuit breaker is
closed. If the symbol is up, the circuit breaker
is open.
• The symbol shows the Genset Availability
Status. A “1” below this symbol indicates that
generator power is available and a “0” indi-
cates that it is not available.
• If the Genset Available Status is available and
the generator circuit breaker is closed, then
the L-L average VAC is displayed. Otherwise
no VAC value is displayed.
• If a VAC value is displayed, then the AC Meter
System Total kW is also displayed.
• Pressing the Menu button takes you to the
main menu.
• Pressing the Reset button clears the current
fault.
FIGURE 6-6. INFORMATION SCREEN FOR
ISOLATED BUS WITH OR WITHOUT GM
Common Bus or Transfer Pair System
Topology
If the system topology is set for either Common Bus
or Transfer Pair, one of four different Information
screens can be displayed, depending on how the
Home screen parameter is set. This parameter can
be set to:
• Default
• No Source or Synchronizer
• Timers
• Parallel
 PRELIMINARY
Default Home Screen
If the Home screen is set to Default, the screen
shown in Figure 6-7 is displayed. This screen in-
cludes the following:
• The top line displays the system state.
• The symbol shows the Utility Availability
Status. A “1” above this symbol indicates that
utility power is available and a “0” indicates
utility power is not available.
• The Generator circuit breaker position status:
If the symbol is down, the circuit breaker is
closed. If the symbol is up, the circuit breaker
is open.
• The Utility circuit breaker position status: If the
symbol is down, the circuit breaker is
closed. If the symbol is up, the circuit breaker
is open.
• The symbol shows the Genset Availability
Status. A “1” above this symbol indicates that
genset power is available and a “0” indicates
genset power is not available.
• If the Utility Available Status is available and
the utility circuit breaker is closed, then the L-L
average voltage and the utility frequency is
displayed. Otherwise no voltage value or utility
frequency is displayed.
• If the Genset Available Status is available and
the generator circuit breaker is closed, then
the L-L average voltage and the genset fre-
quency is displayed. Otherwise no voltage val-
ue or genset frequency is displayed.
• If the average voltage is displayed, then the
AC Meter System Total kW and the System To-
tal PF values are also displayed.
• Pressing the Menu button takes you to the
main menu.
• Pressing the Reset button resets the control
after a fault condition is acknowledged.
FIGURE 6-7. DEFAULT HOME INFORMATION
SCREEN FOR COMMON BUS OR TRANSFER PAIR
6-6
No Source or Synchronizer Home Screen
If the Home screen is set to No Source or Synchro-
nizer, the screen shown in Figure 6-8 is displayed.
This screen includes the following:
• The top line displays the system state.
• The symbol shows the Utility Availability
Status. A “1” above this symbol indicates that
utility power is available and a “0” indicates
utility power is not available.
• The Generator circuit breaker position status:
If the symbol is down, the circuit breaker is
closed. If the symbol is up, the circuit breaker
is open.
• The Utility circuit breaker position status: If the
symbol is down, the circuit breaker is
closed. If the symbol is up, the circuit breaker
is open.
• The symbol shows the Genset Availability
Status. A “1” above this symbol indicates that
genset power is available and a “0” indicates
genset power is not available.
• The utility L-L average voltage and utility fre-
quency is displayed on beneath the Utility
symbol.
• The generator L-L average voltage and gener-
ator frequency is displayed beneath the Gen-
erator symbol.
• The synchronizer phase differential degrees is
displayed near the bottom center of the
screen.
• Pressing the Menu button takes you to the
main menu.
• Pressing the Reset button resets the control
after a fault condition is acknowledged.
FIGURE 6-8. NO SOURCE OR SYNCHRONIZER
HOME INFORMATION SCREEN FOR COMMON
BUS OR TRANSFER PAIR
PRELIMINARY
Timers Home Screen
If the Home screen is set to Timers, the screen
shown in Figure 6-9 is displayed. This screen in-
cludes the following:
• The top line displays the system state.
• A countdown of any active timer is displayed
next to the system state.
• The symbol shows the Utility Availability
Status. A “1” above this symbol indicates that
utility power is available and a “0” indicates
utility power is not available.
• The Generator circuit breaker position status:
If the symbol is down, the circuit breaker is
closed. If the symbol is up, the circuit breaker
is open.
• The Utility circuit breaker position status: If the
symbol is down, the circuit breaker is
closed. If the symbol is up, the circuit breaker
is open.
• The symbol shows the Genset Availability
Status. A “1” above this symbol indicates that
genset power is available and a “0” indicates
genset power is not available.
• If the Utility Available Status is available and
the utility circuit breaker is closed, then the L-L
average voltage and the utility frequency is
displayed. Otherwise no voltage value or utility
frequency is displayed.
• If the Genset Available Status is available and
the generator circuit breaker is closed, then
the L-L average voltage and the genset fre-
quency is displayed. Otherwise no voltage val-
ue or genset frequency is displayed.
• If the average voltage is displayed, then the
AC Meter System Total kW and the System To-
tal PF values are also displayed.
• Pressing the Menu button takes you to the
main menu.
• Pressing the Reset button resets the control
after a fault condition is acknowledged.
FIGURE 6-9. TIMERS HOME INFORMATION
SCREEN FOR COMMON BUS OR TRANSFER PAIR
6-7
Parallel Home Screen
If the Home screen is set to Parallel, the screen
shown in Figure 6-10 is displayed. This screen in-
cludes the following:
• The top line displays the system state.
• The symbol shows the Utility Availability
Status. A “1” above this symbol indicates that
utility power is available and a “0” indicates
utility power is not available.
• The Generator circuit breaker position status:
If the symbol is down, the circuit breaker is
closed. If the symbol is up, the circuit breaker
is open.
• The Utility circuit breaker position status: If the
symbol is down, the circuit breaker is
closed. If the symbol is up, the circuit breaker
is open.
• The symbol shows the Genset Availability
Status. A “1” above this symbol indicates that
genset power is available and a “0” indicates
genset power is not available.
• The utility L-L average voltage and AC Meter
utility power total kW is displayed on beneath
the Utility symbol.
• The generator frequency and AC Meter gener-
ator power total kW is displayed beneath the
Generator symbol.
• Pressing the Menu button takes you to the
main menu.
• Pressing the Reset button resets the control
after a fault condition is acknowledged.
FIGURE 6-10. PARALLEL HOME INFORMATION
SCREEN FOR COMMON BUS OR TRANSFER PAIR
 PRELIMINARY

MCM3320 MENU SYSTEM OVERVIEW Monitor Menus

The MCM3320 menu system can be accessed by The Monitor menus provide an organized access
pressing the Menu button on the home screen. Af- to all controller data.
ter entering the menu system, press the button The Monitor menus are available by pressing the
at any time to return to the Home screen. Whenev- (3) button on the Main menu. The Monitor menus
er you are viewing a submenu, press the button include the following 17 categories.
to return to the previous main menu. • AC Meter
The Main menu provides access access to five ma- • Analog In
jor categories of menus listed below (see Figure • Analog Out
6-11). • Breakers
Control Menus • communication
• PTC
The Control menus provide for viewing and, when
appropriate, allow adjustment of relevant operat- • Load Control
ing setpoints. • Priority
• Relay Outputs
The Control menus are available by pressing the
(1) button on the Main menu. The Control menus • Switch Inputs
include the following 4 categories. • Sync Check
• Test • Synchronizer
• System Status
• Extended Paralleling
• Load Demand
• Load Demand
• Load Add Shed
• Load Add and Load Shed
• Generator Bus Overload
Adjust Menus • Scheduler
The Adjust menus allow complete configuration, Faults Menus
setup, and fine-turning of the controller settings.
Pop-up diagnostic messages are displayed when
The Adjust menus are available by pressing the (2) they occur and can be acknowledged with a single
button on the Main menu. The Adjust menus in- button. In addition to any current message, histori-
clude the following 15 categories. cal information on faults and events can be viewed
• AC Meter Adjust with the Faults menus.
• AC Meter Setup The Faults menus are available by pressing the (4)
button on the Main menu. The Monitor menus in-
• Breakers
clude the following 6 categories.
• Communication
• Current Fault
• Configuration Output
• Active Event Table
• Load Control
• Event Occurrence Table
• PTC • Active Fault Table
• Sync Check • Fault History
• Sync Adjust • Fault Occurrence Table
• System
About Menu
• Scheduler
The About menus are available by pressing the (5)
• LCD Display
button on the Main menu (see Figure 6-11).
• Load Demand
The first menu displays the software version and
• Load Add / Load Shed the calibration part number. The second menu dis-
• Generator Bus Overload plays the controller on-time value.

6-8
PRELIMINARY

MAIN MENU AND SUBMENUS

MONITOR MENUS
SEE PAGE 6-107

ADJUST MENUS
SEE PAGE 6-31

FAULTS MENUS
SEE PAGE 6-153

CONTROL MENUS
SEE PAGE 6-13

FIGURE 6-11. MAIN MENU AND SUBMENUS

6-9
 PRELIMINARY
CONTROL MENUS
The Control menus are available by pressing the
(1) button on the Main menu (see Figure 6-11).
Control menus can be viewed and, if the correct
password is entered, values/parameters on these
menus can be changed.
The Control menus are used to initiate a test, ex-
tended parallel, load demand, and load add/load
shed operations. These menus can also be used to
make adjustments for relevant operating setpoints.
The Control menu provides access to the following
submenus:
• Test
• Extended Parallel
• Load Demand
• Load Add/Load Shed
6-10
The Control menus include one level of security. If
the correct password in not entered, the Control
menus can be viewed but not changed.
Viewing Only
Figure 6-12 is a block representation of the Control
menus that are available when a password is not
entered (or an incorrect password is entered) in the
Enter Password menu.
To only view these menus, press the VIEW button
in the Enter Password menu. The word “View” ap-
pears at the top of the five available submenus.
When the VIEW button is selected without entering
the correct password, the ADJUST button is not
displayed on any of the subsequent menus; there-
fore, no adjustments can be made.
PRELIMINARY

CONTROL MENUS − VIEWING ONLY

CONTROL TEST CONTROL EXTENDED CONTROL LOAD CONTROL LOAD ADD/

MENUS PARALLELING MENUS DEMAND MENUS LOAD SHED MENUS
SEE FIGURE 6-14 SEE FIGURE 6-15 SEE FIGURE 6-18 SEE FIGURE 6-19

FIGURE 6-12. CONTROL MENUS − VIEWING ONLY

6-11
 PRELIMINARY
Viewing and Adjusting
Figure 6-13 is a block representation of the Control
menus that are available from the Main Menu after
the correct password has been entered. The AD-
JUST button is available on these submenus;
therefore, adjusting the settings is allowed.
Enter Password Menu
Changing the Control menus is restricted to service
personnel and a password must be entered to
modify these menus.
When the Enter Password menu is displayed, the
first numeric character (0) is highlighted (see Fig-
ure 6-13).
NOTE: When selected (highlighted), each charac-
ter initially turns to “0” and the remaining
characters turn to “X”.
NOTE: Make sure that each numeric character is
correct before you move to the next char-
acter. If a wrong character is entered, you
will not be able to go back and correct it.
You will not be notified if a wrong password
is entered. Instead, the word VIEW will be
displayed instead of ADJUST.
To enter the password:
1. With the first character highlighted, press the
button below to the + or − symbols until the val-
ue reads “5.”
2. Press the arrow selection button to move
to the next numeric character.
3. Press the button below the + or − symbols until
the value reads “7.”
4. Press the arrow selection button to move
to the next numeric character.
6-12
5. Press the button below the + or − symbols until
the value reads “4.”
6. After you have completed entering the pass-
word, press the arrow selection button .
The first main Setup menu is displayed.
Once the correct password is entered, the word
“Adjust” appears on all submenus with adjustable
values.
NOTE: The password timer expires after 15 min-
utes of button inactivity.
Adjusting Values/Parameters
Once the correct password has been entered, ad-
justable values/parameters can be changed.
1. Press the buttons above the and sym-
bols in the digital display to navigate between
submenus.
2. Press the ADJUST selection button to select
the first parameter or value to be changed.
3. Press the + or − selection buttons to adjust val-
ues or select parameters.
4. Press the arrow selection button to navi-
gate to the next or previous adjustable value
or parameter.
5. After adjusting values/selecting parameters,
press the SAVE button to save your settings.
NOTE: If the button is pressed before
pressing the SAVE button, the
changes are not saved.
6. Press the button to return to the previous
Menu.
PRELIMINARY

CONTROL MENUS − ADJUSTING AND VIEWING

ENTER THE
PASSWORD “574”

CONTROL TEST CONTROL EXTENDED CONTROL LOAD CONTROL LOAD ADD/

MENUS PARALLELING MENUS DEMAND MENUS LOAD SHED MENUS
SEE FIGURE 6-14 SEE FIGURE 6-15 SEE FIGURE 6-18 SEE FIGURE 6-19

FIGURE 6-13. CONTROL MENUS − VIEWING AND ADJUSTING

6-13
 PRELIMINARY

Control Test Submenus
The Control Test submenus are available by press-
ing the (1) button on the Test menu (see Figure
6-14).
The Control Test submenus include menus for
starting and stopping a test, for selecting the transi-
tion type, and for selecting to test with or without
load.
The Control Test submenu provides access to the
following submenus:
The Test Start/Stop submenu displays the informa-
tion included in the Test Settings submenu.
1. Before starting a test, verify that these settings
are correct. To start a test, press the START
button. The message “Confirm?” is displayed.
2. To confirm that you want the test to start, press
the YES button. The Test Start/Stop menu is
redisplayed with the STOP button activated.
3. Press the STOP button to stop the test.
Test Settings Submenu

• Test Start/Stop The Test Settings submenu is available by press-

ing the (2) button on the Control Test submenu.
• Test Settings
• Transition Type: The transition type can be set
Test Start/Stop Submenus to Open Transition, Hard Closed Trans, or Soft
Closed Trans (default = ____________).
The Test Start/Stop submenus are available by • Test With Load: The Test With Load feature
pressing the (1) button on the Control Test subme- can be Enabled or Disabled (default = Dis-
nu. abled).

6-14
PRELIMINARY

CONTROL TEST MENUS

FIGURE 6-14. CONTROL TEST SUBMENUS

6-15
 PRELIMINARY
Control Extended Paralleling Submenus
The Control Extended Paralleling submenus are
available by pressing the (2) button on the Control
menu (see Figure 6-15).
The Control Extended paralleling submenu pro-
vides access to the following submenus:
• Extended Paralleling Start/Stop
• Extended Paralleling Settings
Extended Paralleling Start/Stop Submenus
The Extended Paralleling Start/Stop submenus
are available by pressing the (1) button on the Con-
trol Extended Paralleling submenu.
6-16
1. Before starting extended paralleling, verify
that these settings are correct. These settings
can be adjusted using the kVAR Control Ex-
tend Paralleling submenus (see Figure 6-17).
2. To start extended paralleling, press the
START button. The message “Confirm?” is
displayed.
3. To confirm that you want extended paralleling
to start, press the YES button. The ExtPar
Start/Stop menu is redisplayed with the STOP
button activated.
4. Press the STOP button to terminate this func-
tion.
PRELIMINARY

CONTROL EXTENDED
PARALLELING SUBMENUS

A B
kW CONTROL MENUS kVAR CONTROL MENUS
(SEE FIGURE 6-16) (SEE FIGURE 6-17)

FIGURE 6-15. CONTROL EXTENDED PARALLELING SUBMENUS

6-17
 PRELIMINARY
Extended Paralleling Settings Submenu
The Extended Paralleling Settings submenu is
available by pressing the (2) button on the Control
Extended Paralleling submenu.
The Control Extended Paralleling Settings subme-
nu provides access to the following submenus:
• kW Control Settings (see Figure 6-16)
• kVAR Control Settings (see Figure 6-17)
To view the kW Control Settings submenus, press
the (1) button. It allows access to the following four
different types of kW controls in extended parallel.
• Genset Bus % Level (Open Loop): This is the
default setting. When this type of extended
paralleling is selected, the MCM3320 pro-
duces a user-adjustable percent level for the
kW control output. The genset bus kW value
displayed is the total of the online gensets − it
is an open loop on the kW at the Genset Main
(GM).
This screen shows the utility and genset circuit
breaker positions, the AC meter utility and
genset power total kW, and the genset bus
percentage kW setpoint. The kW control out-
put level can be adjusted from −.05 to 105 per-
cent.
• Genset Bus kW (Closed Loop): The MCM3320
drives the kW control to achieve the desired
kW setpoint at the GM. If the setpoint cannot
be achieved within a preset time period, a
warning fault occurs.
This screen shows the utility and genset circuit
breaker positions, the AC meter utility and
genset total kW, and the genset bus kW set-
point. The genset bus setpoint can be ad-
justed from 00000 to 32767 kW.
• Genset kW w/Util Const (Closed Loop): The
MCM3320 drives the kW control output to
achieve the desired kW setpoint at the GM, but
6-18
it reduces this setpoint to keep the kW at the
Utility Main (UM) above a programmed level.
This can be used to prevent tripping of a UM
reverse power relay due to load falling below
the GM kW setpoint. Coordination of the set-
tings in this controller and the relay (plus an
understanding of the magnitude of load fluc-
tuations) is critical to the successful use of this
feature.
This screen shows the utility and genset circuit
breaker positions, the AC meter utility and
genset total kWs, the utility bus kW constraint
level, and the genset bus kW setpoint. The
genset bus setpoint can be adjusted from
−32768 to 32767 kW.
• Utility Bus kW (Closed Loop): The MCM3320
drives the kW control output to achieve the de-
sired kW setpoint at the UM. If the setpoint is
not reached with a preset time period, a warn-
ing fault occurs.
This screen shows the utility and genset circuit
breaker positions, the AC meter utility and
genset total kWs, and the utility bus kW set-
point. The genset bus setpoint can be ad-
justed from −32768 to 32767 kW.
To select a specific kW Control screen,
1. Press the ADJUST button.
2. Use the + or − buttons to scroll through the
available screens.
To change kW values,
1. Press the ADJUST button.
2. Press the to navigate to the value you wish
to change.
3. Use the + or − buttons to increase or decrease
the highlighted value.
4. Press the SAVE button to save your settings.
PRELIMINARY

kW CONTROL EXTENDED PARALLELING SUBMENUS

A

FIGURE 6-16. kW CONTROL EXTENDED PARALLELING SUBMENUS

6-19
 PRELIMINARY
To view the kVAR Control Settings submenus,
press the (2) button on the Control Extended Par-
alleling Settings submenu.
• Genset Controls (Information Only): This is
the default setting. With this setup, the
MCM3320 performs no action. The kVAR con-
trol output is zero. The genset controllers man-
age the kVAR control base on their own set-
tings (for example, a fixed power factor of
0.95).
This screen shows the utility and genset
breaker positions and the AC meter utility and
genset power total kVAR.
• Genset Bus % Level (Open Loop): The
MCM3320 sends out a user-adjustable per-
cent level on the kVAR control output. The
genset bus kVAR value displayed is the result
of whatever gensets happen to be online.
This screen shows the utility and genset circuit
breaker positions, the AC meter utility and
genset total kVARs, and the genset bus per-
centage kVAR setpoint. The kVAR control out-
put level can be adjusted from −.05 to 105 per-
cent.
• Genset Bus PF (Open Loop): The MCM3320
sends a reading to the kVAR control output
based on the current kW control output. the
relationship of these two is determined by the
power factor (PF) setting.
This screen shows the utility and genset circuit
breaker positions, the AC meter utility and
genset total power factor (PF), and the genset
bus power factor setpoint. The setpoint can be
adjusted from 0.70 to 1.00.
• Genset Bus kVAR (Closed Loop): The
MCM3320 drives the kVAR control output to
achieve the desired kVAR setpoint at the GM.
6-20
If the setpoint is not reached within a preset
time period, a warning fault occurs.
This screen shows the utility and genset circuit
breaker positions, the AC meter utility and
genset total kVARs, and the genset bus kVAR
setpoint. The genset bus setpoint can be ad-
justed from 00000 to 32767 kVAR.
• Genset Bus PF (Closed Loop): The
MCM3320 drives the output to achieve the de-
sired PF at the GM. If the setpoint is not
reached within a preset time period, a warning
fault occurs.
This screen shows the utility and genset circuit
breaker positions, the AC meter utility and
genset total power factor (PF), and the genset
bus power factor setpoint. The setpoint can be
adjusted from 0.70 to 1.00.
• Utility Bus kVAR (Closed Loop): The
MCM3320 drives the kVAR control output to
achieve the desired kVAR at the UM. If the set-
point is not reached within a preset time peri-
od, a warning fault occurs.
This screen shows the utility and genset circuit
breaker positions, the AC meter utility and
genset total kVARs, and the utility bus kVAR
setpoint. The genset bus setpoint can be ad-
justed from −32768 to 32767 kVAR.
• Utility Bus PF (Closed Loop): The MCM3320
drives the kVAR control output to achieve the
desired power factor (PF) setpoint at the utility
main (UM). If the setpoint is not reached within
a preset time period, a warning fault occurs.
The Utility Bus Power Factor screen shows the
utility and genset circuit breaker positions, the
AC meter utility and genset total power factor
(PF), and the utility bus power factor setpoint.
The setpoint can be adjusted from 0.70 to
1.00.
PRELIMINARY

kVAR CONTROL EXTENDED PARALLELING SUBMENUS

kVAR OPTIONS
(SEE PAGE 6-21)

FIGURE 6-17. kVAR CONTROL EXTENDED PARALLELING SUBMENUS (SHEET 1 OF 2)

6-21
 PRELIMINARY

To select a specific kVAR Control screen, 1. Press the ADJUST button.

1. Press the ADJUST button. 2. Press the to navigate to the value you wish
to change.
2. Use the + or − buttons to scroll through the 3. Use the + or − buttons to increase or decrease
available screens. the highlighted value.

To change kVAR values, 4. Press the SAVE button to save your settings.

6-22
PRELIMINARY

kVAR CONTROL EXTENDED PARALLELING SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-17. kVAR CONTROL EXTENDED PARALLELING SUBMENUS (SHEET 2 OF 2)

6-23
 PRELIMINARY
Load Demand Submenus
The Control Load Demand submenus are avail-
able by pressing the (3) button on the Control menu
(see Figure 6-18).
Control Load Demand Menu
• Ld Enable:The Load Demand feature can be
Enabled or Disabled (default = Disabled).
• Ld Type: The Load Type can be set to None,
Fixed Sequence, or Run Hours (default =
None).
Load Demand: Generator Status Menu
This menu provides status information only for up
to four generators. The status displayed can be
one of the following.
• Offline − The control has sent a STOP signal
to the genset and has shut down or is in the
process of shutting down.
• Online − The genset is running or has been
signaled to run.
• Waiting − The genset has been signaled to run
and the system is waiting for it to come online.
• Failed − The genset was signaled to run by the
control but it done not come online within a
specified time period.
• NoExist − The genset is not part of the system
(does not exist). For example, if your installa-
tion includes three gensets, genset #4 would
be displayed as “NoExist.”
The Load (LD) column indicates whether or not the
genset is running (”Run” or “Stop”).
Load Demand: Genset Fixed Sequence Menu
NOTE: This menu is displayed when the Load De-
mand Type is set to “None” or “Fixed Se-
quence.”
This menu shows the order, as set by the operator,
in which gensets are shut down and restated. In the
example shown in Figure 6-18, genset D is the first
to shut down, followed by genset C, then B, and fi-
nally A. The gensets are restarted in the opposite
order (A, B, C, D).
To change the shut down and restart sequence,
1. Press the ADJUST button. The first generator
in the NEW column is highlighted.
2. Press the to scroll through the list of NEW
gensets.
6-24
3. Use the + or − buttons to change the genset
order.
4. Press the SAVE button to save your settings.
Load Demand: Genset Run Hours Menu
NOTE: This menu is displayed when the Load De-
mand Type is set to “None” or “Run Hours.”
This menu shows the order, as set by the operator,
in which the gensets are shut down and restarted.
In the example shown in Figure 6-18, genset D is
the first to shut down, followed by genset C, then B,
and finally A. The gensets are restarted in the op-
posite order (A, B, C, D). The HRS column indi-
cates how many hours each genset has been run-
ning. This number is reset to zero when a genset
shuts down.
To change hours of the gensets,
1. Press the ADJUST button. The first generator
in the HRS column is highlighted.
2. Press the to scroll through the HRS en-
tries.
3. Use the + or − buttons to change the values.
4. Press the SAVE button to save your settings.
Load Demand: Next Genset Start-Up/Shut-
Down Status Menu
This information-only menu provides information
on the next genset designated to shut down, the
next genset designated to restart, and how much
power (in kW) the gensets are currently providing.
• The Off generator is the next genset desig-
nated to shut down. If a genset is identified in
the Off row, the threshold (THRESH) column
displays the kW value that the genset total
(Gen Tot) must drop below for the generator
(in this example, gen 2) to stop, following the
shutdown time delay.
• The On generator is the next genset desig-
nated to restart. If a genset is designated in the
On row, the threshold (THRESH) column dis-
plays the kW value that the genset total (Gen
Tot) must go above for the generator to receive
a run command.
• The Gen Tot value indicated how much power
(in kW) the gensets are currently providing.
Load Demand: Capacity Menu
This information-only menu shows the total online
capacity and the total spare online capacity.
PRELIMINARY

CONTROL LOAD DEMAND SUBMENUS

NOTE: If “Ld Type” is set to “Run Hours,” the “Gen
Now New” screen is not available.
If “Ld Type” is set to “Fixed Sequence Adjust,”
the “Gen Now Hrs” screen is not available.

FIGURE 6-18. CONTROL LOAD DEMAND SUBMENUS

6-25
 PRELIMINARY
Control Load Add Shed Submenus
The Control Load Add Shed submenus are avail-
able by pressing the (4) button on the Control menu
(see Figure 6-19).
Six levels of load add shed are possible. The load
add shed level must be set for each distribution de-
vice at the System Control screen. Level 1 Add is
the first load connected to the bus and Level 6 Add
is the last load connected to the bus. Level 1 shed is
the first load that is shed from the bus and Level 6
Shed is the last load that is shed from from the bus.
Load 0 Shed is never shed from the system.
Loads are added to the system automatically
based upon the number of gensets online. If all
gensets are successfully running on the bus, the
system automatically continues adding loads up to
Level 6 or until a bus overload occurs.
If the genset capacity is sufficiently greater that the
loads added, additional loads can be added. If a
load is shed due to insufficient system capacity,it
can be restored manually by using the Restore
buttons.
Load Add Shed Control Menu
• Load Add Shed Control: The control can be set
for Manual or Auto(matic) load add restore op-
eration (default = Auto).
To change the Load Add Shed Control,
1. Press the ADJUST button. The first generator
in the HRS column is highlighted.
2. Use the + or − buttons to toggle between Auto
and Manual.
3. Press the SAVE button to save your settings.
NOTE: If this function is set to “Manual,” a CTRL
button is displayed in the Add Levels and
Shed Levels menus.
Add Levels Menu
The Add Levels menu allows you to set the six add
levels to Add or Off (default = Off).
6-26
NOTE: The CTRL button is only displayed if the
Load Add Shed Control is set to “Manual.”
To modify the Add status of each level, press the
CTRL button. Level 1 through Level 6 can be set to
Add or Off.
1. Press the to scroll to select an add level.
2. Press the Add button to add the loads on that
level.
To view the total online capacity and the total spare
online capacity, press the CAP button.
Shed Levels Menu
The Shed Levels menu allows you to set the six
shed levels to Shed or Off (default = Off).
NOTE: The CTRL button is only displayed if the
Load Add Shed Control is set to “Manual.”
To modify the Shed status of each level, press the
CTRL button. Level 0 through Level 5 can be set to
Shed or Off.
1. Press the to scroll to select a shed level.
2. Press the Shed button to shed the loads on
that level.
NOTE: Level 0 can never be set to shed load. It
cannot be selected and is always set to
“Off.”
Capacity Menu
To view the total online capacity and the total spare
online capacity, press the CAP button on either the
Add Levels or the Shed Levels menu.
• Total Online Cap: This shows the total online
capacity.
• Spare Online Cap: The shows the total spare
online capacity.
PRELIMINARY

CONTROL LOAD ADD SHED SUBMENUS

NOTE: The CTRL button is only

available when the Load
Add Shed Control is set
to “Manual.”

FIGURE 6-19. CONTROL LOAD ADD SHED SUBMENUS

6-27
 PRELIMINARY

ADJUST MENUS Viewing Only

The Adjust menus are available by pressing the (2) Figure 6-20 is a block representation of the Adjust
button on the Main menu (see Figure 6-11). These menus that are available when a password is not
menus can be viewed and, if the correct password entered (or an incorrect password is entered) in the
is entered, values/parameters on these menus can Adjust Password menu.
be changed.
The Adjust menus are used to configure, set up, To only view these menus, press the VIEW button
and fine-tune the controller settings. in the Adjust Password menu. The word “View” ap-
pears at the top of the five available submenus.
The first Adjust menu provides access to the fol-
lowing submenus: When the VIEW button is selected without entering
the correct password, the ADJUST button is not
• AC Meter Adjust displayed on any of the subsequent menus; there-
• AC Meter Setup fore, no adjustments can be made.
• Breakers Menu Navigation
The second Adjust menu provides access to the
following submenus: 1. Press the buttons above the and sym-
• Communication bols in the digital display to navigate between
submenus.
• Configuration Output
• Load Control 2. To return to the main View menu from any of
The third Adjust menu provides access to the fol- the submenus, press the button.
lowing submenus:
3. To return to the Information screen from the
• PTC
Adjust menu, press the button.
• Sync Check
• Sync Adjust
The fourth Adjust menu provides access to the fol-
lowing submenus:
• System
• Scheduler
• LCD Display
The fifth Adjust menu provides access to the fol-
lowing submenus:
• Load Demand
• Load Add / Load Shed
• Generator Bus Overload

6-28
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST MENUS − VIEW ONLY

SEE PAGE 6-33

SEE PAGE 6-35
SEE PAGE 6-39

SEE PAGE 6-41

SEE PAGE 6-43
SEE PAGE 6-45

SEE PAGE 6-57

SEE PAGE 6-75
SEE PAGE 6-79

SEE PAGE 6-85

SEE PAGE 6-91
SEE PAGE 6-97

SEE PAGE 6-99

SEE PAGE 6-101
SEE PAGE 6-105

FIGURE 6-20. ADJUST MENUS − VIEW ONLY

6-29
 PRELIMINARY
Viewing and Adjusting
Figure 6-21 is a block representation of the Adjust
menus that are available from the Main Menu after
the correct password has been entered. The AD-
JUST button is available on these submenus;
therefore, adjusting the settings is allowed.
Setup Password Menu
Changing the Adjust menus is restricted to service
personnel and a password must be entered to
modify these menus.
When the Password menu is displayed, the first nu-
meric character (0) is highlighted (see Figure
6-21).
NOTE: When selected (highlighted), each charac-
ter initially turns to “0” and the remaining
characters turn to “X”.
NOTE: Make sure that each numeric character is
correct before you move to the next char-
acter. If a wrong character is entered, you
will not be able to go back and correct it. If
the wrong password is entered, you will be
able to view the Adjust menus but you
won’t be able to change them.
To enter the password:
1. With the first character highlighted, press the
button below to the + or − symbols until the val-
ue reads “5.”
2. Press the arrow selection button to move
to the next numeric character.
3. Press the button below the + or − symbols until
the value reads “7.”
4. Press the arrow selection button to move
to the next numeric character.
6-30
5. Press the button below the + or − symbols until
the value reads “4.”
6. After you have completed entering the pass-
word, press the arrow selection button .
The first main Setup menu is displayed.
Once the correct password is entered, the word
“Adjust” appears at the top of the five available sub-
menus.
NOTE: The password timer expires after 15 min-
utes of button inactivity.
Adjusting Values/Parameters
Once the correct password has been entered and
one of the Adjust categories of menus is selected,
the desired parameters can be changed.
1. Press the buttons above the and sym-
bols in the digital display to navigate between
submenus.
2. Press the ADJUST selection button to select
the first parameter or value to be changed.
3. Press the + or − selection buttons to adjust val-
ues or select parameters.
4. Press the arrow selection button to navi-
gate to the next or previous adjustable value
or parameter.
5. After adjusting values/selecting parameters,
press the SAVE button to save your settings.
NOTE: If the button is pressed before
pressing the SAVE button, the
changes are not saved.
6. Press the button to return to the Previous
Menu.
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST MENUS − VIEW AND ADJUST

ENTER THE
PASSWORD “574”

SEE PAGE 6-33

SEE PAGE 6-35
SEE PAGE 6-39

SEE PAGE 6-41

SEE PAGE 6-43
SEE PAGE 6-45

SEE PAGE 6-57

SEE PAGE 6-75
SEE PAGE 6-79

SEE PAGE 6-85

SEE PAGE 6-91
SEE PAGE 6-97

SEE PAGE 6-99

SEE PAGE 6-101
SEE PAGE 6-105

FIGURE 6-21. ADJUST MENUS − VIEW AND ADJUST

6-31
 PRELIMINARY

AC Meter Adjustment Submenus • L1: The Genset L1 Current Adjustment can be

set from −1 to +1 amps.
The AC Meter Adjustment submenus are available
by pressing the (1) button on the first Adjust menu • L2: The Genset L2 Current Adjustment can be
(see Figure 6-22). set from −1 to +1 amps.

The AC Meter Adjustment submenus consist of six • L3: The Genset L3 Current Adjustment can be
basic submenus. set from −1 to +1 amps.

• AC Meter Adjust Genset AC Meter Adjust Utility Submenus

• AC Meter Adjust Utility The AC Meter Adjust Utility menus display
• AC Meter Genset Setup
• L1L2: The Utility L1L2 Voltage Adjustment can
• AC Meter Utility Setup
be set from 0.9 to 1.1 volts.
• Genset Circuit Breakers
• L2L3: The Utility L2L3 Voltage Adjustment can
• Utility Circuit Breakers be set from 0.9 to 1.1 volts.
AC Meter Adjust Genset Submenus • L3L1: The Utility L3L1 Voltage Adjustment can
The AC Meter Adjust Genset menus display be set from 0.9 to 1.1 volts.

• L1L2: The Genset L1L2 Voltage Adjustment • L1: The Utility L1 Current Adjustment can be
can be set from 0.9 to 1.1 volts. set from −1 to +1 amps.

• L2L3: The Genset L2L3 Voltage Adjustment • L2: The Utility L2 Current Adjustment can be
can be set from 0.9 to 1.1 volts. set from −1 to +1 amps.
• L3L1: The Genset L3L1 Voltage Adjustment • L3: The Utility L3 Current Adjustment can be
can be set from 0.9 to 1.1 volts. set from −1 to +1 amps.

6-32
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST AC METER ADJUST SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-22. ADJUST MENUS − AC METER ADJUST SUBMENUS

6-33
PRELIMINARY
AC Meter Genset Setup Submenus
• Connection Type: The AC Meter Genset Con-
nection Type can be set to either Wye or Delta
(default = Wye).
• Nominal Voltage: The AC Meter Genset Nomi-
nal Voltage can be set from 110 to 45000 volts
(default = 480 volts).
• PT Primary Volt: The AC Meter Genset PT Pri-
mary Voltage can be set from 110 to 45000
volts (default = 480 volts).
6-34
• PT Secondary Volt: The AC Meter Genset PT
Secondary Voltage can be set from 110 to 500
volts (default = 120 volts).
• CT Primary Curr: The AC Meter Genset CT
Primary Current can be set from 5 to 10000
amps (default = 100 amps).
• CT Secondary Curr: The AC Meter Genset CT
Secondary Current can be set to either 1 or 5
amps (default = 5 amps).
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST AC METER GENSET SETUP SUBMENUS

SEE FIGURE 6-24

FIGURE 6-23. ADJUST MENUS − AC METER GENSET SETUP SUBMENUS

6-35
PRELIMINARY
AC Meter Utility Setup Submenus
• Connection Type: The AC Meter Utility Con-
nection Type can be set to either Wye or Delta
(default = Wye).
• Nominal Voltage: The AC Meter Utility Nomi-
nal Voltage can be set from 110 to 45000 volts
(default = 480 volts).
• PT Primary Volt: The AC Meter Utility PT Pri-
mary Voltage can be set from 110 to 45000
volts (default = 480 volts).
6-36
• PT Secondary Volt: The AC Meter Utility PT
Secondary Voltage can be set from 110 to 500
volts (default = 120 volts).
• CT Primary Curr: The AC Meter Utility CT Pri-
mary Current can be set from 5 to 10000 amps
(default = 100 amps).
• CT Secondary Curr: The AC Meter Utility CT
Secondary Current can be set to either 1 or 5
amps (default = 5 amps).
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST AC METER UTILITY SETUP SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-24. ADJUST MENUS − AC METER UTILITY SETUP SUBMENUS

6-37
PRELIMINARY
Genset Circuit Breaker Submenus
• CB Fail to Close Delay: The Circuit Breaker
Fail to Close Time Delay can be adjusted from
0.1 to 1.0 seconds, in 0.2 second increments
(default = 0.26 second).
• CB Fail to Open Delay: The Circuit Breaker
Fail to Open Time Delay can be adjusted from
0.2 to 5.0 seconds, in 0.2 second increments
(default = 1.0 second).
• CB Recharge Delay: The Circuit Breaker Re-
charge Time Delay can be adjusted from 0.0
to 60.0 seconds, in 0.2 second increments
(default = 10.0 seconds).
• Breaker Position Contacts: The Circuit Break-
er Position Contacts can be set to either Single
or Dual (default = __________).
6-38
Utility Circuit Breaker Submenus
• CB Fail to Close Delay: The Circuit Breaker
Fail to Close Time Delay can be adjusted from
0.1 to 1.0 seconds, in 0.2 second increments
(default = 0.26 second).
• CB Fail to Open Delay: The Circuit Breaker
Fail to Open Time Delay can be adjusted from
0.2 to 5.0 seconds, in 0.2 second increments
(default = 1.0 second).
• CB Recharge Delay: The Circuit Breaker Re-
charge Time Delay can be adjusted from 0.0
to 60.0 seconds, in 0.2 second increments
(default = 10.0 seconds).
• Breaker Position Contacts: The Circuit Break-
er Position Contacts can be set to either Single
or Dual (default = __________).
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST BREAKERS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-25. ADJUST MENUS − BREAKERS SUBMENUS

6-39
PRELIMINARY
Adjust Communications Submenus
• Modbus Address: The ModBus Node Address
can be set from 1 to 247 (default = ________).
6-40
• Modbus Baud: The ModBus baud rate can be
set to 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200 (default =
____________).
• Modbus Parity: The ModBus parity can be set
to Even, Odd, or None (default = _________).
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST COMMUNICATIONS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-26. ADJUST MENUS − COMMUNICATIONS SUBMENUS

6-41
 PRELIMINARY
Configuration Output Submenus
Up to eight Configurable Outputs can be assigned
fault codes. In addition, the Start Gensets Relay
can be energized or deenergized.
6-42
• Config Output 1 Fault # thru Config Output 8
Fault #: Each of the eight Configuration Output
Fault Codes can be set from 1 thru 65535.
• Start Gensets Relay Active State: The Start
Gensets Relay Active State can be set to En-
ergized or Deenergized (default = ________).
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST CONFIGURATION OUTPUT SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-27. ADJUST MENUS − CONFIGURATION OUTPUT SUBMENUS

6-43
 PRELIMINARY
Adjust Load Control Output Submenus
The Adjust Load Control menus are available by
pressing the (6) button on the Adjust menu (see
Figure 6-28). The Adjust Load Control menu is di-
vided into two categories.
6-44
• Load Control Setup (see page 6-47) − In-
cludes miscellaneous, genset, and utility set-
up menus.
• Load Control Tuning (see page 6-53) − In-
cludes kW and kVAR tuning menus.
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST LOAD CONTROL SUBMENUS

ADJUST LOAD CONTROL ADJUST LOAD CONTROL

SETUP MENUS TUNING MENUS
SEE PAGE 6-47 SEE PAGE 6-53

FIGURE 6-28. ADJUST MENUS − LOAD CONTROL SUBMENUS

6-45
 PRELIMINARY
Load Control Setup Submenus
The Load Control Setup Submenus are divided
into three categories:
• Miscellaneous
• Genset
• Utility
The Load Control Setup submenus are available
by pressing the (1) button on the Adj Load Control
menu (see Figure 6-28).
Miscellaneous Load Control Setup Submenus
The Miscellaneous Load Control Setup submenus
are available by pressing the (1) button on the Adj
Load Setup menu (see Figure 6-29).
• Extend Par kW Load Cntl Type: This sets how
and where the kW will be controlled for an ex-
tended parallel operation. The Extended Par-
alleling kW Load Control Type can be set as
Genset Bus % Level − Open Loop, Genset
Bus kW − Closed Loop, Genset Bus kW w/Utl
Constraint − Closed Loop, or Utility Bus kW −
Closed Loop (default = Genset Bus % Level −
Open Loop).
6-46
• Extend Par kVAR Load Cntl Type: This sets
how and where the kVAR will be controlled for
an extended parallel operation. The Extended
Paralleling kVAR Load Control Type can be
set as Genset Controllers, Genset Bus % Lev-
el − Open Loop, Genset Bus Power Factor −
Open Loop, Genset Bus kVAR − Closed Loop,
Genset Bus Power Factor − Closed Loop, Util-
ity Bus kVAR − Closed Loop, or Utility Bus
Power Factor − Closed Loop (default = Genset
Controllers).
• kW Load Cntl Max % Out: The kW Load Con-
trol Maximum % Output can be adjusted from
0 to 100 percent, in 0.01% increments (default
= _________).
• kVAR Ld Cntl Max % Out: The kVAR Load
Control Maximum % Output can be adjusted
from 0 to 60 percent, in 0.01% increments (de-
fault = _________).
• Extend Par Ramp Ld Time: This sets the ramp
load time for extended paralleling. The Ex-
tended Parallel Ramp Load Time can be ad-
justed from 10 to 900 seconds, in 0.1 second
increments (default = 60.0 seconds).
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST LOAD CONTROL MISCELLANEOUS SETUP SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-29. ADJUST MENUS − LOAD CONTROL MISCELLANEOUS SETUP SUBMENUS

6-47
 PRELIMINARY
Genset Load Control Setup Submenus
The Genset Load Control Setup submenus are
available by pressing the (2) button on the Adj Load
Setup menu (see Figure 6-30).
• kW SetPt Source: This is used to select where
the genset kW setpoint will come from for ex-
tended paralleling. The Genset Bus kW Set-
point Source can be set to Analog Input or In-
ternal (default = Internal).
• kVAR SetPt Source: This is used to select
where the genset kVAR setpoint will come
from for extended paralleling. The Genset Bus
kVAR Setpoint Source can be set to Analog In-
put or Internal (default = Internal).
• kW SetPoint: This sets the base load kW set-
point in closed loop extended paralleling. The
Genset Bus kW Setpoint can be set from 0 to
32767 kW (default = 0 kW).
6-48
• kVAR SetPoint: This sets the base load kVAR
setpoint in closed loop extended paralleling.
The Genset Bus kVAR Setpoint can be set
from 0 to 32767 kVAR (default = 0 kVAR).
• Power Factor SetPt: This sets the desired gen-
set bus power factor in closed loop extended
paralleling. The Genset Bus Power Factor
Setpoint can be set from 0.7 to 1.0, in 0.1 incre-
ments (default = 1.00).
• % kW SetPoint: This sets the %kW genset out-
put level for open loop base load extended
paralleling. The Genset Bus Percent kW Set-
point can be set −5 to 105 percent, in 0.01 per-
cent increments (default = 80.00%).
• % kVAR SetPoint: This sets the %kVAR gen-
set output level for open loop base load ex-
tended paralleling. The Genset Bus Percent
kVAR Setpoint can be set −5 to 105 percent,
in 0.01 percent increments (default = 0.00%).
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST LOAD CONTROL GENSET SETUP SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-30. ADJUST MENUS − LOAD CONTROL GENSET SETUP SUBMENUS

6-49
 PRELIMINARY
Utility Load Control Setup Submenus
The Utility Load Control Setup submenus are avail-
able by pressing the (2) button on the Adj Load Set-
up menu (see Figure 6-31).
• kW SetPt Source: This selects where the utility
kW setpoint will come from for extended paral-
leling. The Utility Bus kW Setpoint Source can
be set to Analog Input or Internal (default = In-
ternal).
• kVAR SetPt Source: This selects where the
utility kVAR setpoint will come from for ex-
tended paralleling. The Utility Bus kVAR Set-
point Source can be set to Analog Input or In-
ternal (default = Internal).
• kW SetPoint: This sets the peak shave kW set-
point in closed loop extended paralleling. The
6-50
Utility Bus kW Setpoint can be set from
−32768 to 32767 kW (default = 100 kW).
• kVAR SetPoint: This sets the peak shave
kVAR setpoint in closed loop extended paral-
leling. The Utility Bus kVAR Setpoint can be
set from −32768 to 32767 kVAR (default =
_________).
• Power Factor SetPt: This sets the desired util-
ity bus power factor in closed loop extended
paralleling. The Utility Bus Power Factor Set-
point can be set from 0.7 to 1.0, in 0.1 incre-
ments (default = 1.00).
• kW Constraint Level: This sets the utility kW
constraint level for base load extended paral-
leling. The kW Constraint Level can be set
from −32768 to 32767 kW (default = 100 kW).
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST LOAD CONTROL UTILITY SETUP SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-31. ADJUST MENUS − LOAD CONTROL UTILITY SETUP SUBMENUS

6-51
 PRELIMINARY
Load Control Tuning Submenus
The Load Control Setup submenus are available
by pressing the (2) button on the Adj Load Control
menu (see Figure 6-28).
Load Control kW Tuning
The Load Control kW Tuning submenus are avail-
able by pressing the (1) button on the Adj Load
Tuning menu (see Figure 6-32).
• kW Kp: This sets the proportional gain for kW
closed loop control in extended paralleling.
6-52
The kW Kp can be set from 0 to 1000 (default
= 60).
• kW Adaptive Gain Slope: The kW Adaptive
Gain Slope can be set from 0 to 50 percent, in
.001 percent increments (default = _______).
• kW Adaptive Gain Error Threshold: The kW
Adaptive Gain Error Threshold can be set from
0 to 110 percent, in 0.01 percent increments
(default = _________).
• kW Ki: This sets the integral gain for kW closed
loop control in extended paralleling. The kW Ki
can be set from 0 to 255 (default = 60).
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST LOAD CONTROL kW TUNING SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-32. ADJUST MENUS − LOAD CONTROL KW TUNING SUBMENUS

6-53
 PRELIMINARY
Load Control kVAR Tuning Submenus
The Load Control kVAR Tuning submenus are
available by pressing the (2) button on the Adj Load
Tuning menu (see Figure 6-33).
• kVAR Kp: This sets the proportional gain for
kVAR closed loop control in extended parallel-
ing. The kVAR Kp can be set from 0 to 1000
(default = 120).
• kVAR Adaptive Gain Slope: The kVAR Adap-
tive Gain Slope can be set from 0 to 50 per-
6-54
cent, in .001 percent increments (default =
_________).
• kVAR Adaptive Gain Error Threshold: The
kVAR Adaptive Gain Error Threshold can be
set from 0 to 110 percent, in 0.01 percent in-
crements (default = _________).
• kW Ki: This sets the integral gain for kVAR
closed loop control in extended paralleling.
The kVAR Ki can be set from 0 to 255 (default
= 50).
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST LOAD CONTROL kVAR TUNING SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-33. ADJUST MENUS − LOAD CONTROL KVAR TUNING SUBMENUS

6-55
 PRELIMINARY
PTC Sensors Submenus
The PTC Sensors menus are available by pressing
the (7) button on the PTC Sens menu (see Figure
6-21).
PTC Transfer Time Delay Submenus
The PTC Transfer Time Delay submenus are avail-
able by pressing the (2) button on the PTC Sens
menu (see Figure 6-34).
• Start Time Delay (TDES): The Time Delay En-
gine Start (TDES) can be set from 0 to 3600
seconds, in 0.1 second increments (default =
0.0 seconds).
• Stop Time Delay (TDEC): The Time Delay En-
gine Cooldown (TDEC) can be set from 0 to 20
seconds, in 0.1 second increments (default =
0.0 seconds).
6-56
• Transfer Delay (TDNE): The Time Delay Nor-
mal to Emergency (TDNE) can be set from 0
to 120 seconds, in 0.1 second increments (de-
fault = 10.0 seconds).
• Retransfer Delay (TDEN): The Time Delay
Emergency to Normal (TDNE) can be set from
0 to 1800 seconds, in 0.1 second increments
(default = 600.0 seconds.
• Programmed Trans (TDPT): The Time Delay
Programmed Transition (TDPT) can be set
from 0 to 60 seconds, in 0.1 second incre-
ments (default = 3.0 seconds).
• Max Paralleled (TDMP): The Time Delay Max-
imum Parallel (TDMP) time can be set from 0
to 1800 seconds, in 0.1 second increments
(default = 20.0 seconds.
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST PTC SENSORS SUBMENUS

TRANSFER TIME DELAY SUBMENUS

ADJUST PTC GENSET ADJUST PTC UTILITY

SENSORS MENUS SENSORS MENUS
SEE PAGE 6-59 SEE PAGE 6-67

FIGURE 6-34. ADJUST MENUS − PTC SENSORS SUBMENUS AND TRANSFER TIME DELAY SUBMENUS

6-57
 PRELIMINARY
PTC Generator Sensor Submenus
The PTC Transfer Time Delay submenus are avail-
able by pressing the (1) button on the PTC Sens
menu (see Figure 6-34).
Miscellaneous PTC Generator Sensor
Submenus
The Miscellaneous PTC Generator Sensor sub-
menus are available by pressing the (1) button on
the Adj PTC Gen Sens menu (see Figure 6-35).
• Volt Sensr Type: The Genset Voltage Sensor
Type can be set to either Line to Line or Line
to Neutral (default = _________).
• Loss Phase Sensr Enable: The Genset Loss
of Phase Sensor Enabled can be set to either
Disable or Enable (default = Disable).
6-58
• Online Cap Sensr Enable: The Genset Online
Capacity Sensor Enable can be set to either
Disable or Enable (default = Disable).
• Loss Phase Drop Delay: The Genset Loss of
Phase Drop-Out Time Delay can be set from
1.0 to 10.0 seconds, in 0.1 second increments
(default = _________).
• Phase Rot Sensor Enable: The Genset Phase
Rotation Sensor Enable can be set to either
Disable or Enable (default = Disable).
• Online Cap Sensr Enable: The Genset Online
Capacity Sensor Enable can be set to either
Disable or Enable (default = Disable).
• Unloaded Level: The Genset Unloaded Level
can be set from −32768 to 32767 kW (default
= _________).
• Dead Bus Thresh: The Genset Dead Bus
Threshold can be set from 20 to 50 percent
(default = _________).
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST PTC GENSET MISCELLANEOUS SENSORS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-35. ADJUST MENUS − PTC GENSET MISCELLANEOUS SENSORS SUBMENUS

6-59
 PRELIMINARY
PTC Genset Undervoltage Sensor Submenus
The PTC Genset Undervoltage Sensor submenus
are available by pressing the (2) button on the Adj
PTC Gen Sens menu (see Figure 6-36).
• Dropout Percent: The Genset Undervoltage
Dropout Percentage can be set from 75 to 98
percent, in 0.1 percent increments (default =
_________).
• Pickup Percent: The Genset Undervoltage
Pickup Percentage can be set from 85 to 100
6-60
percent, in 0.1 percent increments (default =
_________).
• Dropout Delay: The Genset Undervoltage
Dropout Delay can be set from 0.1 to 30.0 sec-
onds, in 0.1 second increments (default =
_________).
• Dropout Threshold: The Genset Undervoltage
Threshold is displayed but cannot be ad-
justed.
• Pickup Threshold: The Genset Undervoltage
Threshold is displayed but cannot be ad-
justed.
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST PTC GENSET UNDERVOLTAGE SENSORS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-36. ADJUST MENUS − PTC GENSET UNDERVOLTAGE SENSORS SUBMENUS

6-61
 PRELIMINARY
PTC Genset Overvoltage Sensor Submenus
The PTC Genset Undervoltage Sensor submenus
are available by pressing the (3) button on the Adj
PTC Gen Sens menu (see Figure 6-37).
• Sensor Enable: The Genset Overvoltage Sen-
sor Enable can be set to Disabled or Enabled
(default = Disabled).
• Dropout Percent: The Genset Overvoltage
Dropout Percentage can be set from 105 to
135 percent, in 0.1 percent increments (de-
fault = _________).
• Pickup Percent: The Genset Overvoltage
Pickup Percentage can be set from 95 to 99
6-62
percent, in 0.1 percent increments (default =
_________).
• Dropout Delay: The Genset Overvoltage
Dropout Time Delay can be set from 0.5 to 120
seconds, in 0.1 second increments (default =
_________).
• Drpout Threshold: The Genset Overvoltage
Dropout Threshold is displayed but cannot be
adjusted.
• Pickup Threshold: The Genset Overvoltage
Pickup Threshold is displayed but cannot be
adjusted.
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST PTC GENSET OVERVOLTAGE SENSORS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-37. ADJUST MENUS − PTC GENSET OVERVOLTAGE SENSORS SUBMENUS

6-63
 PRELIMINARY
PTC Genset Frequency Sensor Submenus
The PTC Genset Undervoltage Sensor submenus
are available by pressing the (4) button on the Adj
PTC Gen Sens menu (see Figure 6-38).
• Sensor Enable: The Genset Frequency Sen-
sor Enable can be set to Disabled or Enabled.
• Center Frequency: This is used to set the cen-
ter frequency for the genset frequency sensor
bandwidth settings. The Genset Center Fre-
quency can be set from 45 to 65 Hz, in 0.1 Hz
increments (default = 60.0 Hz).
• Drpout Bandwidth: The Genset Frequency
Dropout Bandwidth can be set from 0.3 to 5.0
percent, in 0.1 percent increments (default =
_________).
• Pickup Bandwidth: The Genset Frequency
Pickup Bandwidth can be set from 0.3 to 20.0
6-64
percent, in 0.1 percent increments (default =
_________).
• Dropout Delay: The Genset Frequency Drop-
out Time Delay can be set from 0.1 to 15.0 sec-
onds, in 0.1 second increments (default =
_________).
• Lower Dropout Thresh: The Genset Frequen-
cy Lower Dropout Threshold is displayed but
cannot be adjusted.
• Lower Pickup Thresh: The Genset Frequency
Lower Pickup Threshold is displayed but can-
not be adjusted.
• Upper Pickup Thresh: The Genset Frequency
Upper Pickup Threshold is displayed but can-
not be adjusted.
• Upper Dropout Thresh: The Genset Frequen-
cy Upper Dropout Threshold is displayed but
cannot be adjusted.
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST PTC GENSET FREQUENCY

SENSORS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-38. ADJUST MENUS − PTC GENSET FREQUENCY SENSORS SUBMENUS

6-65
 PRELIMINARY

PTC Utility Sensor Submenus
The PTC Transfer Time Delay submenus are avail-
able by pressing the (3) button on the PTC Sens
menu (see Figure 6-34).
Miscellaneous PTC Utility Sensor Submenus
The Miscellaneous PTC Utility Sensor submenus
are available by pressing the (1) button on the Adj
PTC Util Sens menu (see Figure 6-39).
• Volt Sensr Type: The Utility Voltage Sensor
Type can be set to either Line to Line or Line
to Neutral (default = _________).
• Loss Phase Sensr Enable: The Utility Loss of
Phase Sensor Enabled can be set to either
Disable or Enable (default = Disable).
• Loss Phase Drop Delay: The Utility Loss of
Phase Drop-Out Time Delay can be set from
1.0 to 10.0 seconds, in 0.1 second increments
(default = _________).
• Phase Rot Sensor Enable: The Utility Phase
Rotation Sensor Enable can be set to either
Disable or Enable (default = Disable).
• Unloaded Level: The Utility Unloaded Level
can be set from −32768 to 32767 kW (default
= _________).
• Dead Bus Thresh: The Utility Dead Bus
Threshold can be set from 20 to 50 percent
(default = _________).

6-66
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST PTC MISCELLANEOUS UTILITY SENSORS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-39. ADJUST MENUS − PTC UTILITY MISCELLANEOUS SENSORS SUBMENUS

6-67
 PRELIMINARY
PTC Utility Undervoltage Sensor Submenus
The PTC Utility Undervoltage Sensor submenus
are available by pressing the (2) button on the Adj
PTC Util Sens menu (see Figure 6-40).
• Dropout Percent: The Utility Undervoltage
Dropout Percentage can be set from 75 to 98
percent, in 0.1 percent increments (default =
_________).
• Pickup Percent: The Utility Undervoltage Pick-
up Percentage can be set from 85 to 100 per-
6-68
cent, in 0.1 percent increments (default =
_________).
• Dropout Delay: The Utility Undervoltage Drop-
out Delay can be set from 0.1 to 30.0 seconds,
in 0.1 second increments (default =
_________).
• Drpout Threshold: The Utility Undervoltage
Threshold is displayed but cannot be ad-
justed.
• Pickup Threshold: The Utility Undervoltage
Threshold is displayed but cannot be ad-
justed.
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST PTC UTILITY UNDERVOLTAGE SENSORS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-40. ADJUST MENUS − PTC UTILITY UNDERVOLTAGE SENSORS SUBMENUS

6-69
 PRELIMINARY
PTC Utility Overvoltage Sensor Submenus
The PTC Utility Overvoltage Sensor submenus are
available by pressing the (3) button on the Adj PTC
Util Sens menu (see Figure 6-41).
• Sensor Enable: The Utility Overvoltage Sen-
sor Enable can be set to Disabled or Enabled
(default = Disabled).
• Dropout Percent: The Utility Overvoltage
Dropout Percentage can be set from 105 to
135 percent, in 0.1 percent increments (de-
fault = _________).
• Pickup Percent: The Utility Overvoltage Pick-
up Percentage can be set from 95 to 99 per-
6-70
cent, in 0.1 percent increments (default =
_________).
• Dropout Delay: The Utility Overvoltage Drop-
out Time Delay can be set from 0.5 to 120 sec-
onds, in 0.1 second increments (default =
_________).
• Drpout Threshold: The Utility Overvoltage
Dropout Threshold is displayed but cannot be
adjusted.
• Pickup Threshold: The Utility Overvoltage
Pickup Threshold is displayed but cannot be
adjusted.
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST PTC UTILITY OVERVOLTAGE SENSORS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-41. ADJUST MENUS − PTC UTILITY OVERVOLTAGE SENSORS SUBMENUS

6-71
 PRELIMINARY
PTC Utility Frequency Sensor Submenus
The PTC Utility Frequency Sensor submenus are
available by pressing the (4) button on the Adj PTC
Util Sens menu (see Figure 6-42).
• Sensor Enable: The Utility Frequency Sensor
Enable can be set to Disabled or Enabled (de-
fault = Disabled).
• Center Frequency: This is used to set the cen-
ter frequency for the utility frequency sensor
bandwidth settings. The The Utility Center
Frequency can be set from 45 to 65 Hz, in 0.1
Hz increments (default = 60.0 Hz).
• Drpout Bandwidth: The Utility Frequency
Dropout Bandwidth can be set from 0.3 to 5.0
percent, in 0.1 percent increments (default =
_________).
• Pickup Bandwidth: The Utility Frequency Pick-
up Bandwidth can be set from 0.3 to 20.0 per-
6-72
cent, in 0.1 percent increments (default =
_________).
• Dropout Delay: The Utility Frequency Dropout
Time Delay can be set from 0.1 to 15.0 sec-
onds, in 0.1 second increments (default =
_________).
• Lower Dropout Thresh: The Utility Frequency
Lower Dropout Threshold is displayed but
cannot be adjusted.
• Lower Pickup Thresh: The Utility Frequency
Lower Pickup Threshold is displayed but can-
not be adjusted.
• Upper Pickup Thresh: The Utility Frequency
Upper Pickup Threshold is displayed but can-
not be adjusted.
• Upper Dropout Thresh: The Utility Frequency
Upper Dropout Threshold is displayed but
cannot be adjusted.
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST PTC UTILITY FREQUENCY

SENSORS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-42. ADJUST MENUS − PTC UTILITY FREQUENCY SENSORS SUBMENUS

6-73
 PRELIMINARY
Sync Check Submenus
The Sync Check submenus are available by press-
ing the (8) button on the Adjust menu (see Figure
6-43).
• Permissive Freq Window: The Permissive
Frequency Window sets the maximum fre-
quency difference allows for permissive close.
This parameter can be set from 0.001 to 1.000
Hz, in .001 Hz increments (default = 1.000 Hz).
• Permissive Phase Window: The Permissive
Phase Window sets the permissive +/− phase
angle window for the sync check function. This
parameter can be set from 0.10 to 20.00 de-
grees, in .01 degree increments (default =
10.00 degrees).
• Permissive Volt Window: The Permissive Volt-
age Window sets the permissive +/− voltage
acceptance window for the sync check func-
6-74
tion. This parameter can be set from 0.5 to
10.0 percent, in 0.1 percent increments (de-
fault = 6.0 percent).
• Permissive Volt Time: The Permissive Voltage
Time sets the permissive acceptance window
window dwell time for the synch check func-
tion. This parameter can be set from 0.50 to
5.00 seconds, in 0.02 second increments (de-
fault = 0.50 seconds).
• Fail To Sync Time: This parameter sets the
fail-to-synchronize diagnostic time delay. The
Failure to Synchronize Time Delay can be set
from 10.0 to 900.0 seconds, in 0.2 second in-
crements (default = 120.0 seconds).
• Fail Sync Lckout Enable: The Failure to Syn-
chronize Lockout Enable can be set to En-
abled or Disabled (default = Disabled). This
feature should be enabled if you want syn-
chronizing to stop if a fail-to-sync occurs.
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST SYNC CHECK SUBMENUS

A
CONTINUED ON
PAGE 6-77

FIGURE 6-43. ADJUST MENUS − SYNC CHECK SUBMENUS (SHEET 1 OF 2)

6-75
PRELIMINARY
• Fail To Sync Open Transition Retransfer En-
able: The Failure to Synchronize Open Transi-
tion Retransfer Enable can be set to Disabled
or Enabled (default = Disabled).
• Dead Util Dead Gen: The Dead Utility Dead
Generator Enable can be set to Disabled or
Enabled (default = Disabled).
• Live Util Dead Gen: The Live Utility Dead Gen-
6-76
erator Enable can be set to Disabled or En-
abled (default = Disabled).
• Dead Util Live Gen: The Dead Utility Live Gen-
erator Enable can be set to Disabled or En-
abled (default = disabled).
• Live Util Live Gen: The Live Utility Live Gener-
ator Enable can be set to Disabled or Enabled
(default = Disabled).
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST SYNC CHECK SUBMENUS

A RETURN TO
PAGE 6-75
B

FIGURE 6-43. ADJUST MENUS − SYNC CHECK SUBMENUS (SHEET 2 OF 2)

6-77
 PRELIMINARY

Sync Adjust Submenus
The Sync Adjust submenus are available by press-
ing the (9) button on the Adjust menu (see Figure
6-44).
The Sync Adjust Submenus are divided into three
categories:
• Miscellaneous
• Frequency
• Voltage
Sync Adjust Miscellaneous Submenus
The Sync Adjust Miscellaneous submenus are
available by pressing the (1) button on the Adj Sync
Adjust menu (see Figure 6-44).
• System Frequency: The System Frequency
can be set from 45.0 to 65.0 Hz (default = 60
Hz).
• Sync Method: The Sync Method can be set to
be either Phase Match or Slip Frequency (de-
fault = Phase Match). To determine which is
the appropriate synchronization method for
you application, see “Synchronizing Methods”
on page 3-2.
• Slip Frequency: The Slip Frequency can be
set from −3.000 to +3.000 Hz (default = 0.1).
This feature is used when the using the slip
sync method.
• Sync Phase Offset: This function sets a sync
phase offset to accommodate synchronizing
across the transformer with phase shift. The
Sync Phase Offset can be set from −50.00 to
+50.00 degrees, in 0.1 degree increments (de-
fault = 0.00 degrees).
• Phase Match Kp: The Phase Match Kp can be
set from 10 to 1500 (default = _________).
• Volt Match Test Offset: The Voltage Match
Test Offset can be set from −10 to +10 percent
(default = _________).

6-78
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST SYNC ADJUST

MISCELLANEOUS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-44. ADJUST MENUS − SYNC ADJUST MISCELLANEOUS SUBMENUS

6-79
 PRELIMINARY
Sync Adjust Frequency Submenus
The Sync Adjust Frequency submenus are avail-
able by pressing the (2) button on the Adj Sync Ad-
just menu (see Figure 6-45).
• Freq Match Kp: The Frequency Match Kp can
be set from 1 to 300 (default = _________).
• Freq Match Ki: The Frequency Match Ki can
be set from 0 to 255 (default = _________).
6-80
• Freq Match Ramp Rate: The Frequency
Match Ramp Rate can be set from 0.00 to
60.00 seconds (default = _________).
• Freq Match Lower Limit: The Frequency
Match Lower Limit can be set from −5 to 0
hertz (default = _________).
• Freq Match Upper Limit: The Frequency
Match Upper Limit can be set from 0 to 5 hertz
(default = _________).
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST SYNC ADJUST FREQUENCY SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-45. ADJUST MENUS − SYNC ADJUST FREQUENCY SUBMENUS

6-81
 PRELIMINARY
Sync Adjust Voltage Submenus
The Sync Adjust Voltage submenus are available
by pressing the (3) button on the Adj Sync Adjust
menu (see Figure 6-46).
• Volt Match Kp: The Voltage Match Kp can be
set from 10 to 800 (default = _________).
• Volt Match Ki: The Voltage Match Ki can be set
from 0 to 255 (default = _________).
6-82
• Volt Match Ramp Rate: The Voltage Match
Ramp Rate can be set from 0 to 60 (default =
_________).
• Volt Match Lower Limit: The Voltage Match
Lower Limit can be set from −15.00 to 0.00
percent (default = _________).
• Volt Match Upper Limit: The Voltage Match
Upper Limit can be set from 0 to 15.00 percent
(default = _________).
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST SYNC ADJUST VOLTAGE SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-46. ADJUST MENUS − SYNC ADJUST VOLTAGE SUBMENUS

6-83
 PRELIMINARY

System Submenus Bus w/out GM, Isolated Bus w/GM, Common

Bus, or Transfer Pair (default = Master Syn-
The System submenus are available by pressing chronize Only). For more information, see
the (10) button on the Adjust menu (see Figure page 6-4.
6-47).
• Transition Type: The Transition Type can be
The System submenus are divided into two cate- set to be Open Transition, Hard Closed Transi-
gories: tion, or Soft Closed Transition (default = Open
Transition).
• Application
• Extended Parallel Enable: The Extended Par-
• kW Ratings alleling operation can be Enabled or Disabled
System Application Submenus (default = Disabled).
• Load Demand Typ: The Load Demand Type
The System Application submenus are available can be set to None, Fixed Sequence, or Run
by pressing the (1) button on the Adj System Setup Hours (default = None).
menu (see Figure 6-47).
• Priority Control Method: The Priority Control
• System Topology: The System Topology can Method can be set to Manual or Automatic (de-
be set to be Master Synchronize Only, Isolated fault = Manual).

6-84
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST SYSTEM APPLICATION SUBMENUS

SYSTEM kW RATINGS
SETUP MENUS ARE
SHOWN ON PAGE 6-89

A
CONTINUED ON
PAGE 6-87

FIGURE 6-47. ADJUST MENUS − SYSTEM APPLICATION SUBMENUS (SHEET 1 OF 2)

6-85
PRELIMINARY
• Sys Phase Rot: The System Phase Rotation
can be set to L1-L2-L3 or L1-L3-L2 (default =
L1-L2-L3).
• Test With Load: The Test With Load can be set
to Disable or Enable (default = Disable).
• Fail to Disconnect Enable: The Fail to Discon-
nect Enable can be set to Disabled or Enabled
(default = Disabled).
6-86
• Fail to Sync Lockout Enable: The Fail to Sync
Lockout Enable can be set to Disabled or En-
abled (default = Disabled).
• Fail to Sync Open Transition Retransfer En-
able: The Fail to Sync Open Transition Retran-
sfer Enable can be set to Disabled or Enabled
(default = Disabled).
• System Frequency: The System Frequency
can be set from 45 to 650 Hz (default =
_________).
PRELIMINARY

RETURN TO
ADJUST SYSTEM A
PAGE 6-85
APPLICATION SUBMENUS B

FIGURE 6-47. ADJUST MENUS − SYSTEM APPLICATION SUBMENUS (SHEET 2 OF 2)

6-87
 PRELIMINARY

System kW Ratings Submenus • Gen 01 thru Gen 12: The Generator Rating for
The System kW Ratings submenus are available each of the 12 possible generators can be set
by pressing the (2) button on the Adj System Setup from 0 to 32000 kW (default = 0 kW).
menu (see Figure 6-48).

6-88
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST SYSTEM kW RATINGS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-48. ADJUST MENUS − SYSTEM KW RATINGS SUBMENUS

6-89
 PRELIMINARY
Scheduler Set Clock Submenus
The Scheduler Set Clock submenus are available
by pressing the (1) button on the Adj Scheduler
menu (see Figure 6-49).
• MM/DD/YYYY: The correct month, day, and
year can be set.
• HH/MM/SS: The correct hour, minute and sec-
ond can be set.
Scheduler Daylight Savings Time Submenus
The Scheduler Daylight Savings Time submenus
are available by pressing the (2) button on the Adj
Scheduler menu (see Figure 6-49).
• Daylite Saving Enable: The Daylight Savings
Time feature can ben Enabled or Disabled
(default = Disabled).
• Time Adjustment: This value can be set from
___ to ___ minutes (default = _________).
• Start Month: The month that daylight savings
time is to begin can be set from 1 thru 12 (de-
fault = _________).
6-90
• Start Wk: The week that daylight savings time
is to begin can be set to First, Second, Third,
Fourth, or Last (default = _________).
• Start Day: The day of the week that daylight
savings time is to begin can be set Sunday,
Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday,
Friday, or Saturday (default = Sunday).
• Start Hour: The starting hour that daylight sav-
ings time is to begin can be set from 1 thru 24
(default = _________).
• End Month: The month that daylight savings
time is to end can be set from 1 thru 12 (default
= _________).
• End Wk: The week that daylight savings time
is to end can be set to First, Second, Third,
Fourth, or Last (default = _________).
• End Day: The day of the week that daylight
savings time is to end can be set to Sunday,
Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday,
Friday, or Saturday (default = _________).
• End Hour: The hour that daylight savings time
is to end can be set from 1 thru 24 (default =
_________).
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST SCHEDULER SET CLOCK AND DAYLIGHT SAVINGS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-49. ADJUST MENUS − SCHEDULER SET CLOCK AND DAYLIGHT SAVINGS SUBMENUS

6-91
 PRELIMINARY
Scheduler Programs Submenus
The Scheduler Programs Time submenus are
available by pressing the (3) button on the Adj
Scheduler menu (see Figure 6-50).
• System Scheduler Enable: This allows you to
Enable or Disable the selected program (de-
fault = Disable).
• RunCmd: This shows the current Run Com-
mand coming from the scheduler function. It
can be Off, No Load, With Load, or Extended
Parallel.
• ActiveSch: This shows the current Active
Scheduler program or exception. It can be
None, Program 1, Program 2, Program 3, Pro-
gram 4, Program 5, Program 6, Program 7,
Program 8, Program 9, Program 10, Program
11, Program 12, Exception 1, Exception 2, Ex-
ception 3, Exception 4, Exception 5, or Excep-
tion 6.
6-92
• Prog Select: This allows you to select a sched-
uler program (1 to 12) to view or edit (default
= 1).
• Enable: The Program Select Enable feature
can be Disabled or Enabled (default = Dis-
abled).
• Program Run Mode: The Program Run Mode
Parameter can be set to No Load, With Load,
or Extended Parallel (default = No Load).
• Start Day HH:MM: Enter the Hour (0 to 23, de-
fault = 0) and Minute (0 to 59, default = 0) the
program is to begin.
• Duration HH:MM: Enter the Hour (0 to 23, de-
fault = 0) and Minute (0 to 59, default = 0) the
program is to stop.
• Repeat Interval: The program can be set to re-
peat Once, Every Week, Every 2 Weeks, Ev-
ery 4 Weeks, Every 5 Weeks, First Week of
Month, Second Week of Month, Third Week of
Month, Fourth Week of Month, or Last Week
of Month (default = Once).
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST SCHEDULER PROGRAMS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-50. ADJUST MENUS − SCHEDULER PROGRAMS SUBMENUS

6-93
 PRELIMINARY
Scheduler Program Exceptions Submenus
The Scheduler Program Exceptions Time subme-
nus are available by pressing the (4) button on the
Adj Scheduler menu (see Figure 6-51).
• Exceptn Select: This allows you to select an
exception (1 to 6) to view or edit (default = 1).
• Exceptn Enable: This allows you to Enable or
Disable the selected exception (default = Dis-
able).
• Month DD HH MM: Enter the Month ( to 12, de-
fault = 1), Date ( to 31, default = 1), Hour (0 to
6-94
23, default = 0), and Minute (0 to 59, default =
0) for a period of time that you do not wish to
have a programmed exercise operating.
• Dur Days HH MM: Enter the length of time, in
Days (0 to 44, default = 0), Hours(0 to 23, de-
fault = 0), and Minutes (0 to 59, default = 0) that
you do not wish the scheduled program to op-
erate.
• Repeat Interval: The Repeat Interval can be
set to either Only Once or Every Year (default
= Once Only).
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST SCHEDULER PROGRAM EXCEPTIONS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-51. ADJUST MENUS − SCHEDULER PROGRAM EXCEPTIONS SUBMENUS

6-95
 PRELIMINARY

LCD Display Submenus • Contrast and Brightness: Press the + or −

selection buttons to adjust the screen’s con-
The LCD Display submenus are available by trast and brightness. Changing the brightness
pressing the (12) button on the Adjust menu (see setting also affects the brightness of the LEDs
Figure 6-52). on the control panel.
• Display Symbols: Press the + or − selection
The LCD Display submenus are divided into three buttons to select whether or not you want Sym-
categories: bols to be displayed (default = No).
• Screen CRC Submenu
• CRC The CRC submenu is available by pressing the (2)
button on the LCD Display menu (see Figure 6-52).
• Lamp Test This menu displays the bootload, firmware,
Screen Submenu screens, and fonts versions.
Lamp Test
The Screen submenu is available by pressing the
(1) button on the LCD Display menu (see Figure The six LEDs on the control panel should light as
6-52). long as the Lamp Test button (3) is pressed.

6-96
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST LCD DISPLAY SUBMENUS

Lamp Test − The six LEDs

on the control panel should
light until the Previous
Menu button is pressed.

FIGURE 6-52. ADJUST MENUS − LCD DISPLAY SUBMENUS

6-97
 PRELIMINARY
Load Demand Submenus
The five Load Demand submenus are available by
pressing the (13) button on the Adjust menu (see
Figure 6-53).
• Load Demand Enable: The Load Demand fea-
ture can be Enabled or Disabled (default = Dis-
abled).
• Load Demand Typ: The Load Demand Type
can be set to Fixed Sequence, Run Hours, or
None (default = _________).
• Min Cap: This value sets how much the load
demand Minimum Capacity must always be
online regardless of what the load is. This val-
ue can be set from 0 to 32767 kW (default = 0
kW).
• Shutdown: The load demand Shutdown
threshold should be smaller than the Restart
percentage. This value can be set from 20 to
100 percent (default = 60 percent).
• Restart: The Restart can be set from 20 to 100
percent (default = 80 percent).
• Hrs Diff: The Hours of Differential sets the run
hours differential for restarting a genset
stopped due to load demand. This parameter
can be set from 1 to 500 hours (default = 50
hours).
• Init Delay: The Initial Time Delay can be set
from 1 to 60 minutes (default = 5 minutes).
• ShutdwnDly: The Shutdown Time Delay sets
the delay time between stopping gensets due
to load demand. This parameter can be set
from 1 to 60 minutes (default = 5 minutes)
6-98
• RestartDly: The Restart Time Delay sets a
genset restart delay time to avoid nuisance re-
starts due to load transients. This value can be
sec from 0.00 to 25.00 seconds (default = 1.00
second).
• GenFailTime: The Genset Failure Time Delay
sets how long to wait for a genset to come on-
line before declaring it failed. This value can be
set from 10 to 900 seconds (default = 60 sec-
onds).
• GenA: This sets GenA for fixed sequence load
demand. This parameter can be set to Gen1,
Gen2, Gen3, or Gen4 (default = Gen1).
• GenB: This sets GenB for fixed sequence load
demand. This parameter can be set to Gen1,
Gen2, Gen3, or Gen4 (default = Gen2).
• GenC: This sets GenC for fixed sequence load
demand. This parameter can be set to Gen1,
Gen2, Gen3, or Gen4 (default = Gen3).
• GenD: This sets GenD (the first to stop) for
fixed sequence load demand. This parameter
can be set to Gen1, Gen2, Gen3, or Gen4 (de-
fault = Gen4).
• Gen1: This
• Gen2: This
• Gen3: This
• Gen4: This
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST LOAD DEMAND SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-53. ADJUST MENUS − LOAD DEMAND SUBMENUS

6-99
 PRELIMINARY
Load Add Shed Submenus
The nine Load Add Shed submenus are available
by pressing the (14) button on the Adjust menu
(see Figure 6-54).
• Ld Add Shed Enable: The Load Add Shed fea-
ture can be Enabled or Disabled (default = Dis-
abled).
• Open Transition Retransfer Load Shed: The
Open Transition Retransfer Load Shed fea-
6-100
ture can be Enabled or Disabled (default = Dis-
abled).
• Genset Bus Load Add Delay: The Genset Bus
Load Add Shed Time Delay can be set from 0
to 60 seconds (default = 1 second).
• Utility Bus Load Add Delay: The Utility Bus
Load Add Shed Time Delay can be set from 0
to 60 seconds (default = 1 second).
• Load Shed Delay: The Load Shed Time Delay
can be set from 1.0 to 10.0 seconds, in 0.1 sec-
ond increments (default = 1.0 seconds).
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST LOAD ADD SHED SUBMENUS

A
CONTINUED ON
PAGE 6-103

FIGURE 6-54. ADJUST MENUS − LOAD ADD SHED SUBMENUS (SHEET 1 OF 2)

6-101
PRELIMINARY
• Load Add Shed Required Online Capacity:
The Load Shed Required Online Capacity can
be set from 0 to 32000 kW (default = 0 kW).
This value is the genset kW capacity that must
be online to start a timed load add. This func-
tion is disabled when set to 0.
• Type: The two Type menus are used to set the
load type for each of the available six loads
connected to the load add shed shed control
and status I/O. The load Type can be set to
None, Breaker, or ATS (default = None).
• LVL ADJ: The two Level Adjust Add Shed me-
nus are used to set the add and shed level for
each load.
− Load 1: The add level can be set from 1 to
6 (default = 1) and the shed level can be set
from 0 to 5 (default = 0)
6-102
− Load 2: The add level can be set from 1 to
6 (default = 2) and the shed level can be set
from 0 to 5 (default = 1)
− Load 3: The add level can be set from 1 to
6 (default = 3) and the shed level can be set
from 0 to 5 (default = 2)
− Load 4: The add level can be set from 1 to
6 (default = 4) and the shed level can be set
from 0 to 5 (default = 3)
− Load 5: The add level can be set from 1 to
6 (default = 5) and the shed level can be set
from 0 to 5 (default = 4)
− Load 6: The add level can be set from 1 to
6 (default = 6) and the shed level can be set
from 0 to 5 (default = 5)
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST LOAD ADD SHED SUBMENUS

A RETURN TO
PAGE 6-101
B

FIGURE 6-54. ADJUST MENUS − LOAD ADD SHED SUBMENUS (SHEET 2 OF 2)

6-103
 PRELIMINARY
Genset Bus Overload Submenus
The two Genset Bus Overload submenus are avail-
able by pressing the (15) button on the Adjust
menu (see Figure 6-55).
• Method: The Method of determined a genset
bus overload is kW Only. This information is
displayed but cannot be changed.
• %kW OL Thrs: The Percentage of genset bus
kW Overload Threshold can be adjusted from
80 to 140 percent (default = 105 percent).
6-104
• kW OL Delay: The genset bus kW Overload
Time Delay can be adjusted from 0 to 120 sec-
onds (default = 60 seconds).
• UnderFreq OverLd Threshld: The genset bus
Underfrequency Overload Threshold can be
adjusted from 0.1 to 10.0 hertz, in .1 hertz in-
crements (default = 3.0 Hz).
• UnderFreq OverLd Delay: The genset bus Un-
derfrequency Overload Time Delay can be ad-
justed from 0 to 20 seconds (default = 3 sec-
onds).
PRELIMINARY

ADJUST GENERATOR BUS OVERLOAD SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-55. ADJUST MENUS − GENERATOR BUS OVERLOAD SUBMENUS

6-105
 PRELIMINARY

MONITOR MENUS • Load Control

The Monitor menus are available by pressing the • Priority
(3) button on the Main menu (see Figure 6-11). • Relay Outputs
The Monitor menus are used to view all controller The fourth Monitor menu provides access to the
data, including AC data, load demand status infor- following submenus:
mation, breaker position information, and analog
and discrete I/O readings. • Switch Inputs
The first Monitor menu provides access to the fol- • Sync Check
lowing submenus:
• Synchronizer
• AC Meter The fifth Monitor menu provides access to the fol-
• Analog In lowing submenus:
• Analog Out • System Status
The second Monitor menu provides access to the
• Load Demand
following submenus:
• Load Add Shed
• Breakers
The sixth Monitor menu provides access to the fol-
• Communication lowing submenus:
• PTC
• Generator Bus Overload
The third Monitor menu provides access to the fol-
lowing submenus: • Scheduler

6-106
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR MENUS
SEE PAGE
6-109
SEE PAGE 6-125
SEE PAGE
6-125

SEE PAGE 6-127

SEE PAGE 6-127
SEE PAGE 6-129

SEE PAGE 6-137

SEE PAGE 6-137
SEE PAGE 6-137

SEE PAGE 6-139

SEE PAGE 6-141
SEE PAGE 6-143

SEE PAGE 6-145

SEE PAGE 6-147
SEE PAGE 6-149

SEE PAGE 6-151

SEE PAGE
6-151

FIGURE 6-56. MONITOR MENUS

6-107
 PRELIMINARY
Monitor AC Meter Submenus
The AC Meter submenus include of the following
three categories.
• Genset AC Meter − includes of the following
six categories.
− Current − see page 6-111
− Energy − see page 6-111
− Frequency − see page 6-111
− Phase − see page 6-113
− Power − see page 6-115
− Voltage − see page 6-113
6-108
• Utility AC Meter − includes of the following six
categories.
− Current − see page 6-117
− Energy − see page 6-117
− Frequency − see page 6-117
− Phase − see page 6-119
− Power − see page 6-121
− Voltage − see page 6-119
• System AC Meter
System AC Meter Submenu
The system AC Meter submenu displays the total
kW, kVAR, kVA, and power factor.
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR AC METER SUBMENUS

AC METER GENSET MENUS AC METER UTILITY MENUS

SEE PAGE 6-111 SEE PAGE 6-117

FIGURE 6-57. MONITOR MENUS − AC METER SUBMENUS

6-109
 PRELIMINARY

Genset AC Meter Submenus The genset AC meter energy submenus list the
___________________________.
the Genset AC Meter submenus are available by
pressing the (1) button on the Monitor AC Meter • Reset Gen Energy Meters: The Reset Genset
menu. Energy Meters can be set to Nothing, Reset,
or ________________ (default =
Genset AC Meter Current submenu _________).
The genset AC meter current submenu lists the Genset AC Meter Frequency submenus
genset L1, L2, L3, and average current (in amps).
The Genset Frequency submenu displays the gen-
Genset AC Meter Energy submenus set frequency.

6-110
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR AC METER GENSET

CURRENT, ENERGY, AND
FREQUENCY SUBMENUS

ADDITIONAL MENUS
ON PAGE 6-113

FIGURE 6-58. MONITOR MENUS − AC METER GENSET CURRENT, ENERGY, AND

FREQUENCY SUBMENUS

6-111
PRELIMINARY

Genset AC Meter Phase submenus
The Genset Frequency submenus display the
phase rotation ____________ ____________
Genset AC Meter Phase submenus
The first Genset Voltage menu displays the genset
L1N voltage, L2N voltage, L3N voltage, and LN av-
erage voltage.
The second Genset Voltage menu displays the
genset L1L2, L2L3, L3L1, and LL average voltage.

6-112
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR AC METER GENSET PHASE AND VOLTAGE SUBMENUS

AC METER
POWER MENUS
SEE PAGE 6-115

FIGURE 6-59. MONITOR MENUS − AC METER GENSET PHASE AND VOLTAGE SUBMENUS

6-113
 PRELIMINARY
Genset AC Meter Power submenus
The first Genset Power menu displays the genset
L1, L2, L3, and total kW.
The second Genset Power menu displays the gen-
set L1, L2, L3, and total kVAR.
6-114
The third Genset Power menu displays the genset
L1, L2, L3, and total kVA.
The fourth Genset Power menu displays the gen-
set L1, L2, L3, and total power factor.
The fifth Genset Power menu displays the genset
total kW, kVAR, kVA, and power factor.
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR AC METER GENSET POWER SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-60. MONITOR MENUS − AC METER GENSET POWER SUBMENUS

6-115
 PRELIMINARY
Utility AC Meter Submenus
the Utility AC Meter submenus are available by
pressing the (2) button on the Monitor AC Meter
menu.
Utility AC Meter Current submenu
The utility AC meter current submenu lists the utility
L1, L2, L3, and average current (in amps).
Utility AC Meter Energy submenus
6-116
The utility AC meter energy submenus list the
___________________________.
• Reset Gen Energy Meters: The Reset Genset
Energy Meters can be set to Nothing, Reset,
or ______________ (default = _________).
Utility AC Meter Frequency submenus
The Utility Frequency submenu displays the utility
frequency.
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR AC METER UTILITY

CURRENT, ENERGY, AND
FREQUENCY SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-61. MONITOR MENUS − AC METER UTILITY CURRENT, ENERGY, AND FREQUENCY
SUBMENUS

6-117
 PRELIMINARY

Utility AC Meter Phase submenus

The Utility Frequency submenus display the phase The first Utility Voltage menu displays the utility
rotation ____________ ____________ L1N voltage, L2N voltage, L3N voltage, and LN av-
Utility AC Meter Phase submenus erage voltage.

The Utility Voltage submenus display the The second Utility Voltage menu displays the utility
____________ ____________ L1L2, L2L3, L3L1, and LL average voltage.

6-118
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR AC METER UTILITY PHASE AND VOLTAGE SUBMENUS

AC METER
POWER MENUS
SEE PAGE 6-121

FIGURE 6-62. MONITOR MENUS − AC METER UTILITY PHASE AND VOLTAGE SUBMENUS

6-119
 PRELIMINARY

Utility AC Meter Power submenus
The first Utility Power menu displays the utility L1,
L2, L3, and total kW.
The second Utility Power menu displays the utility
L1, L2, L3, and total kVAR.
The third Utility Power menu displays the utility L1,
L2, L3, and total kVA.
The fourth Utility Power menu displays the utility
L1, L2, L3, and total power factor.
The fifth Utility Power menu displays the utility total
kW, kVAR, kVA, and power factor.

6-120
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR AC METER UTILITY POWER SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-63. MONITOR MENUS − AC METER UTILITY POWER SUBMENUS

6-121
 PRELIMINARY
System AC Meter Submenus
the System AC Meter submenu is available by
pressing the (3) button on the Monitor AC Meter
menu.
This menu lists the total Kw, total kVA, total power
factor, and total kVAR available on the system.
6-122
• Total kW: This shows the sum of the genset
bus and utility bus kW.
• Total kVA: This shows the sum of the genset
bus and utility bus kVA.
• Total PF: This shows the system total power
factor (utility bus plus genset bus).
• Total kVAR: This shows the sum of the genset
bus and utility bus kVAR.
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR AC METER SYSTEM SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-64. MONITOR MENUS − AC METER SYSTEM SUBMENUS

6-123
 PRELIMINARY
Monitor Analog In Submenus
The Monitor Analog In submenus are available by
pressing the (2) button on the Monitor menu. These
menus display the following.
• kW Load Set Point Percentage − This displays
the value for the kW load setpoint analog input.
• Battery Voltage − This displays the value for
the battery voltage analog input.
• Power Factor Set Point − The power factor
setpoint analog input value displayed here
uses a kVAR load setpoint analog input.
• kVAR Load Share Level −
• kVAR Load Set Point − This displays the value
for the kVAR load setpoint analog input.
• kW Load Share Level −
6-124
Monitor Analog Out Submenus
The Monitor Analog Out submenus are available
by pressing the (3) button on the Monitor menu.
These menus display the following.
• kW Master Load Control − This displays the
voltage level sent to the kW master load con-
trol analog output.
• Master Frequency Bias − This displays the
voltage level sent to the master frequency bias
analog output.
• Master Voltage Bias − this displays the master
voltage level send to the master voltage bias
analog output.
• kVAR Master Load Control − This displays the
voltage level sent to the kVAR master load
control analog output.
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR ANALOG IN AND ANALOG OUT SUBMENUS

FOR ADDITIONAL
MONITOR MENUS
SEE PAGE 6-127

FIGURE 6-65. MONITOR MENUS − ANALOG IN AND ANALOG OUT SUBMENUS

6-125
 PRELIMINARY
Monitor Breakers Submenus
The Monitor Breakers submenus are available by
pressing the (4) button on the Monitor menu. These
menus display the following.
• Genset Circuit Breaker Position Status
• Genset Circuit Breaker Inhibit Status
• Genset #1 Circuit Breaker Position
• Genset #2 Circuit Breaker Position
• Genset #3 Circuit Breaker Position
• Genset Circuit Breaker Position
• Utility Circuit Breaker Position
• Utility Circuit Breaker Inhibit Status
6-126
Monitor Communication Submenus
The Communication submenus are available by
pressing the (5) button on the Monitor menu. These
menus display the following.
• Bus Message Count
• Slave Message Count
• No Response Count
• Exception Count
• CRC Error Count
• Clear Counters: When the password is en-
tered, this parameter can set set to Do Noth-
ing, or ____________________.
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR BREAKERS AND COMMUNICATIONS SUBMENUS

MONITOR PTC
MENUS
SEE PAGE 6-129

FIGURE 6-66. MONITOR MENUS − BREAKERS AND COMMUNICATIONS SUBMENUS

6-127
 PRELIMINARY

Monitor PTC Submenus • Undervoltage Sensor Status: The status of the

The PTC submenus are available by pressing the
(6) button on the Monitor menu. This series of me-
nus includes the following four categories.
• PTC Genset Sensors
• PTC Status
genset undervoltage sensor may be Drop-out
or Picked-Up.
• Overvoltage Sensor Status: The status of the
genset overvoltage sensor may be Drop-out
or Unknown.
• Frequency Sensor Status: The status of the
genset frequency sensor may be Drop-out or

• PTC Timers • Loss of Phase Sensor Status: The status of

the genset loss of phase sensor may be Drop-
• PTC Utility Sensors out or

Genset Sensors Submenus • Phase Rotation Sensor Status: The status of

The Genset Sensors submenus are displayed by
pressing the (1) button on the Mon PTC menu.
These menus display the following.
• Genset Availability:
the genset phase rotation sensor may be
Drop-out or
• Online Cap Sensor Status: The status of the
genset online cap sensor may be Drop-out or
• Genset Bus Status: The status of the genset
bus may be Drop-out, Live, or Unavailable.

6-128
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR PTC GENSET SENSORS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-67. MONITOR MENUS − PTC GENSET SENSORS SUBMENUS

6-129
 PRELIMINARY

PTC Status Submenus • Utility Availability: This shows the availability

of the utility for loading (Available, Not Avail-
The PTC Status submenus are displayed by press- able, or Unknown), as determined by the utility
ing the (2) button on the Mon PTC menu. These sensors.
menus display the following.
• Active Transition Type: The Active Transition
• PTC Status: This shows the status of the con- timer type may be Programmed Transition,
nected Power Transfer Control (Util Con- Transfer, Retransfer, Max Parallel, or None.
nected, Genset Connected, No Source Con-
• Active Transition Timer: This shows the count-
nected, Paralleled, or Not Enabled).
down timer (in seconds) value of the active
• PTC Operating Mode: This variable indicates timer.
what direction the system is trying to go (if
• Transfer Inhibit Sw: The status of the Transfer
any). The current PTC Operating Mode may
Inhibit Switch may be Inhibit or No Inhibit (de-
be Normal, Normal Override, Test, Utility Fail,
fault = No Inhibit).
or Extended Parallel. The PTC operating
modes are listed in order of priority from high- • Retransfer Inhibit Sw: The status of the Re-
est to lowest in Table 6-2. transfer Inhibit Switch may be Inhibit or No In-
hibit (default = No Inhibit).
• Genset Availability: This shows the availability
of the genset for loading (Available, Not Avail- • Override Sw: The status of the Override
able, or Unknown), as determined by the gen- Switch may be Override or No Override (de-
set sensors. fault = No Override).
TABLE 6-2. PTC OPERATING MODES
PTC Operating Mode Description
Utility Fail The utility has failed and the load is transferred to the gensets.
Normal Override The genset bus has failed and the load is immediately retransferred to the utility.
Extended Parallel Extended parallel mode
Test Test mode (with or without load)
Normal Stay on the utility, or if not there, retransfer to the utility.

6-130
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR PTC STATUS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-68. MONITOR MENUS − PTC STATUS SUBMENUS

6-131
 PRELIMINARY
PTC Timers Submenus
The PTC Timers submenus are displayed by
pressing the (3) button on the Mon PTC menu.
These menus display the status and the time al-
lowed for each PTC timer function. These menus
display the following.
• Start Timer Status: The status of the Start Tim-
er can be Timing, Not Timing, or Expired.
• Start Timer: Displays the countdown value for
the genset start timer.
• Stop Timer Status: The status of the Stop Tim-
er may be Timing, Not Timing, or Expired.
• Stop Timer: Displays the countdown value for
the genset stop timer.
• Transfer Timer Status: The status of the
Transfer Timer may be Timing, Not Timing, or
Expired.
6-132
• Transfer Timer: Displays the countdown value
of the transfer timer, in seconds.
• Retransfer Timer Status: The status of the Re-
transfer Timer may be Timing, Not Timing, or
Expired.
• Retransfer Timer: Displays the countdown
value of the retransfer timer.
• Programmed Transfer Timer Status: The sta-
tus of the Programmed Transfer Timer may be
Timing, Not Timing, or Expired.
• Programmed Transfer Timer: Displays the
countdown value of the programmed transi-
tion timer, in seconds.
• Maximum Paralleling Timer Status: The status
of the Maximum Paralleling Timer may be Tim-
ing, Not Timing, or Expired.
• Maximum Paralleling Timer: Displays the
countdown timer of the maximum parallel tim-
er, in seconds.
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR PTC TIMERS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-69. MONITOR MENUS − PTC TIMERS SUBMENUS

6-133
 PRELIMINARY
Utility Sensors Submenus
The PTC Utility Sensors submenus are displayed
by pressing the (4) button on the Mon PTC menu.
These menus display the status of the PTC utility
sensors. These menus display the following.
• Utility Availability: The status of the Utility
Availability sensor may be Available or Not
Available.
• Undervoltage Sensor Status: The status of the
Undervoltage Sensor status may be Drop-out
or Picked-Up.
• Overvoltage Sensor Status: The status of the
Overvoltage Sensor may be Drop-out or Un-
known.
6-134
• Frequency Sensor Status: The status of the
Frequency Sensor may be Drop-out or Un-
known.
• Loss of Phase Sensor Status: The status of
the Loss of Phase Sensor may be Drop-out or
Unknown.
• Phase Rotation Sensor Status: The status of
the Phase Rotation Sensor may be Drop-out
or Unknown.
• Utility Source Failure Sw Status: The status of
the Utility Source Failure Switch sensor may
be Drop-out or Unknown.
• Utility Bus Status: The status of the Utility Bus
sensor may be Unavailable, Live, or Dead.
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR PTC UTILITY SENSORS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-70. MONITOR MENUS − PTC UTILITY SENSORS SUBMENUS

6-135
 PRELIMINARY
Monitor Load Control Submenu
The Monitor Load control submenu is available by
pressing the (7) button on the Monitor menu. This
menu displays the following.
• kVAR Load Ref
• kW Load Ref
Monitor Priority Submenu
The Monitor Priority submenu is available by
pressing the (8) button on the Monitor menu. This
menu displays the following.
• Master Inhibit Status: The status of the Master
Priority Inhibit function may be Inhibit or No In-
hibit.
Monitor Relay Outputs Submenus
The Relay Outputs submenus are available by
pressing the (9) button on the Monitor menu. These
6-136
menus show the status of the various relay outputs
available with an MCM3320 installation. These
menus display the following.
• Genset Circuit Breaker Close Relay Status:
The status of the Genset Circuit Breaker Close
Relay may be Inactive or On.
• Genset Circuit Breaker Open Relay Status:
The status of the Genset Circuit Breaker Open
Relay may be Inactive or On.
• Utility Circuit Breaker Close Relay Status: The
status of the Utility Circuit Breaker Close Relay
may be Inactive or On.
• Utility Circuit Breaker Open Relay Status: The
status of the Utility circuit Breaker Open Relay
may be Inactive or On.
• Start Gensets Relay Status: The status of the
Start Genset Relay may be Inactive or On.
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR LOAD CONTROL, PRIORITY, AND RELAY OUTPUTS MENUS

FIGURE 6-71. MONITOR MENUS − LOAD CONTROL, PRIORITY, AND RELAY OUTPUTS SUBMENUS

6-137
PRELIMINARY
Monitor Switch Inputs Submenus
The Switch Inputs submenus are available by
pressing the (10) button on the Monitor menu.
These menus show the status of the various
switches that the MCM3320 monitors. These me-
nus display the following.
• Genset #1 Circuit Breaker Position Switch
Status: The status of the Circuit Breaker Posi-
tion input switch for Genset #1 may be Breaker
Open or Breaker Closed.
• Genset #2 Circuit Breaker Position Switch
Status: The status of the Circuit Breaker Posi-
tion input switch for Genset #2 may be Breaker
Open or Breaker Closed.
• Genset #3 Circuit Breaker Position Switch
Status: The status of the Circuit Breaker Posi-
tion input switch for Genset #3 may be Breaker
Open or Breaker Closed.
• Genset #4 Circuit Breaker Position Switch
Status: The status of the Circuit Breaker Posi-
tion input switch for Genset #4 may be Breaker
Open or Breaker Closed.
• Gen CB Inhibit Sw: The Genset Circuit Break-
er Inhibit input switch status may be Inhibit or
No Inhibit.
6-138
• Util CB Inhibit Sw: The status for the Utility Cir-
cuit Breaker Inhibit input switch may be Inhibit
or No Inhibit.
• Util Source Fail Sw: The status for the Utility
Source Failure input switch may be Active or
Inactive.
• Test Start Sw: The status for the Test Start in-
put switch may be Start or Stop.
• Extend Parallel Start Sw: The status for the
Extended Parallel Start input switch may be
Start or Stop.
• Auto/Manual Sw: The status for the Auto/
Manual input switch may be Manual or Auto.
• Transfer Inhibit Sw: The status for the Transfer
Inhibit input switch may be Inhibit or No Inhibit.
• Retransfer Inhib Sw: The status for the Re-
transfer Inhibit input switch may be Inhibit or
No Inhibit.
• Override Sw: The status for the Override input
switch may be Override or No Override.
• Sync Enable Sw: The status for the Synchro-
nizer Enable input switch may be Active or In-
active.
• Fault Reset Sw: The status for the Fault Reset
input switch may be Reset or Not Reset.
• RS232 DCD Sw: The status for the RS232
DCD switch may be Active or Inactive.
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR SWITCH INPUTS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-72. MONITOR MENUS − SWITCH INPUTS SUBMENUS

6-139
 PRELIMINARY
Monitor Sync Check Submenus
The Monitor Sync Check submenus are available
by pressing the (11) button on the Monitor menu.
These menus show the status of the various sync
check functions. These menus display the follow-
ing.
• Sync Status: The status of the synchronizer
may be Synchronizer On or Synchronizer Off.
• Master Inhibit: The status of the master inhibit
function may be Inhibit or No Inhibit.
• Util Avail Stat: The status of the utility may be
Available or Not Available.
• Gen Avail Stat: The status of the genset may
be Available on Not Available.
6-140
• Util Bus Stat: The status of the Utility Bus may
be Unavailable or Dead.
• Gen Bus Stat: The status of the Genset Bus
may be Unavailable or Dead.
• Util Phase Rot: The Utility Phase Rotation may
be either L1-L2-L3 or L1-L3-L2.
• Gen Phase Rot: The Genset Phase Rotation
may be either L1-L2-L3 or L1-L3-L2.
• Phase Match Err:
• Time in Window: The Time in Window value
may be from _____ to ____ seconds.
• Sync Check Close Allow: This shows whether
or not any sync check conditions have been
met.
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR SYNC CHECK SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-73. MONITOR MENUS − SYNC CHECK SUBMENUS

6-141
 PRELIMINARY

Monitor Synchronizer Submenus • Phase Match Err:

The Monitor Synchronizer submenus are available

by pressing the (12) button on the Monitor menu. • Volt Match Err:
These menus show the status of the various sync
check functions. These menus display the follow- • Master Freq Bias Cmd:
ing.
• Sync Status: The status of the synchronizer • Master Volt Bias Cmd:
may be Synchronizer On or Synchronizer Off.
• Freq Match Err: • Sync Enable Sw: This shows the status of the
synchronizer enable input (Active or Inactive).

6-142
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR SYNCHRONIZER SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-74. MONITOR MENUS − SYNCHRONIZER SUBMENUS

6-143
 PRELIMINARY

Monitor System Status Submenus Connected, No Source Connected, Paral-

The Monitor System Status submenus are avail-
able by pressing the (13) button on the Monitor
menu. These menus show the status of the various
system functions. These menus display the follow-
ing.
• System State: This variable is intended to give
an indication of the most relevant current con-
troller activity. It should only be used for indica-
tion purposes and not be used in any control
logic. The state the control currently is in may
be TD Start, TD Stop, TD Programmed Transi-
tion, TD Transfer, TD Retransfer, Synchroniz-
ing, Sync Check OK, Inhibit, Unassigned,
Ramp Unload, Ramp Load, Manual, Utility
Failure, Test, Standby, Factory Test, Extended
Parallel, or Not Available. A description of
these states is included in Table 2-3.
leled, or Not Enabled.
• Gen Avail Stat: The genset availability status
may be Available, Not Available, or Unknown.
• Util Avail Stat: The utility availability status
may be Available, Not Available, or Unknown.
• Auto/Manual Sw: The status for the Auto/
Manual start switch may be Manual or Auto.
• Test Start Sw: The status of the Test Start
switch my be Start or Stop.
• Extend Parallel Start Sw: The status of the Ex-
tended Paralleling Start switch my be Start or
Stop.
• Sync Status: The Synchronizer status may be
Synchronizer On or Synchronizer Off.
• Total Number of Gensets: This lists the total
number of gensets with non-zero ratings con-
nected to the MCM3320 (maximum of 16).

• PTC State: This variable indicates what the • Total Sys Cap: This shows the sum of the gen-
utility and genset main breaker states are. set kW ratings.
Possible combinations are shown in Table 6-3. • Total Online Cap: This shows the sum of the
The PTC state may be Util Connected, Genset genset kW ratings for gensets that are online.
TABLE 6-3. PTC STATES
PTC State Description
No Source Connected Both breakers are open.
Utility Connected The utility main breaker is closed and the genset main breaker is open.
Genset connected The utility main breaker is open and the genset main breaker is closed.
Paralleled Both breakers are closed.

6-144
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR SYSTEM STATUS SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-75. MONITOR MENUS − SYSTEM STATUS SUBMENUS

6-145
 PRELIMINARY
Monitor Load Demand Submenus
The Monitor Load Demand submenus are avail-
able by pressing the (14) button on the Monitor
menu. These menus show the status of the various
load demand functions. These menus display the
following.
• LD State: This indicates the operating state
(Off, Initial Delay Timing, or Load Monitor) of
the load demand control.
• Nxt ShutDn: This shows which genset (Gen1,
Gen2, Gen3, Gen4, or None) will be stopped
if load conditions are met.
• Nxt Restrt: This shows which genset (Gen1,
Gen2, Gen3, Gen4, or None) will restart if load
conditions are met.
• Gen Total kW:
• Total LD Online Cap:
• Nxt Gen Shutdown Thrshld: This shows the
kW threshold for the genset bus at which the
next genset will load demand stop.
• Nxt Gen Restart Thrshld: This shows the kW
threshold for the genset bus at which the next
genset will restart.
• Gen1Avail: This shows the status of Gen1.
The status may be Gen Does Not Exist, Of-
fline, Waiting for Gen, Online, or Failed.
• Gen2Avail: This shows the status of Gen2.
The status may be Gen Does Not Exist, Of-
fline, Waiting for Gen, Online, or Failed.
• Gen3Avail: This shows the status of Gen3.
The status may be Gen Does Not Exist, Of-
fline, Waiting for Gen, Online, or Failed.
6-146
• Gen4Avail: This shows the status of Gen5.
The status may be Gen Does Not Exist, Of-
fline, Waiting for Gen, Online, or Failed.
• Gen1Cmd:
• Gen2Cmd:
• Gen3Cmd:
• Gen4Cmd:
• GenA: This shows which genset (Gen1, Gen2,
Gen3, or Gen4) is currently GenA for load de-
mand.
• GenB: This shows which genset (Gen1, Gen2,
Gen3, or Gen4) is currently GenB for load de-
mand.
• GenC: This shows which genset (Gen1,
Gen2, Gen3, or Gen4) is currently GenC for
load demand.
• GenD: This shows which genset (Gen1,
Gen2, Gen3, or Gen4) is currently GenD for
load demand.
• Gen1: This shows the status of the load de-
mand Gen1 driver output.
• Gen2: This shows the status of the load de-
mand Gen2 driver output.
• Gen3: This shows the status of the load de-
mand Gen3 driver output.
• Gen4: This shows the status of the load de-
mand Gen4 driver output.
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR LOAD DEMAND SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-76. MONITOR MENUS − LOAD DEMAND SUBMENUS

6-147
 PRELIMINARY
Monitor Load Add Shed Submenus
The Monitor Load Add Shed submenus are avail-
able by pressing the (15) button on the Monitor
menu. These menus show the status of the various
load add and load shed functions. These menus
display the following.
Add Level Status
The Add Level Status menu shows the status (Do
Nothing or Add Level, default = No Nothing) of the
six add levels.
Shed Level Status
The Shed Level Status menu shows the status (Do
Nothing or Shed Level, default = No Nothing) of the
six shed levels.
6-148
Load Status ATS
The two Load Status ATS menus show the position
status of the six transfer switches. The status can
be Not Available, No Source connected, Source 1
Connected, Source 2 Connected or Paralleled (de-
fault = Not Available).
Load Status Breaker
The two Load Status Breaker menus show the
position and the trip status of the six breakers. The
position can be Open, Closed, or Not Available (de-
fault = Not Available). The trip status can be Not
Available, Normal, or Tripped (default = Not Avail-
able).
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR LOAD ADD SHED SUBMENUS

FIGURE 6-77. MONITOR MENUS − LOAD ADD SHED SUBMENUS

6-149
 PRELIMINARY
Monitor Generator Bus Overload
Submenus
The Monitor Generator Bus Overload submenus
are available by pressing the (16) button on the
Monitor menu. These menus show the status of the
various load add and load shed functions. These
menus display the following.
• kW Stat: This shows whether or not the genset
bus is overloaded based upon kW. The kW
status may be No Overload or Overload.
• kW Thres: This shows the calculated kW over-
load threshold based on online capacity and
the % setting.
• Gen Tot: This shows how many of the defined
Gen1 thru Gen4 gensets are online.
• SpareCap: This shows the difference between
the online capacity of the four gensets and the
genset bus total kW.
• UnderFreq OverLd Status: This shows wheth-
er or not the genset bus is overloaded, based
on frequency. The Underfrequency Overload
Status may be No Overload or Overload.
6-150
• UnderFreq OverLd Thres: This shows the un-
derfrequency offset threshold for a genset
overload condition. the Underfrequency Over-
load threshold can be 0.1 to 10.0 Hz.
• Genset Freq: This shows _____________
___________.
• System Freq: This shows the system nominal
frequency.
Monitor Scheduler Submenu
The Monitor Scheduler submenu is available by
pressing the (17) button on the Monitor menu. This
menu shows the scheduler functions.
• Run Command: This shows the current Run
Command coming from the scheduler func-
tion. It can be Off, No Load, With Load, or Ex-
tended Parallel.
• Active Schedule: This shows the current Ac-
tive Scheduler program or exception. It can be
None, Program 1, Program 2, Program 3, Pro-
gram 4, Program 5, Program 6, Program 7,
Program 8, Program 9, Program 10, Program
11, Program 12, Exception 1, Exception 2, Ex-
ception 3, Exception 4, Exception 5, or Excep-
tion 6.
PRELIMINARY

MONITOR GENERATOR BUS OVERLOAD SUBMENUS

AND SCHEDULER SUBMENU

FIGURE 6-78. MONITOR MENUS − GENERATOR BUS OVERLOAD AND SCHEDULER SUBMENUS

6-151
 PRELIMINARY

Faults Menus Fault History Table Submenus

The Faults menus are available by pressing the (4)

button on the Main menu (see Figure 6-11). These
menus provide information on both fault and non-
fault events. There are six categories of Fault sub-
menus.
Current Fault Submenu
The Current Fault submenu can be viewed by
pressing the (1) button on the Faults submenu. It
displays information on only the most recent fault
that is still active. The fault number and a brief de-
scription is displayed.
Active Event Table Submenus
The Active Event Table submenus can be viewed
by pressing the (2) button on the Faults submenu.
They display all active events (non-fault events).
The event number and a brief description of the
most recent event is displayed first. Use the and
buttons to scroll through the list.
Event Occurrence Table Submenus
The Event Occurrence Table submenus can be
viewed by pressing the (3) button on the Faults
submenu. They provide information on how many
times each event has occurred. These menus also
include the event number and a brief description.
Information on these events can be viewed by
pressing the and buttons. Information on any
of the events can be cleared by pressing the CLR
button. The events that are available with the
MCM3320 are listed in Table 6-4.
The Fault History Table submenus can be viewed
by pressing the (5) button on the Faults submenu.
They display information on all faults. These me-
nus also include the fault number, a brief descrip-
tion, and the amount of time (in seconds) that the
controller has been powered (COT = controller On
Time). Information on these faults can be viewed
by pressing the and buttons. Information on
any of the faults can be cleared by pressing the
CLR button.
Fault Occurrence Table Submenus
The Fault Occurrence Table submenus can be
viewed by pressing the (6) button on the Faults
submenu. They provide information on how many
times each fault has occurred. These menus also
include the fault number and a brief description. In-
formation on these faults can be viewed by press-
ing the and buttons. Press the CLR button to
clear the entire history of a fault and return to the
Faults main menu. The faults that are available
with the MCM3320 are listed in Table 6-5.
TABLE 6-4. EVENT NUMBERS AND
DESCRIPTIONS
Event Number Event Description
1222 Not In auto
1483 Common warning
2965 Genset Bus Available

Active Fault Table Submenus 2328 Utility Bus Available

2333 Genset Bus Connected
The Active Fault Table submenus can be viewed by
pressing the (4) button on the Faults submenu. 2332 Utility Bus Connected
They list all active faults. The fault number and a 2971 Test Extended Parallel
brief description of the most recent fault is dis-
played first. Use the and buttons to scroll 1916 Sync Check OK
through the list. 1534 Load Control Output Enable

NOTE: An active fault cannot be reset until the NOTE: The events listed in this table are listed in
condition causing the fault is cleared and the order they are shown on the display
the RESET button is pressed. screen.

6-152
PRELIMINARY

FAULTS MENUS X

FIGURE 6-79. FAULTS MENUS

6-153
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 6-5. FAULT NUMBERS AND

DESCRIPTIONS
Fault Number Event Description
1455 Util Main Pos Contact Fail
2396 Util Main Fail to Close
2397 Util Main Fail to Open
1219 Util Main Tripped
1914 Util Bus Phase Rotation
1912 Util Bus Loss of Phase
2331 Util Bus Under Voltage
2358 Util Bus Over Voltage
1223 Util Bus Frequency
2648 Remote I/O Comm Failure
1689 Real Time Clock Power Interrupt
1335 AC Metering Time Reached
1999 Max Parallel Time Reached
343 Hardware Failure
1456 Sync Output Limit
2416 Calibration Checksum Error
353 EEPROM Write Error
1454 Gen Main Pos Contact Fail
1452 Gen Main Fail to Close
1453 Gen Main Fail to Open
1328 Gen Main Tripped
1915 Gen Bus Phase Rotation
1913 Gen Bus Loss of Phase
1225 Gen Bus Under Voltage
1224 Gen Bus Over Voltage
1226 Gen Bus Frequency
1541 Genset Failed to Come Online
2647 Load Demand Setup Invalid
1444 Genset Bus Overload
1989 kW Load Control Output Limit
1991 kVAR Load Control Output Limit
1121 Fail to Disconnect
1458 Phase Rotation Mismatch
1457 Fail to Sync
NOTE: The faults listed in this table are listed in
the order they are shown on the display
screen.

6-154
PRELIMINARY

7. Testing and Troubleshooting

This section describes testing, diagnostics, and
troubleshooting procedures. If any problem occurs
that is not included in these procedures, contact a
Cummins service representative. To troubleshoot
gensets and/or transfer switches, refer to the ap-
propriate equipment manual.
FAULT AND STATUS CODES
An MCM3320 installation includes two means of
viewing faults and status codes.
• The 7-Segment LED display located on the
MCM3320 control board
• The display panel
The MCM3320 also has nine lamps that indicate
what is happening in the system that is being con-
trolled.
SYSTEM STATUS INDICATORS
The nine lamps (DS1 thru DS9) on the MCM3320
control board (see Figure 7-1) are used to display
the system activities listed in Table 7-1.
SYSTEM AND DIAGNOSTIC INDICATORS
The MCM3320 control module includes a seven-
segment LED (U51 − see Figure 7-1), used to indi-
cate the following modes.
• System Mode − When in this mode, the LED
displays a code to indicate current activity. The
available activity codes are listed in Table 7-2.
• Diagnostic Mode − When in this mode, the
LED displays event and fault codes.
The control is normally in the System mode. When
in System mode, the decimal point (DP) near the
bottom right corner of the seven-segment LED is
off and the LED displays a code to indicate current
activity. When in this mode, the characters listed in
Table 7-2 can be displayed.
To switch to Diagnostic mode and view event and
fault codes, a customer-supplied fault reset switch
connected to TB2-14 must be pressed for at least
five seconds. When in Diagnostic mode, the
decimal point near the bottom right corner of the
seven-segment LED is lit.

DS4
DS2 DS5
U51
DS1 DS9
DS3
DS8
DS7 DS6

DECIMAL POINT (DP)

FIGURE 7-1. MCM3320 CONTROL BOARD LEDS

7-1
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 7-1. MCM3320 SYSTEM STATUS INDICATORS

LAMP TITLE COLOR DESCRIPTION
Utility This lamp lights when the utility bus is available.
DS1 Green
Available
Utility This lamp lights when the utility main circuit breaker is closed.
DS2 Green
Connected
This lamp flashes at a 1/2 Hz rate if the board is awake (running
DS3 Heartbeat Green
normally).
Genset This lamp lights when the generator bus is available.
DS4 Yellow
Connected
Genset This lamp lights when the genset main circuit breaker is closed. It also
DS5 Yellow
Available lights when there isn’t a Genset Main but any 52GN is closed.
Common This lamp lights whenever there is a system fault.
DS6 Yellow
Alarm
This lamp lights when the MCM3320 is not in Automatic Mode. When
DS7 Not In Auto Red lit, the MCM3320 is in Manual Mode, Test Mode, or Extended Parallel
Mode.
When this lamp is flashing green, it is an indication that the MCM3320
Blinking Green is sending a correction signal for voltage or frequency to the generator
sets.
DS8 Synchronizer When this lamp is solid green, it is indicating that it is ok to manually or
Solid Green
automatically close the open breaker.
When this lamp is solid red, it is an indication of an active fail-to-sync
Red
fault.
ModBus This lamp flashes to indicate that there is communication activity on
DS9 Yellow
Activity one of the two ModBus channels (RS-232 or RS-485).

TABLE 7-2. U51 LED ACTIVITY CODES Some diagnostics are mapped to low side driver
outputs.
CODE DESCRIPTION
1 TD Start Warnings are latched until the user does a fault re-
set using the customer-supplied fault reset switch.
2 TD Stop
3 TDTP When in Diagnostic mode, the control flashes each
digit of the fault/event code, with a pause between
4 TDEN
digits and a longer pause between repetitions.
5 TDNE
6 Synchronizing
To switch from Diagnostic mode back to System
mode, press the fault reset switch for at least five
7 Sync Check OK seconds.
8 Inhibit
9 Unassigned
A Ramp Unload
b Ramp Load
C Manual Mode
d Utility Failure
E Test Mode
J Standby Mode
H Extended Parallel
− Not Available

7-2
PRELIMINARY
TEST AND ADJUSTMENT
Basic Configuration
Before any testing of the MCM3320 can be done,
the basic configuration of the board must be set up
and verified (see Section 6). To allow a user to set
up the board for specific application requirements,
a PC-based configuration tool is provided on a CD
for loading on to a local PC. The board can also be
set up by a Cummins service technician using
InPowert.
The PC may be connected to the circuit board from
its serial connection point using Cummins part
number 338−4683 cable. This cable is available
from your local Cummins distributor.
CAUTION The MCM3320 is factory-config-
ured for gains that are most appropriate for typ-
ical applications. Adjustment of the gains by
non-qualified persons can result in misopera-
tion of the system when the synchronizer is en-
abled. Defer settings to a qualified Cummins
service technician.
Bench Tests
Connect a 12 or 24VDC control power source to
one of the control power inputs (TB2-7 and TB2-8,
9, 11 or 12). Verify that the control is operating by
viewing DS3 blinking green.
If an AC power source of an acceptable magnitude
and number of phases is available, the board can
verify that proper voltage is sensed at each voltage
reference point, again by verifying that the
appropriate LED (DS1−green for utility side and
DS5−amber for generator bus side) operates when
the source is connected. Note that in the default
configuration, the utility available and generator
bus available relay drivers should also operate
during this test (TB2-17 and 18).
If both sources are connected simultaneously and
the sources are synchronized the board should
display a ”synchronized” indication by lighting DS8
continuously. If the synchronizer is enabled
(TB1-10 to 11) and DS8 is flashing both sources
are available and the device is attempting to
synchronize them.
Commissioning
Commissioning of Cummins PowerCommand
generator sets and MCM3320 should be super-
vised by a qualified Cummins service technician.
7-3
WARNING Do not allow connection of an op-
erating generator bus to a utility service with-
out explicit written permission of the utility ser-
vice provider. Improper settings and practices
can result in personal injury, death, or serious
equipment damage.
The commissioning process can result in power
outages of varying duration and/or voltage and
frequency disturbances to loads connected to the
generator set or utility buses.
The actual commissioning process for any system
is dependent on the specific characteristics of that
system. The follow points provide only guidelines
for proper system commissioning. A qualified sys-
tem designer should provide specific commission-
ing instructions to validate proper system operation
and settings.
1. Generator sets that are used in conjunction
with a MCM3320 must be fully commissioned
as described in the Cummins generator set
installation manual prior to commissioning of
the MCM3320 functions in the system.
2. Verify that all wiring is installed as required by
the system control drawings and the Cummins
interconnecting drawings for the MCM3320.
3. Set the system up for manual operation so that
the system does not attempt to switch power
to loads. Check the source availability set
points in the MCM3320 for proper settings.
4. Verify that DC control power is available at the
master synchronizer. DS3 should be flashing
green to indicate that the control is ready to op-
erate.
5. Verify that the sources are connected properly
to the master synchronizer. Energize each
source individually, and verify that the voltage
of a calibrated meter, the MCM3320 metering,
and the switchboard metering (if provided) is
consistently operating. Make calibration ad-
justments on the MCM3320 as necessary.
6. Verify proper connections to the generator
sets from the master synchronizer. With sys-
tem loads connected to the utility, the synchro-
nizer not enabled, and a generator set run-
ning, adjust the generator set frequency and
voltage to a value that is different from utility
frequency by 1 hertz, and utility voltage by
approximately 3%. Enable the synchronizer
 PRELIMINARY
and observe that the generator set correctly
matches the utility frequency and voltage with-
out connecting the generator set to the utility
source. If desired, the settings can be done in
each direction to verify the capabilities of the
device to drive adjustments in both directions.
Reset generator set frequency and voltage to
levels to those prior to running test. Repeat
this test for each generator set in the system.
7. Verify that the generator sets synchronize
properly as a group. With the utility source
available, the generator sets operating with
system loads connected and load properly
balanced between all machines, enable the
master synchronizer and verify that the gener-
ator sets synchronize as a group without dis-
rupting load sharing, and to within the sync
check parameters set into the MCM3320. The
“SYNC OK” output of the MCM3320 can be
used to signal that the control considers the
generator bus to be synchronized. An external
device should be used to validate the synchro-
nizing accuracy of the system. The Cummins
service technician may make adjustments
necessary to optimize synchronizing speed.
8. Complete the balance of system operation
tests in manual state, then repeat system test-
ing in all automatic modes, to totally verify sys-
tem operation.
TROUBLESHOOTING
WARNING Incorrect installation, service, or
replacement of parts can result in severe per-
sonal injury or death and/or equipment dam-
age. Only trained and experienced personnel
are to perform the following procedures.
Malfunctioning Lamps, Meters, Gauges,
and/or Starter Solenoid
Meters and other control device may malfunction if
any DC fuse is blown. If you are experiencing prob-
lems with these devices, check the DC fuses and
replace as necessary. All fuses are in fuse holders
that include an integral fuse blown indicator that
functions only in AC circuits.
Paralleling Breaker Fail-to-Close Alarm
A Paralleling Breaker Fail-to-Close condition exists
when the genset circuit breaker fails to close within
7-4
one second after receiving a signal to close. When
this occurs, the Breaker Fail to Close message is
displayed at the PowerCommand control and the
amber warning lamp lights.
When this condition occurs, consider the following
possible causes of failure and review the circuit
breaker manual.
• The springs are not charged, possibly due to
a faulty charging motor or circuit.
• The mechanism is physically jammed and is
unable to move.
• A breaker fault lockout is activated because of
an overcurrent condition.
WARNING Troubleshooting procedures pres-
ent hazards that may result in severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced
personnel are to perform the following proce-
dures.
WARNING Do not release the circuit breaker
charging handle until after completing the en-
tire charging operation. Releasing the handle
before the charging operation is complete
causes the handle to move upward with
enough velocity and force to cause personal
injury.
CAUTION The springs are fully charged when
a metallic click is heard and the spring charge
indicator reads charged. To avoid damaging
the circuit breaker, do not force the handle be-
yond this point.
To troubleshoot this condition,
1. Locate the paralleling breaker for the genset
with the Breaker Fail-to-close alarm. If the
breaker status window displays Spring Dis-
charged, continue with step 2. If not, go to step
4.
2. At the genset displaying the Breaker Fail-to-
Close alarm,
a. Place the system mode select switch in the
Off position to stop genset operation.
b. Locate the paralleling circuit breaker. Use
the emergency charging handle to charge
the springs. the ratchet requires 10 to 12
pumping operations to charge the springs
completely.
c. At the genset’s control panel, place the sys-
tem mode select function to Auto. If the
PRELIMINARY
genset starts and the Circuit breaker
Closed lamp lights, continue with step 3. If
not, repeat steps 2a and 2b a second time
before going to step 3.
3. After the operation is complete, verify proper
operation of the breaker charge circuit. If the
breaker charge circuit is operating correctly,
go to step 4. If not, go to step 8.
4. If manual paralleling is desired, refer to the
Manual Operation information in Section and
continue with step 5. If not, go to step 7.
5. If the breaker was tripped by a fault condition
AND is the circuit breaker provided with a
manual rest fault indicator, then continue with
step 6. If not, go to step 7.
6. Reset the fault indicator and determine the
cause of the fault before attempting to operate
this breaker. If the cause was found and the
problem corrected, continue with step 7. If not,
go to step 8.
7. If in Manual Mode, use the genset control
screen to turn the genset off. If in auto Mode,
7-5
turn the 0/Manual/auto switch to the 0 position.
Reset the genset alarms. this resets the con-
trols for normal operation.
8. If the problem is not resolved with these proce-
dures, contact a Cummins service representa-
tive.
Troubleshooting Using Fault / Event
Codes
Table 7-3 lists the possible fault/event codes that
are available with the MCM3320. This table also
lists the possible cause(s) and provides corrective
actions.
To reset faults,
1. Correct the fault condition.
2. Make sure the control is not in Diagnostic
State Mode (decimal point is not lit). If in Diag-
nostic State Mode, press the reset switch for
at least five seconds.
3. Activate a Reset input momentarily (less than
5 seconds).
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 7-3. CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING

WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electric-
ity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review the safety precautions
on pages xvii and xviii.
FAULT/
DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
EVENT CODE
343 Hardware Failure 1. At least one of the following 1. Identify which of the faults is active
Warning faults is active. by observing the fault displayed on
• Calibration Checksum Warn- the control panel, by observing the
ing (Fault Code 2416) lamps on the MCM3320 control
board, or by using InPower.
• EEPROM Write Failure
Warning (Fault Code 353) 2. Take corrective steps for the active
specific fault(s), as described in this
• Utility Main AC Metering Fail- section.
ure (Fault Code 1335)
3. Cycle power to the MCM3320.
• Generator Bus AC Metering
Failure (Fault Code 1335) 4. If the problem continues, replace the
control board.
2. The hardware version is not
compatible with the software
version.
353 EEPROM Write The current value in RAM memory Clear the fault either by cycling power
Failure Warning (to-be-written value) does not to the MCM3320 or by resetting the
match its post-written value in processor via an InPower initial
EEPROM. This problem occurs calibration.
when you attempt to save a trim
by using either InPower or the
LCD display and it is not
successful. This problem may also
occur when the MCM3320 tries to
automatically save data on a
periodic basis.
1121 Failure to The Genset Main (GM) Circuit Follow the corrective steps, as
Disconnect Breaker or the Utility Main (UM) described in this section, for the
Warning Circuit Breaker has an active appropriate fault.
Fail-To-Open fault. • Genset Main Breaker Fail to Open
Warning (Fault Code 1453)
• Utility Main Breaker Fail to Open
Warning (Fault Code 2397)

7-6
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 7-3. CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT.)

WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electric-
ity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review the safety precautions
on pages xvii and xviii.
FAULT/
DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
EVENT CODE
1219 Utility Main There is an overcurrent / short 1. Check for these problems down-
Breaker Tripped circuit condition at the circuit stream from the Utility Main Breaker.
Warning breaker. 2. Make sure the Utility Main Breaker
tripping adjustments are properly
set.
3. Make sure there are no synchroniz-
ing problems that could trip the UM
circuit breaker just at closing time.
Check for the correct phase se-
quence connections at the circuit
breaker,
4. Make sure all analog reading meters
are calibrated in order to have real
readings of the Utility Main, Genset
Main, and each genset.
5. Make sure there are no breaker
protection coordination problems in
the electrical installation.
1222 Not in Auto The Synchronizing System is not 1. Make sure you want to work in this
Event in Auto mode. mode. If you do not, check relevant
terminal blocks (TB10-6) on the
MCM3320 and related switches for
misoperation.
2. Check cabling from the switches to
the terminal blocks.
3. Make sure the control switch opera-
tion is OK.
4. Use InPower to verify that the
MCM3320 is properly processing
contact data.
1223 Utility Frequency The Utility frequency is greater 1. Check the lower and upper utility
Warning than the upper drop-out threshold frequency drop-out settings on the
or it is less than the lower drop-out MCM3320. To determine if you are
threshold and it stays there for a trying to synchronize to a depend-
time period that is greater than the able source, create a sensible band-
drop-out time delay. width that tells you how good the
Utility is. InPower can be used to ac-
complish this.
2. To avoid lengthy synchronizing op-
eration, make sure the Utility fre-
quency is not varying a lot all of the
time.
3. Make sure the MCM3320 is measur-
ing frequency correctly.

7-7
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 7-3. CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT.)

WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electric-
ity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review the safety precautions
on pages xvii and xviii.
FAULT/
DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
EVENT CODE
1224 Genset Main The GM voltage is greater than 1. Make sure the Genset overvoltage
Overvoltage the Genset overvoltage drop-out threshold is safe for the connected
Warning threshold and it stays there for a load and make that this value is not
time period that is greater than the too close to the rated voltage.
drop-out time delay. 2. Make sure that the drop-out time
delay for this fault is not set too low.
3. Check the AVR system operation of
each individual genset.
4. Make sure all AC voltage sensors
are properly calibrated at the
MCM3320 and the gensets.
5. Use InPower to monitor and make
any necessary adjustments.
6. If used, check external transformer
connections.
1225 Genset Main The generator bus voltage is less 1. Make sure the genset undervoltage
Undervoltage than the Genset undervoltage threshold is safe for the connected
Warning drop-out threshold and it stays load and make that this value is not
there for a time period that is too close to the rated voltage.
greater than the drop-out time 2. Make sure that the drop-out time
delay. delay for this fault is not set too low.
3. Check the AVR system operation of
each individual genset.
4. Make sure all AC voltage sensors
are properly calibrated at the
MCM3320 and the gensets.
5. Use InPower to monitor and make
any necessary adjustments.
6. Make sure the wire size and dis-
tance is correct and check for loose
connections.

7-8
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 7-3. CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT.)

WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electric-
ity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review the safety precautions
on pages xvii and xviii.
FAULT/
DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
EVENT CODE
1226 Genset The GM frequency is greater than 1. Verify that the lower and upper GM
Frequency the upper drop-out threshold or it frequency drop-out settings on the
Warning is less than the lower drop-out MCM3320 create a sensible band-
threshold and it stays there for a width that makes load-feeding a
time period that is greater than the safe activity. InPower can be used to
drop-out time delay. accomplish this. Be aware that the
GM settings harmonize with the
genset settings.
2. To avoid lengthy synchronizing op-
eration, make sure the Utility fre-
quency is not varying a lot all of the
time.
3. Verify that the MCM3320 is measur-
ing frequency correctly.
4. Verify that the genset control is cor-
rectly calibrated.
1328 Genset Main The trip indication contact on the 1. Check to see if there is an overcur-
Breaker Tripped GM breaker is closed. rent/short circuit condition at the cir-
Warning cuit breaker.
2. Check for the following problems
downstream for the GM breaker.
• Verify that the GM breaker tripping
adjustments are properly set.
• Verify that there are no synchroniz-
ing problems that could trip the
GM breaker just at closing time.
Check for correct phase sequence
connections at the terminal block.
• Verify that all analog reading me-
ters are calibrated so that there
are real readings of Utility Main,
Genset Main, and each genset.
• Make sure that there are no break-
er protection coordination prob-
lems in the electrical installation.

7-9
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 7-3. CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT.)

WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electric-
ity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review the safety precautions
on pages xvii and xviii.
FAULT/
DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
EVENT CODE
1335 AC Metering Out At least one of the following 1. Use InPower to determine if the
of Range variables are out of range in utility generator bus or the utility bus is the
Warning bus and/or generator bus analog source of the problem.
measurements. 2. Verify that the meter calibration is
• Voltage okay.
• Current 3. Verify that the MCM3320 VT and CT
• kW ratios are correctly set.
• kVAR 4. Verify that the VT and CT rated val-
ues match the ones set in the
• kVA MCM3320.
• Power Factor 5. Check the number of turns on each
of the built-in CTs to verify that they
comply with requirements regarding
5A-secondary and 1A-secondary.
6. Verify that the CT and VT polarities
and connections are okay.
1444 Genset Bus The total Kw delivered by the 1. Verify that the genset’s kW power is
Overload genset bus is equal to or greater greater than the power demanded
Warning than the genset bus kW overload by the connected load. Check for
threshold continuously for the faulted gensets. Use different me-
genset bus kW overload time ters than the built-in ones included
delay AND/OR the in the MCM3320.
underfrequency delta (system 2. Make sure meter calibration is OK.
frequency − current genbus
3. Make sure the PT and CT ratios are
frequency) is equal to or greater
well set in the MCM3320. Make sure
than the genset bus
the PTs and CTs are operating.
underfrequency overload
threshold continuously for the 4. Verify that the PT and CT rated val-
genset bus underfrequency ues matches those set in the
overload time delay. MCM3320 and your system actual
rated values.
5. Make sure there are no low-frequen-
cy conditions on the generator bus
due to poor quality fuel.
6. Check your fuel supply for inap-
propriate conditions. Check all com-
ponents (dirty filters, pipe size, etc.).

7-10
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 7-3. CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT.)

WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electric-
ity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review the safety precautions
on pages xvii and xviii.
FAULT/
DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
EVENT CODE
1452 Genset Main A close command is sent to the 1. Verify that there is an output close
Breaker Fail to GM breaker but it does not close signal from the MCM3320 to the GM
Close Warning and an incoming close signal does breaker.
not show up on the MCM3320 2. Check the wiring between the
before the time delay expires. MCM3320 and the GM breaker.
3. While making sure to avoid contact
with Utility power, check the GM
breaker operation by simulating a
signal at its close terminal.
4. While making sure to avoid contact
with Utility power, check operation of
GM position contacts “A” and “B.”
5. Use the InPower Monitor menu to
monitor relevant discrete signals.
6. Make sure the GM breaker spring-
charging mechanism is operative.

1453 Genset Main Although an Open command is
Breaker Fail to sent to the GM breaker, it does not
Open Warning open and an Open signal does not
show up on the MCM3320 before
the time delay expires.
1. Verify that there is an output open
signal from the MCM3320 to the GM
breaker.
2. Check the wiring between the
MCM3320 and the GM breaker.
3. Check the GM breaker operation by
simulating a signal at the shunt trip.
The Utility breaker must be open.
4. Check operation of GM position con-
tacts “A” and “B.” The Utility breaker
must be open. Check wiring to the
MCM3320.
5. Use the InPower Monitor menu to
monitor relevant discrete signals.
6. Make sure the GM breaker spring-
charging mechanism is operative.

1454 Genset Main Signals from position contacts “A”
Breaker Position and “B” are contradictory: one
Contact Warning indicates the breaker is open and
the other indicates the breaker is
closed. In order for this fault to be
displayed, the contradictory
message must be active for two
seconds.
1. Verify that the wiring of contacts “A”
and “B” is according to proper wir-
ing: each one must be wired to spe-
cific block terminals. Do not inter-
change positions.
2. Verify that the signals coming to the
MCM3320 from these contacts are
transmitted in a proper way to the
block terminals by the whole wiring.
3. While making sure to avoid contact
with Utility power, make sure the
contacts have a good mechanical
operation by manually opening and
closing the GM.

7-11
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 7-3. CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT.)

WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electric-
ity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review the safety precautions
on pages xvii and xviii.
FAULT/
DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE
EVENT CODE
1455 Utility Main Signals from position contacts “A”
Breaker Position and “B” are contradictory: one
Contact Failure indicates the breaker is open and
Warning the other indicates the breaker is
closed. In order for this fault to be
displayed, the contradictory
message must be active for two
seconds.
1456 Synchronizer The synchronizer fails to achieve
Output Limit a match point when it puts the
Warning voltage and/or frequency at their
extreme values (lowest, highest)
of the allowed bandwidth for a
time period that is greater than the
fail-to-synchronize time period.
This diagnostic logic is shown
below.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Verify that the wiring of contacts “A”
and “B” is according to proper wir-
ing: each one must be wired to spe-
cific block terminals. Do not inter-
change positions.
2. Verify that the signals coming to the
MCM3320 from these contacts are
transmitted in a proper way to the
block terminals by the whole wiring.
3. While making sure to avoid contact
with Utility power, make sure the
contacts have a good mechanical
operation by manually opening and
closing the UM.
1. Verify that the Failure to Synchro-
nize time is not too low.
2. Verify that the Permissive Phase
Window is not too low.
3. Verify that the Permissive Voltage
Window is not too low.
4. Check to see that the Permissive
Window time is not too high.

If:
Frequency match is at the high or low limit, or
Voltage match is at the high or low limit, or
Voltage match has failed,
Then a synchronizer output warning is initiated.
1457 Fail to This warning is displayed when 1. Verify that the voltage bias and fre-
Synchronize the synchronizer is ON AND quency bias signals to the gensets
Warning Permissive Close is allowed. are arriving at the correct terminals.
Permissive Close Not Allowed is 2. Verify that the MCM3320 is sending
continuously for a Failure to bias signals to the gensets.
Synchronize time period. 3. Check the speed-governing system
of each genset.
4. Check the fuel quality.
5. Make sure that all MCM3320 and
genset meters are properly cali-
brated.

7-12
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 7-3. CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT.)

WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electric-
ity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review the safety precautions
on pages xvii and xviii.
FAULT/
DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE
EVENT CODE
1458 Synchronizer This warning is displayed when
Phase Rotation the synchronizer is ON AND the
Mismatch the Utility Phase Rotation is
Warning different from the Genset Phase
Rotation and this status is true
continuously for a Fail-to-
Synchronize time period.
1483 Common This warning is active whenever
Warning Event any other warning fault state is
active.
1534 Load Control This message is displayed when
Output Event there is an active load control
output event.
1541 Genset Failed to This warning only applies to
Come Online installations with four or fewer
Warning gensets.
This warning is displayed when
the MCM3320 sends a start signal
to a genset for coming online but it
does not do it within the genset fail
time setting period. When the
related paralleling breaker closes,
the time stops.
When the MCM3320’s menu
system is used to set the genset’s
kW value to zero, then the control
does not acknowledge the
existence of the genset.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Use InPower to observe data proc-
essing on the MCM3320.
2. Verify that Genset and Utility input
voltage lines to the MCM3320 match
the ones shown on the terminal
block as to Phase Rotation and line-
to-line match.
3. Make sure the Genset and Utility
power lines are properly connected
to relevant breakers. Improper con-
nections can result in a catastrophic
breaker closure.
4. Check the Genset and Utility VT
connections and polarities, if used.
Search for the active warning and fol-
low the appropriate relevant trouble-
shooting procedures elsewhere in this
document.
This message is for information
purposes only.
This message can be mapped to an
output.
1. Although only one faulted genset
can trigger this fault, check to see in
more gensets are in the same condi-
tion.
2. Check each genset control to see
what fault has occurred and follow
the genset troubleshooting instruc-
tions. If there is no active fault and
the genset appears to be operating
normally, check breaker operation
and check breaker position signaling
to the MCM3320.
3. Check to see that the genset’s fail-
ure-to-start time delay is not set too
low.
4. Check for any other active faults and
correct them, as described else-
where in this manual.

7-13
PRELIMINARY
TABLE 7-3. CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT.)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electric-
ity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review the safety precautions
on pages xvii and xviii.
FAULT/
DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE
EVENT CODE
1689 Real Time Clock This warning is displayed to
Power Interrupt remind you to set the real-time
Warning clock properly (date and time)
when the control is powered up.
The clock will retain the time for at
least 24 hours without DC power
being supplied to the control.
1912 Utility Loss of The phase difference in electrical
Phase Warning degrees between adjacent phase
UM voltage phasors is greater
than 150 degrees OR less than 90
degrees and this is true
continuously for a Utility Loss of
Phase Drop-Out Delay.
1913 Genset Loss of This warning is active if the phase
Phase Warning difference in electrical degrees
between adjacent phase GM
voltage phasors is greater than
150 degrees OR less than 90
degrees and this remains true
continuously for the Utility
Loss-of-Phase Drop-Out Delay.
1914 Utility Phase This warning is active whenever
Rotation Warning the Utility Phase Rotation
mismatches the System Phase
Rotation for at least one second.
7-14
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Use the control’s menu system to set
the real-time clock properly.
1. Check to see that there is no incom-
ing missing line at the MCM3320
relevant Utility voltage inputs.
2. Make sure there are no loose con-
nections.
3. Since there is little chance that there
is a real phase difference in Utility
voltage phasors, focus on bad con-
nections.
1. Verify that there is no missing in-
coming line at the MCM3320 rele-
vant to the GM voltage inputs.
2. Make sure there are no loose con-
nections.
3. Since there is little chance that there
is a real phase difference in Utility
voltage phasors, focus on bad con-
nections.
1. Use InPower to verify data process-
ing on the MCM3320.
2. Use InPower to check the System
Phase Rotation setting.
3. Verify that he Utility input voltage
lines to the MCM3320 match the
ones shown on the terminal block as
to phase rotation and line-to-line
voltage.
4. To avoid the possibility of a cata-
strophic breaker closure, make sure
your genset and utility power lines
are properly connected to relevant
breakers.
5. Check the genset and utility VT con-
nections and polarities, if used.
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 7-3. CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT.)

WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electric-
ity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review the safety precautions
on pages xvii and xviii.
FAULT/
DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE
EVENT CODE
1915 Genset Phase This warning is active whenever
Rotation Warning the Genset Phase Rotation
mismatches the System Phase
Rotation for at least one second.
1916 Sync Check OK This event is for information
Event purposes only. It is active
whenever a Sync Check Close
Allowed event is active.
1989 kW Load Control This warning is active whenever a
Output Warning genset has not been able to reach
its load setpoint and the kW load
control output on the MCM3320
has been at its highest limit OR its
lowest limit for at least 60
seconds.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Use InPower to verify data process-
ing on the MCM3320.
2. Use InPower to check the System
Phase Rotation setting.
3. Verify that he Genset input voltage
lines to the MCM3320 match the
ones shown on the terminal block as
to phase rotation and line-to-line
voltage.
4. To avoid the possibility of a cata-
strophic breaker closure, make sure
your genset and utility power lines
are properly connected to relevant
breakers.
5. Check the genset and utility VT con-
nections and polarities, if used.
This event can be mapped to a pro-
grammable output.
1. Check the wiring from the MCM3320
to the Genset load setpoint input to
verify that there are no problems
with allowing signal arrival.
2. Verify that the load kW setpoints at
the genset’s control is not too low.
3. Make sure that all on-line gensets
are able to deliver demanded power
and applying derating factors.
4. Verify that all meters on the
MCM3320 are well calibrated.
5. Make sure that all GM CTs and VTs
are properly set on the MCM3320.
6. Check the speed governing systems
on all gensets, and check the ramp
times.

7-15
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 7-3. CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT.)

WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electric-
ity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review the safety precautions
on pages xvii and xviii.
FAULT/
DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
EVENT CODE
1991 kVAR Load This warning is active whenever a 1. Verify that the wiring from the
Control Output genset has not been able to reach MCM3320 to the Genset load set-
Warning the load setpoint and the kVAR point input is allowing signal arrival
Load Control Output on the with no problem.
MCM3320 has been at the highest 2. Verify that the load kVAR setpoints
limit OR the lowest limit for at least at the genset’s control is not too low.
60 seconds.
3. Make sure that all installed gensets
are able to deliver demanded power
after applying derating factors.
4. Verify that all meters on the
MCM3320 are well calibrated.
5. Make sure that all CTs and VTs are
properly set on the MCM3320.
6. Check the speed governing systems
on all gensets, and check the ramp
times.

1999 Maximum This warning is active whenever 1. Verify that the Maximum Parallel
Parallel Time the unit is NOT in extended Time setting is not too low for your
Reached parallel node AND the Maximum purposes. The maximum available
Warning Parallel Time Delay has expired. time is 30 minutes.
2. Make sure the test-start switch is in
good mechanical and electrical con-
dition.
3. Check the timer at your external
control unit that drives this switch
input.

2328 Utility Bus This event is for information This event can be mapped to a pro-
Available Event purposes only. grammable output.
This event is active if the
faults/events listed below are
inactive simultaneously. If a
sensor is disabled, the fault is
considered inactive.
• Fault 2331 − Utility Undervol-
tage Warning
• Fault 2358 − Utility Overvol-
tage Warning
• Fault 1223 − Utility Frequen-
cy Warning
• Fault 1912 − Utility Loss of
Phase Warning
• Fault 1915 − Genset Phase
Rotation Warning
• Fault 1914 − Utility Phase
Rotation Warning

7-16
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 7-3. CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT.)

WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electric-
ity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review the safety precautions
on pages xvii and xviii.
FAULT/
DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
EVENT CODE
2331 Utility The utility bus voltage is less than 1. Make sure the Utility Undervoltage
Undervoltage the Undervoltage Drop-Out Threshold is safe for the connected
Warning Threshold and it stays there for a load.
time period greater than the 2. Verify that this value is not too close
Undervoltage Drop-Out Delay. to the rated voltage.
3. Make sure that the time delay for
this fault is not set too low.
4. Check the AVR system operation at
each individual genset.
5. Make sure that all AC voltage sen-
sors are properly calibrated at the
MCM3320 and the Utility.
6. Use InPower to monitor and make
any necessary adjustment.
7. Check the wire size, distance, and
loose connections.
2332 Utility Bus This message is displayed when This message is for information
Connected Event the utility main breaker position purposes only.
auxiliary contacts send a message This message can be mapped to an
stating that the utility main breaker output.
is closed.
2333 Genset Bus This message is displayed when This message is for information
Connected Event the genset main breaker position purposes only.
auxiliary contacts send a message This message can be mapped to an
stating that the genset main output.
breaker is closed.
2358 Utility The utility bus voltage is greater 1. Make sure the Utility Undervoltage
Overvoltage than the Utility Overvoltage Threshold is safe for the connected
Warning Drop-Out Threshold and it stays load.
there for a time period greater 2. Make sure the Utility Overvoltage
than the Drop-Out Delay. Threshold is safe for the connected
load.
3. Verify that this value is not too close
to the rated voltage.
4. Make sure that the time delay for
this fault is not set too low.
5. Make sure that all AC voltage sen-
sors are properly calibrated in the
MCM3320.
6. Use InPower to monitor and make
any necessary adjustment.
7. Check VT connections, if used.

7-17
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 7-3. CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT.)

WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electric-
ity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review the safety precautions
on pages xvii and xviii.
FAULT/
DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
EVENT CODE
2396 Utility Main This fault indicates that a close 1. Verify that there is an output close
Circuit Breaker command was sent to the UM signal from the MCM3320 to the UM
Fail-to-Close breaker but it did not close and the breaker.
Warning incoming close signal did not 2. Check the cabling between the
show up on the MCM3320 before MCM3320 and the UM breaker.
the time delay expired.
3. Check UM-breaker operation by
simulating a signal at its close termi-
nal.
4. Check operation of the UM “A” and
“B” position contacts. Check the wir-
ing to the MCM3320.
5. Use InPower to monitor relevant dis-
crete signals at the Monitor menu.
6. Make sure the UM-breaker spring-
charging mechanism is operative.
7. Verify that the sequence of your
specific topology application is cor-
rect.
2397 Utility Main This fault indicates that an open 1. Verify that here is an output open
Circuit Breaker command was sent to the UM signal from the MCM3320 to the UM
Fail-to-Open breaker but it did not open and the breaker.
Warning incoming open signal did not show 2. Check the cabling between the
up on the MCM3320 before the MCM3320 and the UM breaker.
time delay expired.
3. Check UM-breaker operation by
simulating a signal at the shunt trip.
4. Check operation of the UM “A” and
“B” position contacts. Check the wir-
ing to the MCM3320.
5. Use InPower to monitor relevant dis-
crete signals at the Monitor menu.
6. Make sure the UM-breaker spring-
charging mechanism is operative.
7. Verify that the sequence of your
specific topology application is cor-
rect.
2416 Calibration This warning is displayed 1. Cycle power to the MCM3320.
Checksum Error whenever there is a specific 2. If the fault persists, use InPower to
Warning mismatch regarding comparison of make an Initial Calibration.
some internal data on the
3. If the problem continues, replace the
microprocessor.
control board.

7-18
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 7-3. CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT.)

WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electric-
ity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review the safety precautions
on pages xvii and xviii.
FAULT/
DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
EVENT CODE
2647 Load Demand This warning is displayed when 1. Make sure that up to four gensets
Setup Warning incorrect data was entered on the are set with a non-zero Kw rating. If
control’s Load Demand Setup your installation includes more gen-
menu. The Load Demand feature sets, the additional gensets must
is only available when there are have their Kw rating set to zero.
two, three, or four gensets. 2. To avoid nuisance starting a stop-
ping, make sure that the difference
between the pickup and dropout is
at least 5%. Although some applica-
tions may want a tighter trim, it is
recommended that default differ-
ence be set to 20%.
3. Verify that the Genset Fail time
delay be set to a number that is less
than the Load Demand Initial time
delay and the Load Demand Shut-
down time delay.
2648 Remote I/O This warning is displayed when 1. Check for loose connections and
Communications the MCM3320 loses communica- broken wiring.
Failure Warning tion with the optional AUX101 I/O 2. If present, verify that the AUX102
module expansion board is attached to the
AUX101.
3. Check to see that the AUX101 com-
munications LED is green.

7-19
PRELIMINARY

TABLE 7-3. CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT.)

WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electric-
ity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review the safety precautions
on pages xvii and xviii.
FAULT/
DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
EVENT CODE
2965 Genset Bus This event is for information This event can be mapped to a pro-
Available Event purposes only. grammable output.
This event is active if the
faults/events listed below are
inactive simultaneously. If a
sensor is disabled, the fault is
considered inactive.
• Fault 1328 Generator Bus
Breaker Tripped Warning
• Fault 1452 − Generator Bus
Breaker Fail-To-Close Warn-
ing
• Genset Stop Command must
be inactive and Gen CB can
be open or closed
• Fault 1225 − Generator Bus
Undervoltage Warning
• Fault 1224 − Generator Bus
Overvoltage Warning
• Fault 1226 − Generator Bus
Frequency Warning
• Fault 1913 − Generator Bus
Loss of Phase Warning
• Fault 1915 − Generator Bus
Phase Rotation Warning
2971 Test / Extended This message is displayed when a This message is for information
Parallel Event test or extended parallel session is purposes only.
active. This message can be mapped to an
output.
None Lost Settings Scheduler Program and Exception After a download, manually re-establish
settings are lost if the controller the settings.
firmware is downloaded.
Transition Type and Extended After an Update Calibration or Capture
Parallel Enable settings are not File Overlay, check the System Setup
properly restored when using settings and correct them, if necessary.
InPower Update Calibration or
Capture File Overlay features.

7-20
PRELIMINARY
ABNORMAL SCENARIOS / FAULT
REACTION
In general, the rules for abnormal situations are to
try to connect to an available source (utility pre-
ferred) and to avoid taking any breaker actions
which could unintentionally parallel two sources.
Utility Main Fail to Open
If a utility main fail to open occurs during an open
transition transfer to the genset bus, the
MCM3320 flags the fault and continues trying to
open the utility breaker.
If a utility main fail to open occurs during a closed
transition transfer or extended paralleling, the
MCM3320 flags the fault, stops trying to open the
utility breaker, and opens the genset main breaker.
It will not reattempt to open the utility breaker until
the user resets the fault.
Utility Main Fail to Close
If a utility main fail to close occurs, the MCM3320
treats this as a utility source failure. It takes the nor-
mal actions for a utility source failure and will stay in
this state until the user resets the fault.
Utility Main Breaker Contacts
Normally the control expects the breaker ‘a’ and ‘b’
contacts to be in opposite states. If they are not, the
MCM3320 flags the fault and considers the utility
breaker to be closed. If the current of all three
phases are above an adjustable threshold (5% de-
fault), the control has confirmed that the breaker is
closed. If this is not the case the control considers
the utility source as failed and takes normal actions
from there.
If the control attempts to open the utility breaker,
the breaker contacts may or may not read correctly.
If they read correctly (breaker is open), the transfer
to the genset can proceed. If the contacts are still
indicating conflicting information, then a transfer to
the genset is not possible. In this case, it is possible
that the load could be unpowered, depending on
the actual state of the utility breaker. This contact
failure state is latched until the user resets the fault.
Utility Main Breaker Tripped
If the utility breaker tripped input on the MCM3320
is active, the MCM3320 flags a fault and considers
the utility source as failed and then takes normal
7-21
actions from there. If the tripped input goes inac-
tive, the utility source can be considered available
again. (This is not a latched operational state, even
though a user reset is required to clear the fault.)
Utility Main Breaker Disconnected
If the utility main breaker is racked out for service,
the MCM3320 sees this as a utility breaker contact
failure and starts the gensets and transfers to the
genset bus. If this operation is not desired, the indi-
vidual genset controls must be put in the Off mode.
The MCM3320 does NOT have a cell switch input.
Genset Main Fail to Open
If a genset main fail to open occurs during an open
transition transfer to the utility bus, the MCM3320
flags the fault and continues trying to open the gen-
set breaker.
If a genset main fail to open occurs during a closed
transition transfer or extended paralleling, the
MCM3320 flags the fault, stops trying to open the
genset breaker, and opens the utility main breaker.
It will not reattempt to open the genset breaker until
the user resets the fault.
Genset Main Fail to Close
If a genset main fail to close occurs, the MCM3320
treats the genset source as not available and takes
normal actions from there. This state is latched un-
til the user resets the fault.
Genset Main Breaker Contacts
Operation is analogous to Utility Main Breaker
Contacts.
Genset Main Breaker Tripped
Operation is analogous to Utility Main Breaker
Tripped.
Genset Main Breaker Disconnected
If the genset main breaker is racked out, the
MCM3320 sees this as a genset main breaker con-
tact failure which results in the genset source being
unavailable.
Fail to Disconnect
A failure to disconnect can occur when the genset
and utility sources are paralleled. If one of the
breakers fails to to open when commanded to do
so, the fail to disconnect logic then tries to open the
 PRELIMINARY
other breaker. If it succeeds, the action is complete
and this state is latched until the user resets the fail
to open fault. However, if upon attempting to open
the second breaker, it too fails to open, then the
MCM3320 flags the fail to disconnect fault and acti-
vates the breaker inhibit line to the individual gen-
set controls in a last attempt to disconnect. In addi-
tion, the fail to disconnect fault can be mapped to
one of the eight configurable outputs which can in
turn be used to externally trip a breaker. This entire
logic function can be optionally disabled.
Maximum Parallel Time
If extended paralleling is not enabled, then the
maximum paralleled time is enforced by the
MCM3320. If the maximum parallel time is exceed-
ed, the MCM3320 disconnects from the genset bus
and flags a maximum parallel time fault. This state
is latched until the user resets the fault. (For exam-
ple, paralleling cannot occur again until the fault is
rest.)
Fail to Synchronize
If the synchronizer is unable to bring the genset bus
into sync with the utility bus within the fail-to-sync
time delay, the MCM3320 flags the fault. A fail to
synchronize can occur for a number of reasons: the
utility is unstable, the utility frequency or voltage is
out of range of the synchronizer, the genset bus is
unstable, etc.
If a fail to synchronize occurs, the MCM3320 can
take one of three actions:
• The default action is to continue trying to syn-
chronize.
• The MCM3320 can be configured to stop syn-
chronizing until the user resets the fault.
• The MCM3320 can be configured on a retran-
sfer to utility to go back to the utility on an open
transition.
Genset Bus Failure
If the genset bus fails during a test with load, the
MCM3320 does an immediate open transition re-
7-22
transfer to the utility, overriding the retransfer time
delay and any active retransfer inhibit.
If the genset bus fails while paralleled, the
MCM3320 immediately opens the genset main
breaker.
Utility Source Failure
Aside from the normal utility source failure opera-
tion, if the utility source fails while paralleled, the
MCM3320 immediately opens the utility main
breaker.
Lockout
A number of the faults can cause the control opera-
tion to be restricted until the user resets the fault (as
described in some of the above abnormal scenar-
ios). Collectively this is called control “lockout”.
The control panel has an LED on it which indicates
this situation. The faults which cause control “lock-
out” are:
1. Utility Breaker Fail to Close Fault State = Ac-
tive
2. Utility Breaker Fail to Open Fault State = Ac-
tive
3. Utility Breaker Position Contact Fault State =
Active
4. Genset Breaker Fail to Close Fault State = Ac-
tive
5. Genset Breaker Fail to Open Fault State = Ac-
tive
6. Genset Breaker Position Contact Fault State
= Active
7. Fail to Synchronize Fault State = Active AND
Fail to Sync Lockout Enable = Enabled
8. Maximum Parallel Time Fault State = Active
9. Genset Bus Overload Fault State = Active
AND (Load Demand Enable = Enabled OR
Load Add Shed Enable = Enabled)
PRELIMINARY

8. Wiring Diagrams
This section includes the following: Page
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram − Switchgear Interconnect (Transfer Pair) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram − Genset Interconnect (Transfer Pair) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram − Customer I/O Interconnect (Transfer Pair) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram − Switchgear Interconnect (Common Bus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram − Genset Interconnect (Common Bus − 4 Gensets or Less) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram − Genset Interconnect (Common Bus − 5 Gensets or More) . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram − Customer I/O Interconnect (Common Bus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram − Switchgear Interconnect (Isolated Bus with GM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram − Genset Interconnect (Isolated Bus with GM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram − Customer I/O Interconnect (Isolated Bus with GM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram − Switchgear Interconnect (Isolated Bus with No GM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram − Genset Interconnect (Isolated Bus with No GMs − 4 Gensets or Less)8-14
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram − Genset Interconnect (Isolated Bus with No GMs − 5 Gensets or More)8-15
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram − Customer I/O Interconnect (Isolated Bus with No GM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram − Switchgear Interconnect (Master Synchronizer Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram − Genset Interconnect (Master Synchronizer Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram − Customer I/O Interconnect (Master Synchronizer Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram − Connectors and Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram − Optional Load Add / Load Shed Interconnect (AUX101) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
MCM3320 Wiring Diagram − Optional Load Add / Load Shed Interconnect (AUX102) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
MCM3320 Board Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

8-1
PRELIMINARY

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

8-2
PRELIMINARY

No. 630-3133 Sh 1 of 20
Rev. D Sys: HP
Modified 2/2006

MCM3320 WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 1 OF 20)

8-3
PRELIMINARY

No. 630-3133 Sh 2 of 20
Rev. D Sys: HP
Modified 2/2006

MCM3320 WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 2 OF 20)

8-4
PRELIMINARY

No. 630-3133 Sh 3 of 20
Rev. D Sys: HP
Modified 2/2006

MCM3320 WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 3 OF 20)

8-5
PRELIMINARY

No. 630-3133 Sh 4 of 20
Rev. D Sys: HP
Modified 2/2006

MCM3320 WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 4 OF 20)

8-6
PRELIMINARY

No. 630-3133 Sh 5 of 20
Rev. D Sys: HP
Modified 2/2006

MCM3320 WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 5 OF 20)

8-7
PRELIMINARY

No. 630-3133 Sh 6 of 20
Rev. D Sys: HP
Modified 2/2006

MCM3320 WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 6 OF 20)

8-8
PRELIMINARY

No. 630-3133 Sh 7 of 20
Rev. D Sys: HP
Modified 2/2006

MCM3320 WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 7 OF 20)

8-9
PRELIMINARY

No. 630-3133 Sh 8 of 20
Rev. D Sys: HP
Modified 2/2006

MCM3320 WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 8 OF 20)

8-10
PRELIMINARY

No. 630-3133 Sh 9 of 20
Rev. D Sys: HP
Modified 2/2006

MCM3320 WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 9 OF 20)

8-11
PRELIMINARY

No. 630-3133 Sh 10 of 20
Rev. D Sys: HP
Modified 2/2006

MCM3320 WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 10 OF 20)

8-12
PRELIMINARY

No. 630-3133 Sh 11 of 20
Rev. D Sys: HP
Modified 2/2006

MCM3320 WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 11 OF 20)

8-13
PRELIMINARY

No. 630-3133 Sh 12 of 20
Rev. D Sys: HP
Modified 2/2006

MCM3320 WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 12 OF 20)

8-14
PRELIMINARY

No. 630-3133 Sh 13 of 20
Rev. D Sys: HP
Modified 2/2006

MCM3320 WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 13 OF 20)

8-15
PRELIMINARY

No. 630-3133 Sh 14 of 20
Rev. D Sys: HP
Modified 2/2006

MCM3320 WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 14 OF 20)

8-16
PRELIMINARY

No. 630-3133 Sh 15 of 20
Rev. D Sys: HP
Modified 2/2006

MCM3320 WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 15 OF 20)

8-17
PRELIMINARY

No. 630-3133 Sh 16 of 20
Rev. D Sys: HP
Modified 2/2006

MCM3320 WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 16 OF 20)

8-18
PRELIMINARY

No. 630-3133 Sh 17 of 20
Rev. D Sys: HP
Modified 2/2006

MCM3320 WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 17 OF 20)

8-19
PRELIMINARY

No. 630-3133 Sh 18 of 20
Rev. D Sys: HP
Modified 2/2006

MCM3320 WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 18 OF 20)

8-20
PRELIMINARY

No. 630-3133 Sh 19 of 20
Rev. D Sys: HP
Modified 2/2006

MCM3320 WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 19 OF 20)

8-21
PRELIMINARY

No. 630-3133 Sh 20 of 20
Rev. D Sys: HP
Modified 2/2006

MCM3320 WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 20 OF 20)

8-22
 TABLE 8-1. MCM3320 BOARD CONNECTIONS
Connection
System
Connector Connector Schematic Optional for
MCM3320 Connection Name Connects To Topology Signal Type Description
Assignment Type Signal Name Applicable
Applicability
Topologies?
Switch I/O / PCCNet (TB1)
PCCNet B+ TB1-1 Fused B+ PCCNet Device ALL Yes B+ Power Output B+ output fused at 1/2 Amp with self-resetting PTC device; use to supply operator panel;
supplied from Battery 1 and Battery 2
PCCNet RS-485 A TB1-2 Mon 485 A PCCNet Device ALL Yes RS-485 Port PCCNet RS-485 A; Port for auxiliary devices such as the control panel, bargraph, and I/O
modules
PCCNet RS-485 B TB1-3 Mon 485 B PCCNet Device ALL Yes RS-485 Port PCCNet RS-485 B; Port for auxiliary devices such as the control panel, bargraph, and I/O
modules
PCCNet RS-485 Gnd/Shield TB1-4 Return8 PCCNet Device ALL Yes Return PCCNet RS-485 Ground/shield reference; Port for auxiliary devices such as control panel,
bargraphs, I/O modules
SPARE Lside8 TB1-5 Lside 8 Low-Side Output This signal is not used. Do not connect.
SPARE CTACT_7A TB1-6 CTACT_7A Relay Output (Dry N.O.) This signal is not used. Do not connect.
SPARE CTACT_7B TB1-7 CTACT_7B Relay Output (Dry N.O.) This signal is not used. Do not connect.
Plug
SPARE CTACT_6A TB1-8 Terminal CTACT_6A Relay Output (Dry N.O.) This signal is not used. Do not connect.
SPARE CTACT_6B TB1-9 Block CTACT_6B Relay Output (Dry N.O.) This signal is not used. Do not connect.
Discrete Input Return TB1-10 Return9 Customer I/O ALL Return Use as signal return for switch inputs.
synchronizer Enable TB1-11 Switch 20 Customer I/O ALL Yes Switch Input Use to enable synchronizing when in Manual mode or when the module is used only as a
synchronizer (otherwise, sync enabling is automatically done by the control)
SPARE Switch21 TB1-12 Switch 21 Customer I/O ALL Switch Input This signal is not used. Do not connect.
Discrete Input Return TB1-13 Return10 Customer I/O ALL Return Use as signal return for switch inputs.
Override TB1-14 Switch 22 Customer I/O ALL Except MSO Yes Switch Input Use to force a transfer or retransfer to occur as quickly as possible; overrides transfer in-
hibit, retransfer inhibit, transfer time delay and retransfer time delay.
Discrete Input Return TB1-15 Return11 Customer I/O ALL Return Use as signal return for switch inputs.
Utility Source Failure TB1-16 Switch 23 Customer I/O ALL Yes Switch Input Use to indicate to the control that the utility has failed; for applications which desire to move
an external device, determine utility source availability in addition to internal sensors.
Switch I/O / DC Power In (TB2)
Test Start TB2-1 Switch 3 Customer I/O ALL Except MSO Yes Switch Input Starts/stops a test of the system; can be configured for with or without load
Battery − TB2-2 B-1 Genset Controls ALL Depends Battery Ground Ground return for either Battery1 or battery2 DC power source
Battery + TB2-3 B-2 Genset Controls ALL Depends Battery Ground Ground return for either Battery1 or battery2 DC power source
Extended Parallel Start TB2-4 Switch 13 Customer I/O UMGM, UMGX Yes Switch Input Starts/Stops and extended parallel mode; used for base load or peak shave operation
Battery − TB2-5 B-4 Station Battery ALL Depends Battery Ground Ground return for either Battery1 or Battery2 DC power source
Discrete Input Return TB2-6 Sw Rtn 5 Customer I/O ALL Return Use as signal return for switch inputs
Battery − TB2-7 B-3 Station Battery ALL Depends Battery Ground Ground return for either Battery1 or Battery2 DC power source
Battery 1+ TB2-8 B+4 Genset Controls ALL Depends B+ Power Input Battery DC power input; diode or’d with Battery2 input to allow redundant supply voltage
Battery 1+ TB2-9 B+3 Genset Controls ALL Depends B+ Power Input Battery DC power input; diode or’d with Battery2 input to allow redundant supply voltage
Relay Coil B+ Supply (Fused 2A) TB2-10 Relay Customer I/O ALL Yes B+ Power Output B+ output fused at 1Amp with self-resisting PTC device; use to supply high side of relay
Plug Supply coils which are returned output; supplied from Battery 1 and Battery 2
Terminal
Battery 2+ TB2-11 Block B+2 Station Battery ALL Depends B+ Power Input Battery DC power input; diode or’d with Battery1 input to allow redundant supply voltage
Battery 2+ TB2-12 B+1 Station Battery ALL Depends B+ Power Input Battery DC power input; diode or’d with Battery1 input to allow redundant supply voltage
SPARE Switch12 TB2-13 Switch 12 Switch Input (Wakeup) This signal is not used. Do not connect.
Fault Reset TB2-14 Switch 14 Customer I/O ALL Yes Switch Input Acknowledges and resets faults; also used to activate the fault flashout on the seven-seg-
ment display on the board (hold active for >5 seconds to activate this mode)
Configurable Output1 (Common Warning) TB2-15 Lside 7 Customer I/O ALL Yes Low-Side Output Configurable Output #1; intended to drive a relay coil; default as Common Warning
Configurable Output2 (Fail to Sync) TB2-16 Lside 5 Customer I/O ALL Yes Low-Side Output Configurable Output #2; intended to drive a relay coil; default as Fail to Sync
Configurable Output3 (Genset Available) TB2-17 Lside 6 Customer I/O ALL Yes Low-Side Output Configurable Output #3; intended to drive a relay coil; default as Gen Available
Configurable Output4 (Utility Available) TB2-18 Lside 4 Customer I/O ALL Yes Low-Side Output Configurable Output #4; intended to drive a relay coil; default as Utility Available
Connect to Grounded Chassis TB2-19 Chassis ALL No Chassis Ground Provides the I/O signal filter ground patch; it must be connected via a short wire/strap to the
earth grounded equipment chassis.

8-23
 TABLE 8-1. MCM3320 BOARD CONNECTIONS (CONT.)
Connection
System Optional for
Connector Connector Schematic
MCM3320 Connection Name Connects To Topology Signal Type Description
Assignment Type Signal Name Applicable
Applicability Topologies?
Switch I/O / CAN (TB3)
Load Govern Enable TB3-1 Lside2 Genset Controls UMGM UMGX No Low-Side Output Connect to the utility cb position inputs on the individual genset controls; tells the genset
controls when they are parallel to the utility
Load Demand Gen1 TB3-2 Lside1 Genset Controls ALL except MSO Yes Low-Side Output Connect to the load demand input on Genset#1
Master CAN Shield TB3-3 CAN0SHLD Shield This signal is not used. Do not connect.
Master CAN L TB3-4 CAN0L CAN Data This signal is not used. Do not connect.
Master CAN H TB3-5 CAN0H CAN Data This signal is not used. Do not connect.
Transfer Inhibit TB3-6 Switch 16 Customer I/O UMGM, UMGX Yes Switch Input Normally inhibit retransfer to genset; under some conditions, it is ignored; not the same as
gen cb inhibit
Retransfer Inhibit TB3-7 Switch 17 Customer I/O UMGM, UMGX Yes Switch Input Normally inhibit retransfer to utility; under some conditions, it is ignored; not the same as
util cb inhibit
Discrete Input Return TB3-8 Plug Sw Rtn 6 Customer I/O ALL Return Use as signal return for switch inputs
Load Demand Gen2 TB3-9 Terminal Lside 9 Genset Controls ALL except MSO Yes Low-Side Output Connect to the load demand input on Genset #2
Bl k
Block
Load Demand Gen3 TB3-10 Lside 10 Genset Controls ALL except MSO Yes Low-Side Output Connect to the load demand input on Genset #3
Load Demand Gen4 TB3-11 Lside 11 Genset Controls ALL except MSO Yes Low-Side Output Connect to the load demand input on Genset #4
Configurable Output5 (Fail to Disconnect) TB3-12 Lside 12 Customer I/O ALL Yes Low-Side Output Configurable Output#5; intended to drive a relay coil; default as Fail to Disconnect
Configurable Output6 (Synchronized) TB3-13 Lside 16 Customer I/O ALL Yes Low-Side Output Configurable Output#6; intended to drive a relay coil; default as Synchronized
Configurable Output7 (Sync Output Limit) TB3-14 Lside 15 Customer I/O ALL Yes Low-Side Output Configurable Output#7; intended to drive a relay coil; default as TBD
Configurable Output8 (Hardware Failure) TB3-15 Lside 14 Customer I/O ALL Yes Low-Side Output Configurable Output#8; intended to drive a relay coil; default as TBD
Paralleling Gensets Breaker Inhibit Output TB3-16 Lside 13 Genset Controls ALL except MSO Yes Low-Side Output Connect to all of the individual genset circuit breaker inhibit inputs; allows control to treat
individual genset breakers in concert as a genset main breaker
Master Inhibit TB3-17 1st Start Customer I/O ALL Yes Bidirectional Arbitration Phase 1 − Manual inhibit only; ground/return this signal to activate inhibit; Phase 2 − Inter-
connect between multiple 3320s in a multiple transfer pair situation to provide controlled
return to utility
Genset PT Inputs (TB6)
Gen Bus Voltage L1 TB6-1 Gen V1 UMGM Switchgear ALL No AC Voltage Input PT input connection; up to 480VLL nominal direct connection
Gen Bus Voltage L2 TB6-2 Plug Gen V2 UMGM Switchgear ALL No AC Voltage Input PT input connection; up to 480VLL nominal direct connection
Terminal
Gen Bus Voltage L3 TB6-3 Block Gen V3 UMGM Switchgear ALL No AC Voltage Input PT input connection; up to 480VLL nominal direct connection
Gen Bus Voltage N TB6-4 Gen N UMGM Switchgear ALL Depends AC Voltage Input PT input connection; up to 480VLL nominal direct connection
Genset CT Inputs
Genset Bus Current L1+ Wire 1 CT4+ UMGM Switchgear ALL Depends AC Current Input CT input connection; 1A or 5A secondary; two passes through hole for 1A, one pass
through hole for 5A
Genset Bus Current L2+ Wire 2 CT4− UMGM Switchgear ALL Depends AC Current Input CT input connection; 1A or 5A secondary; two passes through hole for 1A, one pass
through hole for 5A
Genset Bus Current L3+ Wire 3 CT5+ UMGM Switchgear ALL Depends AC Current Input CT input connection; 1A or 5A secondary; two passes through hole for 1A, one pass
Wire Passed through hole for 5A
Through CT
Genset Bus Current L1− Wire 4 Hole CT5− UMGM Switchgear ALL Depends AC Current Input CT input connection; 1A or 5A secondary; two passes through hole for 1A, one pass
through hole for 5A
Genset Bus Current L2− Wire 5 CT6+ UMGM Switchgear ALL Depends AC Current Input CT input connection; 1A or 5A secondary; two passes through hole for 1A, one pass
through hole for 5A
Genset Bus Current L3− Wire 6 CT6− UMGM Switchgear ALL Depends AC Current Input CT input connection; 1A or 5A secondary; two passes through hole for 1A, one pass
through hole for 5A
Utility PT Inputs (TB7)
Util Bus Voltage L1 TB7-1 Util V1 UMGM Switchgear ALL No AC Voltage Input PT input connection; up to 480VLL nominal direct connection
Util Bus Voltage L2 TB7-2 Plug Util V2 UMGM Switchgear ALL No AC Voltage Input PT input connection; up to 480VLL nominal direct connection
Terminal
Util Bus Voltage L3 TB7-3 Block Util V3 UMGM Switchgear ALL No AC Voltage Input PT input connection; up to 480VLL nominal direct connection
Util Bus Voltage N TB7-4 Util N UMGM Switchgear ALL Depends AC Voltage Input PT input connection; up to 480VLL nominal direct connection

8-24
 TABLE 8-1. MCM3320 BOARD CONNECTIONS (CONT.)
Connection
System Optional for
Connector Connector Schematic
MCM3320 Connection Name Connects To Topology Signal Type Description
Assignment Type Signal Name Applicable
Applicability Topologies?
Utility CT Inputs
Util Bus Current L1+ Wire 7 CT1+ UMGM Switchgear ALL Depends AC Current Input CT input
p connections;; 1A or 5A secondary;
y; two passes
p through
g the hole for 1A,, one pass
p
Util Bus Current L1− Wire 8 CT1− UMGM Switchgear ALL Depends AC Current Input through
h h the
h hole
h l for
f 5AA

Util Bus Current L2+ Wire 9 Wire Passed CT2+ UMGM Switchgear ALL Depends AC Current Input
Through CT
Util Bus Current L2− Wire 10 Hole CT2− UMGM Switchgear ALL Depends AC Current Input
Util Bus Current L3+ Wire 11 CT3+ UMGM Switchgear ALL Depends AC Current Input
Util Bus Current L3− Wire 12 CT3− UMGM Switchgear ALL Depends AC Current Input
Breaker Control (TB8)
(Do not connect) TB8-1 CTACT_1NC (Do not connect) This signal is not used. Do not connect.
Gen Main CB Close Relay 1 TB8-2 CTACT_1COM UMGM Switchgear UMGM, GM No Relay Output (Dry N.O.) Contact for closing genset main breaker; ratings 8A 30VDC/250VAC resistive, 3.5A
30VDC/250VAC inductive L/R=7msec or 0.4PF
Gen Main CB Close Relay 2 TB8-3 CTACT_1NO UMGM Switchgear UMGM, GM No Relay Output (Dry N.O.) Contact for closing genset main breaker; ratings 8A 30VDC/250VAC resistive, 3.5A
30VDC/250VAC inductive L/R=7msec or 0.4PF
(Do not connect) TB8-4 CTACT_2NC (Do not connect) This signal is not used. Do not connect.
Gen Main CB Open Relay 1 TB8-5 CTACT_2COM UMGM Switchgear UMGM, GM No Relay Output (Dry N.O.) Contact for opening gen main breaker; ratings 8A 30VDC resistive, 3.5A 30VDC inductive
L/R=7msec NOT rated for AC voltage
Gen Main CB Open Relay 2 TB8-6 CTACT_2NO UMGM Switchgear UMGM, GM No Relay Output (Dry N.O.) Contact for opening gen main breaker; ratings 8A 30VDC resistive, 3.5A 30VDC inductive
L/R=7msec NOT rated for AC voltage
Plug
Starts Gensets Relay.NC TB8-7 Terminal
e a CTACT_2NC Genset controls ALL except MSO Depends Relay Output (Dry N.C.) NC contact for starting gensets
Starts Gensets Relay.COM TB8-8 Block CTACT_3COM Genset Controls ALL except MSO No Relay Output (Dry COM) COM for starting gensets
Starts Gensets Relay.NO TB8-9 CTACT_3NO Genset Controls ALL except MSO Depends Relay Output (Dry N.O.) NO contact for starting gensets; connect in parallel to all genset remote start inputs
Utility Main CB Close Relay.1 TB8-10 CTACT_4A UMGM Switchgear UMGM, UMGX No Relay Output (Dry N.O.) Contact for closing utility main breaker; ratings 8A 30VDC/250VAC resistive, 3.5A
30VDC/250VAC inductive L/R = 7msec; for 0.4PF
Utility Main CB Close Relay.2 TB8-11 CTACT_4B UMGM Switchgear UMGM, UMGX No Relay Output (Dry N.O.) Contact for closing utility main breaker; ratings 8A 30VDC/250VAC resistive, 3.5A
30VDC/250VAC inductive L/R = 7msec; for 0.4PF
Utility Main CB Open Relay.1 TB8-12 CTACT_5A UMGM Switchgear UMGM, UMGX No Relay Output (Dry N.O.) Contact for opening utility main breaker; ratings 8A 30VDC resistive, 3.5A 30VDC inductive
L/R=7msec NOT rated for AC voltage
Utility Main CB Open Relay.2 TB8-13 CTACT_5B UMGM Switchgear UMGM, UMGX No Relay Output (Dry N.O.) Contact for opening utility main breaker; ratings 8A 30VDC resistive, 3.5A 30VDC inductive
L/R=7msec NOT rated for AC voltage
Analog I/O (TB9)
kW Load Setpoint TB9-1 kW Load Customer I/O UMGM, UMGX Yes Analog Input Analog input for setting the base load or peak shave kW setpoint; alternatively can be done
by trim
Analog Return TB9-2 Analog Rtn Customer I/O UMGM, UMGX Yes Analog Return Use a signal return for analog input/output
kVAR Load Setpoint TB9-3 kVAR Load Customer I/O UMGM, UMGX Yes Analog Input Analog input for setting the base load or peak share kVAR setpoint;alternatively can be
done by trim
kW Master Load Control TB9-4 Mstr Load Genset Controls UMGM, UMGX No Analog Output Analog output which sets the genset kW load govern level; connect in parallel to all genset
kW load set inputs; use shielded twisted pair cable
kVAR Master Load Control TB9-5 Speed Bias Genset Controls UMGM, UMGX Depends Analog Output Analog output which sets the genset kW load govern level; connect in parallel to all genset
Plug
g kVAR load set inputs; use shielded twisted pair cable
T
Terminal
i l
Analog Return TB9-6 Analog Rtn Genset Controls UMGM, UMGX No Analog Return Use as signal return for analog input / output
Block
(Do not connect) TB9-7 kW Share − (Do not connect) This signal is not used. Do not connect.
Master Frequency Bias + TB9-8 kW Share + Genset Controls ALL No Bidirectional Analog Connect to genset kW+ load share line; used for master synchronizing freq/phase match.
NOTE: PCC3100 wiring diagrams have the + and − designations reversed.
Analog Return TB9-9 Analog Rtn Genset Controls ALL No Analog Return Connect to genset kW− and kVAR− load share; used for master synchronizing.
NOTE: PCC3100 wiring diagrams have the + and − designations reversed.
Master Voltage Bias + TB9-10 kVAR Share + Genset Controls ALL No Bidirectional Analog Connect to genset kVAR+ load share line; used for master synchronizing voltage match.
NOTE: PCC3100 wiring diagrams have the + and − designations reversed.
(Do not connect) TB9-11 kVAR Share − (Do not connect) This signal is not used. Do not connect.

8-25
 TABLE 8-1. MCM3320 BOARD CONNECTIONS (CONT.)
Connection
System Optional for
Connector Connector Schematic
MCM3320 Connection Name Connects To Topology Signal Type Description
Assignment Type Signal Name Applicable
Applicability Topologies?
Breaker Status Inputs (TB10)

Genset Main CB Position A Contact TB10-1 Switch 8 UMGM Switchgear ALL Depends Switch Input The ‘a’ contact from genset main breaker; control uses this to determine breaker position
Genset Main CB Position B Contact TB10-2 Switch 2 UMGM Switchgear ALL Depends Switch Input The ‘b’ contact from genset main breaker; control used this only to determine breaker cir-
cuit failure by comparing it to the ‘a’ contact; this feature can be enabled/disabled
Genset Main CB Tripped TB10-3 Switch 9 UMGM Switchgear ALL Yes Switch Input Use to indicate to control that genset main is tripped. Control will consider source unavail-
able.
Discrete Input Return TB10-4 Sw Rtn 1 UMGM Switchgear ALL Depends Return Use as signal return for switch inputs
Genset Main CB Inhibit TB10-5 Switch 7 Customer I/O ALL except MSO Yes Switch Input Opens genset main if closed; inhibits closure if genset main is open.
Auto/Manual TB10-6 Switch 15 UMGM Switchgear ALL Yes Switch Input Puts the breaker and synchronizer control in manual mode; control relinquishes breaker
control unless fundamental rules are violated
Utility Main CB Position A Contact TB10-7 Switch 1 UMGM Switchgear ALL Depends Switch Input The ‘a’ contact from utility main breaker; control uses this to determine breaker position
Discrete Input Return TB10-8 Sw Rtn 2 UMGM Switchgear ALL Depends Return Use to signal return for switch inputs
Utility Main CB Position B Contact TB10-9 Switch 10 UMGM Switchgear ALL Depends Switch Input The ‘b’ contact from utility main breaker; control uses this only to determine breaker circuit
Plug failure by comparing it to the ‘a’ contact; this feature can be enabled / disabled
Utility Main CB Tripped TB10-10 Terminal Switch 11 UMGM Switchgear ALL Yes Switch Input Use to indicate to control that the utility main is tripped. Control will consider source un-
Block available.
Utility Main CB Inhibit TB10-11 Switch 4 Customer I/O ALL except MSO Yes Switch Input Opens utility main if closed; inhibits closure if utility main is open
Gen1 CB Position A Contact TB10-12 Switch 5 Genset Switchgear ALL except MSO Depends Switch Input The ‘a’ contact from genset#1 breaker; (required for load demand and some other configu-
rations)
Discrete Input Return TB10-13 Sw Rtn 3 Genset Switchgear ALL except MSO Return Use as signal return for switch inputs
Gen2 CB Position A Contact TB10-14 Switch 19 Genset Switchgear ALL except MSO Depends Switch Input The ‘a’ contact from genset#2 breaker; (required for load demand and some other configu-
rations)
Gen3 CB Position A Contact TB10-15 Switch 8 Genset Switchgear ALL except MSO Depends Switch Input The ‘a’ contact from genset#3 breaker; (required for load demand and some other configu-
rations)
Gen4 CB Position A Contact TB10-16 Switch 6 Genset Switchgear ALL except MSO Depends Switch Input The ‘a’ contact from genset#4 breaker; (required for load demand and some other configu-
rations)
Discrete Input Return TB10-17 Sw Rtn 4 Customer I/O ALL Return Use as signal return for switch inputs
Discrete Input Return TB10-18 Sw Rtn 7 Customer I/O ALL Return Use as signal return for switch inputs

RS-232 DTE ModBus RTU Port (J14)

Not Used J14-1 Customer I/O ALL This pin is not used; this pin is not connected to anything on the MCM3320 board
ModBus RS-232 Rx J14-2 232 Rx1 Customer I/O ALL Yes RS-232 Port (DTE) ModBus RS-232 RX input; NOTE: Port is shared with TB15.
ModBus RS-232 Tx J14-3 232 Tx1 Customer I/O ALL Yes RS-232 Port (DTE) ModBus RS-232 TX input; NOTE: Port is shared with TB15.
Not Used J14-4 Customer I/O ALL This pin is not used; this pin is not connected to anything on the MCM3320 board
ModBus RS-232 GND J14-5 232 Gnd1 Customer I/O ALL Yes RS-232 Port (DTE) ModBus RS-232 GND reference; NOTE: Port is shared with TB15.
DB-9 (Pins)
Not Used J14-6 Customer I/O ALL This pin is not used; this pin is not connected to anything on the MCM3320 board
RTS J14-7 232 RTS Customer I/O ALL Yes RS-232 Port (DTE) ModBus RS-232 RTS output; NOTE: Connected device must loop this back to the CTS
input
CTS J14-8 232 CTS Customer I/O ALL Yes RS-232 Port (DTE) ModBus RS-232 CTS input
Not Used J14-9 Customer I/O ALL This pin is not used; this pin is not connected to anything on the MCM3320 board

RS-485 InPower or ModBus RTU Port (TB15)

Tool/ModBus RS-485 Gnd/Shield TB15-1 485 Gnd1 Customer I/O ALL Yes RS-485 Port ModBus OR Tool RS-485 shield connection port
B+ Output (Fused −.25A) TB15-2 Bat+ Out Customer I/O ALL Yes B+ Power Output Auxiliary B+ output to power RS-232 to RS-485 converter, or low cost display
Plug
Pl
Tool/ModBus RS-485 A TB15-3 485 A Customer I/O ALL Yes RS-485 Port ModBus OR Tool RS-485 port
Terminal
Tool/ModBus RS-485 B TB15-4 Block 485 B Customer I/O ALL Yes RS-485 Port ModBus OR Tool RS-485 port
Bidirectional Wakeup TB15-5 Bidirectional Bidirectional Discrete This signal is not used. Do not connect.
Wakeup− (Wakeup)

8-26
Cummins Power Generation
1400 73rd Avenue N.E.
Minneapolis, MN 55432
1-800-888-6626
763-574-5000 International Use
Fax: 763-528-7229
Cummins is a registered trademark of Cummins Inc.